Earlier this year, Husqvarna unveiled a new range of robot mowers designed to make automated lawn care more affordable and accessible. Since then, we've put the Automower 308V and Automower 312V to the test, and now it's time to turn our attention to the Automower Aspire R6V.

As the most affordable model in the lineup, the Aspire R6V promises the same efficient mowing experience and smart app-controlled features as its siblings, but in a more compact package aimed at smaller gardens.

The big question is whether it delivers the premium Husqvarna experience for less, or if the lower price comes with too many compromises. I've been putting it to work in my own garden to find out.

Price and availability

The Aspire R6V is the most affordable model in Husqvarna's new range, priced at £999, sitting below the Automower 308V (£1,249) and Automower 312V (£1,499). It's still not cheap, but it's a great price for a robot mower from Husqvarna.

It's available directly from Husqvarna, as well as specialist retailers including Platts Robotics and Revill Robotic Mowers.

Unboxing and setup

Getting the Aspire R6V up and running was very straightforward. Following the on-screen instructions in the Automower Connect app, I created a map of my garden by driving the mower around the perimeter and dropping virtual pins at each corner.

If your lawn has lots of curves or awkward angles, I'd recommend adding a few extra waypoints during setup. That said, it's no problem if you don't get it perfect first time, as you can easily edit, move or add waypoints later. I found myself tweaking the boundaries over the following days to improve edge coverage, and the app makes this very easy to do.

As the Aspire R6V is designed for smaller gardens, Wi-Fi is also less likely to be an issue. The entire mower range relies on a stable wireless connection across your lawn, but my medium-sized garden had strong coverage throughout, so setup was absolutely fine.

I know patchy Wi-Fi has been a sticking point for some users of the 308V and 312V, although those models can be paired with Husqvarna's RS1 EPOS module, which removes the need for strong Wi-Fi at the far end of your garden.

Design and features

As mentioned, the Aspire R6V is aimed at smaller gardens, covering up to 600m² – or 400m² in more complex layouts. Rather than using physical boundary wires, it creates virtual boundaries through the Automower Connect app using satellite positioning.

One of the Aspire R6V's standout features is its built-in AI Vision camera. Instead of relying solely on satellite positioning, the camera works alongside AI-powered object detection to recognise and avoid obstacles on your lawn. It also helps maintain accurate navigation in areas where satellite coverage isn't quite as strong, resulting in more consistent mowing.

Like every Husqvarna robot mower, the Aspire R6V is controlled entirely through the Automower Connect app. Here you can create virtual boundaries, define multiple mowing zones, set temporary stay-out areas, schedule mowing sessions and even choose different mowing patterns. If your lawn has separate sections, you can also configure secondary work areas.

The Aspire R6V can further detect narrow passages, automatically adjust mowing frequency based on grass growth using Weather Timer, and uses Spiral Cutting to tackle longer patches more efficiently. It also includes GeoFence anti-theft protection, receives over-the-air software updates, and works with both Amazon Alexa and Google Home for voice control and status updates.

When the battery gets low, it quietly returns to its charging station before heading back out to finish the job once it's recharged.

Performance

One of my favourite things about the Aspire R6V is how little attention it needs. Once I'd set up a schedule, I stopped thinking about mowing altogether – no longer having to worry about fitting it into my weekend.

The mapping system deserves particular praise. Creating the initial map was quick, but what really impressed me was how tweakable everything is afterwards. Being able to move a boundary by just a few inches makes a huge difference, and I've continued fine-tuning the edges to maximise coverage.

It also handled uneven terrain much better than I expected. My garden has plenty of bumps and slopes, but the Aspire R6V tackled them confidently without getting stuck or digging into the lawn. Combined with the excellent app controls, it's easy to tailor exactly how and where you want it to mow.

The AI Vision camera also worked well during testing. It consistently spotted low-hanging branches that were inside the mowing zone and steered around them without issue. Whilst I haven't encountered every possible obstacle yet, it looks promising, and is able to detect objects from around 5-10cm away.

Charging from empty took roughly three hours, which delivered around two hours of mowing time. That felt like a fair trade-off to me, particularly as the app lets you monitor charging progress and battery levels during this time.

My biggest criticism is that it can struggle with particularly complex garden layouts. My lawn includes patios, raised beds and several awkward protruding sections that require very sharp turns. In these areas, the mower couldn't always reach every corner, meaning I still needed to tidy up with a strimmer every couple of weeks – which I'd already been doing around the edges anyway.

Curved borders also require a little extra patience during setup. If you don't place enough waypoints, the mower joins them with straight lines, which can leave parts of curved edges untouched. Thankfully, the app makes it easy to add extra points or reposition existing ones until you've got the shape exactly right.

Verdict

The Husqvarna Automower Aspire R6V combines effortless setup and consistently impressive cutting performance into a compact package that's perfect for smaller gardens. It isn't flawless, but the compromises I've listed are easy to forgive considering the price. If you've been curious about wire-free robot mowers but couldn't justify the cost of that comes with premium models, the Aspire R6V hits a sweet spot, delivering everything most homeowners need for significantly less money.

Alternatives to consider

If you're after a robot mower that can tackle almost any terrain, I'd recommend the excellent Mammotion Luba 2 AWD – provided your budget stretches that far.

If you're looking to spend less, the LawnMaster L10 is a brilliant budget alternative for lawns up to 400m². It doesn't have the same level of smart features, but for considerably less money, it delivers impressive results on smaller gardens.

Credit where it’s due – Potensic is arguably the sole remaining consumer camera drone manufacturer with enough clout and expertise to regularly take on the might of DJI.

Yes, there’s also Autel (who now appear to be concentrating on the commercial market) and, of course, HoverAir and its small but perfectly-formed fleet of excellent follow-me models.

I’m also fully aware that Amazon is filled with a wide range of cheap-as-chips ‘4K UHD’ camera drones with prices too low to be believable, but we’ve given up looking at them because they’re almost universally awful in every conceivable respect.

Shenzhen-based Potensic, on the other hand, has continued to innovate since its inception in 2014, and you don’t survive that long against a reliable, premium brand like DJI unless you consistently provide products people want at a price that undercuts at least some of the competition. That’s the Atom 3 in a nutshell.

Potensic Atom 3 review

Price and availability

The Potensic Atom 3 is available across the UK and much of Europe, with launch stock appearing through Potensic and selected retailers like Amazon. In the UK, pricing starts at around £329.99 for the Standard Kit, rising to around £579 for the Fly More Combo with the new RC PTD 2 controller we’re reviewing here. European pricing ranges between €359 and €659, depending on bundle configuration.

As with DJI, US buyers may not get the chance to fly this little tyke because it’s unavailable as of writing, though Potensic does list a US price of $679.99.

Specifications

• Dimensions (L×W×H): 236 x 168 x 63mm (unfolded), 91 x 148 x 62mm (folded)
• Weight: 249 grams
• Flight time: 40 mins
• Max transmission range: 16 km‌
• Max flight speed (Sport mode): 35mph / 58km/h
• Max Wind Speed Resistance: 24mph / 38.5km/h (Level 5)
• Built-in GPS: Yes
• Intelligent QuickShot modes: Multiple
• Tracking: Yes – AI Visual Tracking
• Internal storage: No
• Sensor: 1/1.3-inch CMOS image sensor
• FOV: 84˚
• Max aperture: f2.8
• Max photo resolution: 50MP JPG
• Max video resolution: 4K (3840×2160) @ 60fps (horizontal shooting); 2.7K (2704X1520) @ 60fps; FHD: 1920x1080 @ up to 60fps
• Slow motion: 1080p - 4, 5, 6, 7x
• Image stabilisation: 3-axis mechanical gimbal (tilt, roll, pan)
• Connectivity: WiFi / Bluetooth

Design and build quality

The new Atom 3 is a major upgrade over its Potensic Atom 2 predecessor, specifically in the camera department. While the Atom 3 remains just one gram under the CAA’s sub-250g drone category for hassle-free flying without having to meet a surfeit of aeronautical legalities, it’s actually a few centimetres larger in stature than the Atom 2 and equipped with a much better camera. I’m not sure how Potensic’s designers managed that, but a tip of the hat to them.

At 91 x 148 x 62mm when folded and 236 x 168 x 63mm (excluding props) when unfolded, the Atom 3 comes in a more rounded fuselage that looks a little more premium even though you won’t notice this once it’s in flight.

The main takeaway here is that it is still compact enough to slip into a backpack, shoulder bag (as supplied with the Fly More bundle I'm reviewing here) or even a roomy jacket pocket.

Also, it’s refreshingly quick to deploy and pack away since it comes with a well-designed gimbal and props protector that is much easier to fit than the DJI Mini 4 Pro’s one-direction-only plastic arrangement that somehow never seems to fit without a degree of faffing.

Let’s skip straight to the camera since that is the Atom 3’s most promising new facet. At 1/1.3-inches, its new CMOS sensor is the same size as that fitted to the DJI Mini 4 Pro and capable of capturing 50MP stills and recording 4K video at up to 60fps, which immediately puts it in more serious company than most entry-level rivals.

While its maximum aperture of f2.8 is mysteriously smaller than the Atom 2’s f1.8, its all-new AI Night Mode makes a very good fist of boosting image clarity and brightness while reducing excessive noise in low-light conditions. The camera can be used in both horizontal and vertical formats.

The Atom 3 also supports RAW image capture, HDR and a P-Log profile for those who like grading footage afterwards, while the bitrate tops out at a healthy 120Mbps.

I also rate the digital Medium Tele mode, which functions as a 2x mid-telephoto crop that utilises the drone's 50MP sensor and AI image optimisation to retain very decent clarity. However, while the tele mode adds a touch of cinematic compression to your shots and is equally useful when using the Atom 3’s Dolly Zoom feature, it does have its limits.

Also, I’m surprised Potensic still continues to omit any onboard storage, as I discovered on arrival at my test site. Thankfully I was within walking distance of home to retrieve a MicroSD, but had I been out in the sticks I would have been really miffed. After all, every other decent drone comes with onboard storage as a basic requirement.

Another possibly very important element that this drone lacks is obstacle avoidance. If your flying style involves threading through trees, skimming buildings or generally relying on electronic safety nets, this might not be the drone for you.

Personally, I’ve rarely needed the obstacle avoidance system on my Mini 4 Pro because I prefer to keep visual contact and avoid risky manoeuvres altogether, but different pilots fly in different ways.

On the plus side, the Atom 3 comes with three speed modes. Video mode prioritises gentle movement for cleaner footage while Normal mode strikes a good balance between agility and control.

However, switch it into Sport mode, and the Atom 3 becomes noticeably more responsive, accelerating briskly and covering a huge amount of ground surprisingly quickly for its size. In Sport mode, the Atom 3’s top speed is a very respectable 35mph.

Now here’s the really good bit. The Atom 3 Fly More bundle I received ships with Potensic’s new RC PTD 2 screen controller, and it’s refreshingly practical with 1920 x 1080 resolution, 900 nits of brightness and 5.5 inches of screen estate that makes on-screen flight monitoring an unbridled joy.

You get a dedicated Return to Home button, a gimbal adjustment wheel, zoom control and a single shutter/record button that adapts depending on the selected shooting mode. Most importantly, there’s a physical flight mode switch – just like DJI’s controllers – for jumping between Video, Normal and Sport modes. This immediate access to Sport mode can be invaluable when a strengthening headwind suddenly turns the return journey into a battle of wits.

The controller also features Potensic’s PixSync 5.0 transmission system, offering a quoted maximum range of up to 16km – considerably further than most drone regulations would ever permit. Its integrated 5,000mAh battery, meanwhile, delivers up to four hours of operation and supports USB-C charging at up to 18W.

Flight performance

Like any DJI drone, the Potensic Atom 3 immediately puts any nerves at ease the moment it takes to the air. The controls are perfectly dialled for butter-smooth input without any sudden lurching, so I can’t see novices having any issues in this department.

Setup is refreshingly quick, too. Simply unfold the arms, power up the drone and controller, and you’re generally airborne within a minute or two. Granted, GPS lock isn’t the fastest I’ve seen, but the whole process feels streamlined rather than fiddly, especially when used with the all-in-one PTD 2 controller my press sample came with.

Once in the air, the Atom 3 delivers impressively stable performance for a lightweight sub-250g model (it features Level 5 wind resistance, which is good for wind speeds up to 24mph). The drone’s positional hold, too, is exceptional, even when there’s a stiff breeze.

If the noise of a drone troubles you, you’ll be pleased to learn that this one is among the quietest I’ve ever reviewed. Its gentle hum is far removed from the frenetic swarm-like screech of the DJI Avata 360 and HoverAir Aqua.

I personally haven’t been able to detect any major differences between this drone and any from the DJI stable when flying it. It does exactly what you want it to do with no nasty surprises like transmission dropouts, lag, or any unusual behaviour traits. It just flies as you would expect of any modern drone, and that’s testament to great design, well-crafted flight controllers and reliable software.

Camera performance

For a drone that sits firmly in the affordable, sub-250g category, the Potensic Atom 3’s camera performance is surprisingly accomplished and a significant step forward over the previous Atom 2.

While it’s not attempting to dethrone premium aerial platforms or even the similarly sized DJI Mini 4 Pro and DJI Mini 5 Pro, the Atom 3’s little camera delivers footage with enough sharpness, colour accuracy and dynamic range to satisfy everyone from casual flyers to content creators looking for quick, polished results without the need for much colour grading. However, it’s not without some anomalies.

I noticed that it did tend to overexpose shots much more than most DJI models when taken facing the sun so you’re advised to tap on an appropriate area of the display screen before shooting to properly set exposure, or you may end up with an image with blown highlights which is very difficult to fix in post-production.

This is most noticeable when shooting with a lot of sky in the frame. When the footage was viewed on a MacBook Air, I also noticed more banding in some sky shots than I would consider acceptable. And while it features an AI-generated night mode, I wouldn’t say it’s as dynamic as the DJI Mini 4 Pro, which has a much larger aperture.

On the plus side, I’ve been impressed by the Atom 3’s mechanical 3-axis gimbal, which helps produce footage that stays level and smooth, even during directional changes or in breezy conditions. Likewise, this drone’s AI tracking is a marked improvement over the Atom 2 and locks on to a subject with great accuracy and with very little drifting, even when using the Circle QuickShot feature and the subject is moving.

Autonomous QuickShots

The Potensic Atom 3 comes loaded with a tranche of AI QuickShot modes, several of which can be seen in the accompanying video above. Simply draw a box around yourself or your chosen subject, select an autonomous flight function and let the drone do the rest.

Alongside familiar options like Circle, Pull Away, Spiral, Rocket, Boomerang, Drift and CineRoll (a 360˚ horizon spin), there’s also AI-enhanced subject tracking – including side tracking at head height – and a very effective Dolly Zoom mode that creates that distinctive cinematic Hitchcock-style effect where the subject remains the same size in the frame while the background appears to stretch or compress dramatically behind it.

You can also select four levels of slow motion (4x, 5x, 6x and 7x) and a handy Waypoints function which follows a pre-programmed flight path replete with different elevations and camera angles.

Verdict

The Potensic Atom 3 delivers a surprisingly mature flying and imaging experience for not too much wonga. Its new PTD 2 controller makes it quick to set up and easy to control, while its updated camera and refined 3-axis gimbal produce acceptably sharp and stable footage.

While it can’t match DJI’s more expensive Mini 4 Pro for outright image depth and sharpness, it gets close enough in my opinion, and that makes it a perfect choice for budgeteers looking for a camera drone that doesn’t feel like a compromise.

Crafted from aluminium by the artisans at Bang & Olufsen’s legendary Factory 5 metalworks in Struer, Denmark, the Beosound Premiere is a premium Dolby Atmos sound system that combines serious sonic intent with striking style.

The good news is that beauty isn’t skin deep. A 10-driver array coupled to Wide Stage beam-forming technology hints at a (literally) elevated listening experience in an undeniably luxury package. So does the Premiere have it all, or is there any compromise?

Price & Availability

Positioned somewhere between the more affordable Beosound Stage (a snip at £/$1800 / AU$3850) and the flagship Beosound Theatre (a more reassuring £5590 / $6890 / AU$11,860), the Premiere is available now for £3100 / $5800 / AU$9400.

While it’s tempting to label the Premiere as a soundbar, the term is really a misnomer. What we have here is a (adopts a pretentious tone) high-end home entertainment solution. Okay, so it’s a soundbar... with bells on.

Features & What’s New?

The headline innovation here is Bang & Olufsen’s Wide Stage technology, which employs a combination of beam-forming and careful driver steering to create a soundstage that appears larger than the relatively compact dimensions of the Premiere might suggest.

The enclosure accommodates four 3-inch racetrack drivers, two 2-inch forward facing left/right cones, and a fascinating central assemblage comprising a pair of side-angled 2-inch drivers, one tweeter and a full-range upfirer. A bit of an Easter Egg, the latter has 1925 holes milled into its surface, as homage to B&O’s founding year.

Powered up, there’s no menu display, either on the device or via the screen. Instead the Premiere communicates via lighting effects and a few beeps – but you do have support for Beolink Surround, which enables compatible B&O speakers to integrate into a larger whole home wireless surround system.

Format support covers Dolby Atmos, Dolby Digital TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, PCM 7.1 and MPEG audio, but doesn’t extend bitstream DTS:X (although fewer titles seem to be using this these days anyway).

Sound Quality

From the first few moments of Christopher Nolan’s The Dark Knight, it’s clear this is an enclosure engineered with cinematic scale in mind. The Hans Zimmer score starts slowly, the Premiere ratcheting up tension with pinpoint placement as the Joker and his goons set about their bank robbery.

The dynamics of the system are evidenced by the shotgun retort of the bank manager as he takes on the clowns; the transient is sharp and dramatic, but precisely controlled.

Dialogue clarity is exceptional. Even during chaotic action scenes, voices remain clean and focused. And then there’s the bass. When Batman’s Tumbler roars into action, to confront the Scarecrow, the system digs impressively deep.

Similarly, Ghostbusters Frozen Empire opens with a couple of almighty thundercracks. These are delivered with scary intent, with next to no overhang.

But it’s not just the big noises that impress. When the firefighters arrive at the Manhattan Adventurers Club, and break into the frozen room, the crunch of their boots in the frost is crisp and clean.

There’s plenty of power on tap too. Under the hood, 10 power amplifiers are locked and loaded, with four 70 watt amps assigned to the woofers, 50W reserved for the tweeter, and five more 50W power modules for the remaining left/right/up firing/side firing cones.

The Beosound app offers a number of sound modes. These comprise Night, Game, Music, Movies and Speech. Movies and Game modes are cut from much the same cloth, and contribute a full-bodied sound stage, while Music has a lighter touch.

Speech is primarily useful for those who need greater clarity when it comes to following dialogue. The Night mode is compressed and should be avoided when possible.

What the Premiere doesn’t provide, at least on its own, is rear surround immersion. Dolby Atmos height effects are appreciable, but sound never fully wraps around the listening position.

Bang & Olufsen’s solution is straightforward: add compatible rear speakers using Beolink Surround. Pairing the Premiere with Beolab 8 or Beosound Emerge speakers would undoubtedly create a formidable system – but also seriously jack up the price. And I’m not sure I’d pay up.

Musical Clarity

Beethoven or box set? I’m not sure which best shows off this system’s talents. Normally, soundbars need to compromise when it comes to musical playback, but that’s certainly not the case here.

Indeed, music playback – no rear speakers required – could actually be the Premiere’s strongest suit.

Billie Eilish’s Bad Guy arrives with thunderous low-frequency energy. Bass feels deep, dense and almost tactile – and that tune’s big drop sounds phenomenal. The system’s claimed 34Hz low-end extension seems entirely believable.

Electronic music in particular benefits from the Premiere’s brawny presentation. I soon found myself down an EDM rabbit hole, just to see how low the Premiere goes. The more I played, the deeper it dug.

Yet the bar is equally adept with delicate instrumentation. ODESZA’s A Moment Apart sounds expansive and filmic, while the finger-picked textures within Taalbi Brothers’ Freestyle dance with remarkable clarity.

Perhaps the most impressive takeaway is the system’s transparency. The piano notes that open Kanye West’s Runaway ring out with striking realism and decay, while Singing Bones by The Handsome Family demonstrates astonishing spatial depth.

Design & Usability

As an example of industrial design, the Beosound Premiere is remarkable. Available in Natural Aluminium, Gold Tone and Anthracite Black finishes, the system oozes luxury.

My review sample came in Natural Aluminium, and looked spectacular. Not only is the profile unlike anything else in its class, the small touches, like the subtle illumination emanating around the stand and through the B&O logo, are a constant delight.

Adjust volume, and there’s a sliding light of confirmation. It's very clever.

Optional slatted covers in Oak, Grey Melange or Dark Oak can further tailor the appearance, but with one of these the system price rises yet again.

At 932mm wide and weighing 8.5kg, the Premiere will match TVs 55-inches or larger. It can be wall-mounted or positioned on its supplied pedestal stand.

Usability is fairly straightforward. Setup involves a brief automatic room calibration sweep, while subsequent functionality is controlled through Bang & Olufsen’s companion app, which offers access sound modes, source selection and multiroom features.

There’s no supplied remote control, although television remotes handle basic volume duties via HDMI eARC. The system is also compatible with the brand’s optional Beoremote One BT.

Connectivity reflects the system’s custom installation aspirations. Behind a removable rear cover sit three Ethernet ports, a single HDMI eARC connection and USB. There’s Wi-Fi and Bluetooth 5.4, alongside Apple AirPlay, Spotify Connect, Tidal Connect, Deezer and QPlay 2.0 compatibility.

The solitary HDMI input is a little disappointing, not least because it removes a good deal of system expandability. All HDMI source devices have to connect directly to your TV, so that audio can then be routed back over eARC. The provision of three Ethernet ports would seem to be indicative of the Premiere’s aspirations as part of a broader AV ecosystem, rather than an all-in-one switching hub.

Beosound Premiere review: Verdict

The Bang & Olufsen Beosound Premiere is one of the most visually distinctive TV sound systems currently available - and more importantly, has the sonic chops to justify its outré appearance.

With movies, it delivers scale, precision and drama in abundance. Dolby Atmos movie content is wide and engaging, while dialogue clarityshines. Music fans may love it even more. There’s nothing in this class able to combine muscular low-end authority, with this degree of finesse and transparency.

Any limitations are largely practical. The single HDMI connection restricts system building, and buyers seeking truly enveloping surround sound will eventually want additional speakers - and the price is already pretty rich.

Yet the Premiere is a triumph regardless. It’s technically ambitious, beautiful to look at, and an absolute thrill to listen to.

Also Consider

If the Beosound Premiere isn’t quite your style, consider the Samsung Q990H soundbar, a more conventional design with 300W wireless subwoofer and multi-directional rear speakers. This 11.1.4 sound system, compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X, features 23 drivers for a fully immersive listening experience.

Alternatively, Sony may tempt with the Bravia Theatre Trio. This three-part system comprises a centre enclosure plus a left/right array. Proprietary 360 Spatial Sound Mapping technology then generates up to 24 phantom speakers, to create a cinematic soundfield.

In the age of the best robot lawn mowers, it's easy to forget that cordless and petrol models still have plenty to offer. Robot mowers are of course hard to beat when it comes to convenience, but there's something very satisfying about mowing the lawn yourself. They also cost a fraction of the price of most robot mowers, especially if you can find one that delivers without costing the earth.

The latest model to impress me is the Hawksmoor 36V Brushless Cordless Lawnmower, and after spending some time with it, I believe it could be one of the best value cordless mowers around.

Price and availability

Priced at £249.99 and available exclusively from Toolstation, the Hawksmoor 36V Brushless Cordless Lawnmower sits firmly in the affordable end of the best cordless mower market.

Unboxing and set up

The mower arrived in a fairly substantial box, but most of it came pre-built, so all I had to do was attach and secure the handle using the locking knobs and washers. I then clipped on the grass collection box and charged the two included 18V batteries before inserting them. They already had some charge straight out of the box, so they only needed a quick top-up before I was ready to start.

Before setting off, you'll also want to choose your cutting height. There are six positions ranging from 25mm to 75mm, all adjusted using a single central lever. I started in the middle at setting three, as I could easily tweak it depending on how my lawn looked after the first pass.

Design and features

The Hawksmoor has a durable polypropylene deck that makes it lightweight enough to push around the garden whilst still feeling stable. Two large rear wheels make it much easier to take on uneven ground, and the foldable handle is useful for storing. Like most quality mowers, the handle can also be adjusted to suit your height.

Power comes from a 36V battery system, made up of two 18V batteries, paired with an efficient brushless motor. Being cordless also means you're free to move around the garden without dragging an extension lead behind you. The batteries also have LED lights that are red whilst charging and switch to green when they're fully charged, so you know when they're ready.

Grass clippings are collected in a generous 40-litre collection box, and there's also a built-in rear roller that leaves attractive lawn stripes. The only notable omission is a dedicated mulching mode, but that's unlikely to be a dealbreaker for most people.

At 12.3kg, the Hawksmoor isn't the lightest cordless mower on the market, but it's by no means the heaviest either. For a mower with this level of power and a 40-litre grass box, the weight feels perfectly reasonable and never became an issue whilst mowing.

Performance

After several weeks of use, I came away very impressed with the Hawksmoor 36V Brushless Cordless Lawnmower. It's not the most compact model available, but the adjustable handle made it comfortable to manoeuvre and the controls were simple to use. Starting and stopping the mower was very easy, and once I got going, it was immediately obvious that the brushless motor had plenty of power in reserve.

Battery life was another pleasant surprise. After the initial charge, I managed around four to five mows of my medium-sized garden before needing to recharge the batteries. Once depleted, they took roughly two hours to charge back to full, which is a respectable turnaround.

Performance also remained consistent, and the motor never felt like it was struggling, even when tackling thicker patches of grass. The large collection box also meant I only needed to empty it once at the end of each mow rather than stopping halfway through, which has often been the case with smaller mowers I've tested.

Verdict

The Hawksmoor 36V Brushless Cordless Lawnmower proves you don't have to spend a fortune to get a capable cordless mower. It delivers strong cutting performance, impressive battery life and useful features, including a rear roller and a generous 40-litre grass collector. Whilst it's not the most compact model on the market and lacks a mulching mode, those are easy compromises to make considering the price.

Alternatives to consider

If you're considering alternatives, the Gtech CLM50 is another excellent cordless mower that offers similar performance, dimensions and pricing.

If you have a larger garden, I'd recommend taking a look at the Husqvarna LC 251iS. Its spacious 65-litre grass collector makes it better suited to larger lawns, and because it runs on Husqvarna's 36V battery platform, it's an especially good option if you already own other Husqvarna cordless garden tools.

Helly Hansen has made a name for itself in rugged, reliable protection against the elements over the past 150 years, from outfitting Norwegian fishermen in the 1870s to outfitting tens of thousands of ski patrollers and mountain rescue teams across the globe today.

I’ve tested close to a dozen jackets by the brand, including waterproof hiking shells, ski jackets and down jackets, and they’ve nearly always been robust pieces that prioritise warmth and safety over weight and packability.

The Odin Infinity Minimalist Jacket is the first I’ve tested from the brand that’s truly ultra light, and it’s a testament to the time and effort Helly Hansen has put into testing and engineering in-house technologies, with input from mountain professionals.

I’ve been testing this jacket in mixed conditions in the Scottish Highlands and the Lake District, where we’ve been experiencing an even more unpredictable spring than usual, and I currently have it packed and ready to come with me to the Swiss Alps. I’m so impressed that I plan to continue wearing it through the summer and into the autumn.

Helly Hansen Odin Infinity Minimalist Jacket review

Price and availability

The Helly Hansen Odin Infinity Minimalist Jacket is available in men’s and women’s sizing from Helly Hansen for £380 / $400. The women’s design features a drop tail and comes in Ebony and bright Cranberry, which is the colour I tested and is great for making yourself visible on the mountain. The men’s design lacks the drop tail and comes in Ebony, Windy Blue and Ignite Orange.

Compared to the brand’s much more substantial Odin 1 World Waterproof Shell, this price is actually on the reasonable side, but it’s clearly a pricey jacket compared to other lightweight styles from different brands, coming in well above jackets like my Montane Phase Lite and Rab Firewall Alpine.

Design and materials

There are two standout details when it comes to the design of this jacket: its 3.5-layer construction and its ridiculously low weight.

I’ve tested plenty of 2-, 2.5-, and 3-layer rain jackets, but this is the first to go beyond three, and a representative from the brand explained to me that the approach helps increase resistance to water pressure while moving away from traditional, not-so-planet-friendly chemistries.

The 3.5 layers are built in a sandwich method around the brand’s in-house flexible Lifa Infinity waterproof membrane, which features both a non-porous PU layer and a breathable microporous layer underneath – not quite two layers, apparently, but more than one. The face fabric is Helly Tech Professional, and there’s a printed backing on the interior for reinforcement.

With all that, you might expect a thicker, stiffer jacket, but it feels as thin as any 2-layer jacket. I tested the XS, which is as small as it comes, and mine weighs only 180g. That’s lighter than my phone and pretty much every waterproof jacket I’ve ever tested (and I’ve tested many dozens), except for my Rab Phantom running jacket, which is only 2.5 layers in comparison.

The material has four-way stretch, but I don’t notice much, and the cut is quite slim, especially compared to what I’m used to with Helly. Despite that, I find the XS fits me really well and doesn’t feel restrictive anywhere, while I’m still able to wear it over a fleece or light puffer, making it usable for three seasons anyway.

The hood is helmet-compatible, which makes this a contender for blustery days on belay, though I think if I were heading out on a rugged alpine expedition, I’d still want to bring along my Arc’teryx Beta AR jacket.

They’ve also somehow managed to fit a RECCO reflector in the hood without adding much weight, again making this an option for more remote adventures if not ones where you’d be likely to encounter serious weather.

The hem is adjustable, the cuffs are partially elasticated, and there’s a zipped chest pocket big enough for my phone, plus an inner mesh pocket that becomes a handy pouch for packing the jacket away. It even has a loop so it can be clipped to my backpack.

Performance and comfort

This jacket looks and feels very much like a light layer you’d bring along as a “just in case” option, but I’ve worn it through several more sustained and heavy downpours, and one heavy hailstorm, and it largely behaves more like a top-of-the-mountain shell.

In heavy rain, it hasn’t wetted out on me yet, and the only real issue I’ve had with water ingress is that the cuffs do let some water in. I think this is partly down to them not being adjustable, and I think the low-wicking barriers on the cuffs could be wider. It’s also surprisingly windproof for such a thin, light jacket and on early, cold starts, I get instant warmth just by zipping it up.

For such good protection, I’ve been really impressed with the breathability, which is a bit of a unicorn characteristic in true waterproof garments and comes despite a lack of pit zips. I’ve worn it for plenty of milder, dry and sunny hikes, and I’m able to climb with it over a T-shirt and stay quite comfortable, without any clammy buildup on the inside.

The hood is truly excellent, with a collar that protects half my face and keeps it from blowing down. It’s peaked to provide extra face protection without blocking my vision, and it’s easy to cinch snugly around my head.

There are only two pockets on this jacket, but it’s got the one I think is most important: a zipped chest pocket so I can reach my phone even when I’m wearing my backpack (and it’s kept my phone dry in a storm). Considering some ultralight jackets ditch pockets altogether, I’m satisfied with this and personally don’t miss the hand-warming pockets I can’t reach with a backpack on anyway.

Verdict

The Helly Hansen Odin Infinity Minimalist Jacket is a bit of a marvel. It’s rare to find this level of protection at this weight, and I’m planning on getting a lot of use out of it, especially since it’s a layer I’m happy to wear around town as well as on the trail.

Not only does it protect me well against the elements, but it lacks the stiffness I’d usually expect for such a design, and it’s breathable enough to climb in during alpine starts and cooler days.

It’s not perfect, and I think subsequent versions could improve the cuff design, but for a truly packable and light jacket, it’s one of the better options out there (and at this price, it should be).

When it comes to the best folding phones, Honor has been at it for almost as long as Samsung. Indeed, the pair are at loggerheads with their respective Magic V and Galaxy Z Fold series.

Honor's latest – which arrives to worldwide markets mere weeks ahead of Samsung's anticipated next-gen product – also features a bolstered battery, aiming to set the benchmark of what such devices can achieve without compromise.

The Magic V6 also arrives with a tasty price cut for its on-sale date, notably at £1,499.99 in the UK (a £500 discount on its typical £1,999.99 RRP). That's a big attention grab in a competitive market that will certainly make people pay attention. As will the design.

My review model, dressed in red with gold embellishments, will no doubt divide the crowd. But there are other more mono options to suit the masses. So can Honor do just that – deliver a folding phone that's actually viable for a greater number of prospective buyers?

Price & Availability

As stated above, the Honor Magic V6 ought to cost you a penny shy of two grand. Its on-sale promo, at £1,499.99, brings it under even Samsung's Z Fold 7 (£1,799 at launch – albeit that was in 2025, as at the time of writing it's now much cheaper).

That's in the UK, where the phone is available from Honor.com. You won't be able to buy one in the USA or Australia – unless you unofficially import a model anyway. If you do, ensure it's the international version, as the Chinese model – which has an even larger battery capacity – has been available since March this year.

What's New?

• Front display marginally larger, at 6.52-inch (up from 6.42-inch)
• Larger battery – 6660mAh silicon-carbon (up from 5820mAh)
• Charging at 80W (up from 66W), wireless at 66W (was 50W)
• New-gen Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor
• Greater ingress protection – IP68 + IP69
• New colour options

So just what is new for this generation? I've included a general summary of points above as, generally speaking, the Magic V6 isn't a gigantic overhaul beyond the previous Magic V5 model.

That's no bad place to start, mind, with the latest model really refining details such as the degree of bezel around the display and, of course, the battery scale. That's the real enhancement for this generation – you're going to get a foldable that outlasts its competition.

However, Honor's improvement to the IP rating isn't to be sniffed at. It's hugely complex to make a product of this type survive water jets and submersion – but that's exactly what the Magic V6 brings to the table. So kudos to the team for that update.

Design

• Colour options: Gold, Red, White, Black
• 8.75mm thin when folded

How you feel about the Honor's style, however, is going to be a personal matter. I don't prefer it to the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold, just as we said of the previous V5 model, given the large camera bump in an octagonal-shaped housing.

As you can see from these review photos, too, the Red finish isn't for those who the quieter side of life. This phone has been the spark of many a conversation since I've been using it full time – and not only because it's a foldable.

There's an included case in the box, which in this case is also a matching red colour, complete with shimmering texture throughout. Some will love it. Some will call it overkill. I certainly lean to the latter. But, in the same breath, it is lovely to receive something different – especially when you've tested hundreds of phones in your work life.

Key to the Magic V6's design is also its thickness – or thinness, more to the point. Unfolded and one side of the unit is a mere 4mm, which is about half what you'd expect from a normal flagship phone. The other side, with that camera protrusion, does add to the thickness – not that it feels unbalanced to use.

Layout and controls are otherwise pretty familiar: the on/off button and separate volume up/down key sit to the right side when facing the front display. The charge port and SIM try are down the bottom. Speaker/mic openings flank top and bottom. And the manual unfolding mechanism feels very natural.

Displays

• Front: 6.52-inch OLED
  • 1080 x 2420 resolution
  • 6000 nits brightness
  • 120Hz refresh rate
  • No curved glass
• Internal: 7.59-inch AMOLED
  • 2172 x 2352 resolution
  • 5000 nits
  • 120Hz
• NanoCrystal Shield scratch-resistant coating

Display is inevitably a huge part of a folding phone's appeal. So for this generation, Honor has made all-important tweaks to ensure the Magic V6 has more to offer.

The front display, for example, is marginally bigger and brighter than before. But that's achieved in a footprint hardly different to its predecessor, by reducing the bezel scale.

There's also no curved glass to the front, which makes using this phone feel effortless – just like an everyday flagship, really.

Unfold to the main screen and you're presented with the same scale 7.95-inch interior panel. Again, the bezel is slighly reduced. But, importantly, Honor has further improved the presence of the 'crease' to the centre – reducing it by a significant percentage.

Can you still see the crease as a result of the fold? From the right angle, of course, just as you can in any folding phone. Even Oppo's Find N6 couldn't 100% eradicate this feature. Viewed head-on, however, I've rarely been affected by it negatively.

Just as we said of the previous Magic V5's displays, the Magic V6's solution takes that success and makes it better still. These increments are harder to achieve generation on generation, so for the V6 to progress is testament to its quality.

Performance & Software

• Qualcomm Snapdragon 8 Elite (Gen 5) processor
  • 12GB/16GB RAM variants
• UFS 4.1 storage (256GB / 512GB / 1TB variants)
• Google Android 16 with Honor MagicOS 10
• Upgraded vapour chamber for cooling

Living with a foldable has the potential to bring its share of downsides. After all, there's a lot of processor power stuffed into a slender body that's surrounded almost entirely by heat-producing displays.

Fortunately, the Magic V6 has invested in an upgraded vapour chamber system for cooling, marking it out as better than its V5 predecessor. I've not found this model to overheat in particular – and I've been gaming on it daily, just as I would with any phone.

Indeed, the V6's hardware armoury is choc-full of high-end choices. There's the latest Qualcomm Snapdragon flagship processor. Buy a larger storage variant and you'll get 16GB RAM, too.

That can be bolstered by Honor's RAM Turbo feature, utilising a further 16GB of storage. It's not active by default, but toggling it on and, following a phone restart, it's easy to activate – and I certainly recommend that every owner does this.

But while the Magic V6 has all the right physical hardware in place, it's not always the greatest joy to use in every way. That's down to the brand's MagicOS software, which continues to deliver some oddities.

Those used to stock Google Android and similar systems, like Samsung's One UI, may find the dual left/right downward swipe and lack of swipe up for search mechanisms to be peculiar. I've got used to them, but often find various admin tasks seem elongated due to the process of engaging with this system.

Furthermore, not every app runs perfectly. I've had issues with credit card apps timing out on repeat, for example, while various frugal battery-preserving settings can see others not function exactly as you'd expect. Plus there are a bunch of pre-installs that, for me, aren't of interest (and now deleted).

Battery Life

• Silicon-carbon battery type
• 6660mAh (non-China version)
• 80W wired charging, 66W wireless

Since using the Honor Magic V6 – as I have been for over a fortnight now – I've never once had battery anxiety. From a folding phone that's a rare thing indeed.

It's down to Honor's investment in silicon-carbon, which can deliver higher density in a smaller surface area. It's a newer technology that many of the big names are still trialling rather than putting into their devices.

Even over longer working days I've not made it to the red, with near to 25% remaining after a 16 hour day. That includes all of the usual – browsing and messaging, videos and gaming – across a split of work and personal use.

I've found no need to cap my usage. Even GPS tracking in Strava for at least an hour per day adds no dramas, aside from the sometime software bothers with some apps as mentioned above.

In short: the Honor Magic V6's battery life might be the single most positive reason to buy this phone. It blows Samsung's effort clean out of the water in this regard.

Cameras

• Main (triple):
  • 50-megapixel, f/1.6 aperture, optical stabilisation (OIS)
  • 64MP 3x optical zoom (70mm equivalent), f/2.5, OIS
  • 50MP ultrawide, f/2.2
• Front:
  • Both: 20MP, f/2.2

I shan't dwell on the camera aspect of this phone, as it's 99% the same as its predecessor. What is clear, however, is that Honor commits to its camera setup for its flagship foldable – as the large protrusion to the rear makes clear.

In that octagon you'll find a set of high-resolution sensors, from a 50MP main and 50MP ultra-wide, to the (rare in this market) 3x zoom lens at 64MP resolution. That's a lot of capability for a foldable device.

These cameras are competent in daylight conditions, offering great colours and accurate results. Having both an ultra-wide and zoom on hand I've found to be particularly useful – just don't push things too hard, as that zoom has its limitations.

Even low-light results are pretty solid (bar the ultrawide), there's a suite of modes for enhancements, and the overall collection is a great offering. It's also a great big lump on the rear of a phone that's otherwise so thin. Perhaps the gold trim of this review model only highlights its presence yet further.

Honor Magic V6 review: Verdict

Whether or not you like the aesthetic of my red and gold review model, there's no denying that the Honor Magic V6 is a very impressive folding phone.

It's slim and lightweight without compromise to performance – and the battery life on offer here is second to none. That alone is reason enough to buy this foldable over any other.

However, the software throws up its share of oddities, the camera unit to the rear is pretty huge, and there's no doubting the design will be too outlandish for some. That's where Samsung's alternative will edge its way in.

All in all, however, Honor has refined the folding phone experience yet further – and with an introductory price that's hard to ignore, too. That only enhances the magic appeal of the Magic V6.

Also Consider

While the price is appealing, there's no shortage of folding phones to select from right now. Samsung's Galaxy Z Fold 7 will cost you a little less, doesn't have the mega camera bump, and while the battery isn't as impressive overall, the software experience is just more streamlined.

Founded in 2015, Dreame has really hit its stride in recent years. It’s become a go-to brand name for vacuums, air fryers, and other kitchen appliances – and it’s even reportedly working on a rocket-powered EV car! It’s safe to say that Dreame has quite extensive expertise, but its coffee machines are what you should be most excited about.

For example, if you’ve been putting off buying a bean to cup coffee machine because you have minimal room in your kitchen, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine could be the solution. With a width of just 18cm, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is incredibly compact and with its cream colourway and touchscreen display, it looks the part, too.

But looks aside, how does the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim perform? I spent a few weeks using it to find out.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: price and availability

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is available to buy for £499 / $799 at Dreame. It comes with a 2-year warranty, and in a cream colourway. Compared to other bean to cup coffee machines, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is on the lower end of the price spectrum.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: unboxing and setup

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim arrived in a cardboard box with the main espresso machine unit, water tank, milk reservoir and base, milk tube, a power cord and cleaning tools. Most of it was wrapped in plastic but some items like the milk reservoir base were hidden inside the machine, so make sure to check that before you start using it.

Setting up the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim took no time at all. Once I’d taken it out of its box, all I had to do was remove the plastic wrapping and tape. From there, I added coffee beans to the bean hopper, filled the water tank and plugged the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim into an outlet.

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim self-cleans automatically when you turn it on and shut it down. It also comes with descaling and deep clean modes.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: design and features

Starting with the design, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim lives up to its ‘slim’ name as it measures 18cm in width, 40.25cm in length and 31.5cm in height. It only weighs 8kg and coupled with its dimensions, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is easy to move around and slot into small spaces in your kitchen.

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim has a 1.5-litre water tank which is located at the back of the machine. It’s easy to remove and refill via its handle that folds away within the lid. At the top of the machine is a 150g bean hopper and grinder which has nine grind levels to choose from to suit multiple bean types.

At the front of the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is its touchscreen control panel. The display is relatively simple as it shows your five drink options. It’s worth noting that because the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is fully automatic, you can’t change or customise your drink other than adjusting the bean grind within the hopper. The drinks available – which are shown via colour icons – are espresso, lungo, flat white, cappuccino and latte macchiato.

Also at the front of the machine is the dispenser where the coffee and milk comes out. This can be adjusted to suit different mug heights. A drip tray sits at the bottom, and you can open the lower half of the machine to find a container which catches your used coffee grounds.

For milk-based drinks, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim attaches to a 240ml milk reservoir via a milk tube. Promising ‘golden silky smooth extraction’, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim has 19 bar pressure which when combined with precise water temperatures and micro-pressure technology, makes delicious coffees with a smooth texture.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: performance

I loved the look of the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim, and felt it made my kitchen look more stylish and professional. Its cream colour might be basic for some, but the sleek lines on the main body and colour touchscreen controls look great in any kitchen aesthetic.

Dreame boasts about its 18cm width, and rightfully so. The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim took up hardly any room on my countertop, and while it’s mainly made of plastic, it felt high quality, especially the control panel, water tank, bean hopper and grinder. What felt a bit lacking was the milk reservoir, as it felt like more of an afterthought. It’s not built-in but instead connects on the side which I wasn’t a huge fan of.

As a fully automatic coffee machine, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim was very easy to use. I found it made rich espresso but was surprised to find it made quite small amounts of coffee. It made single and double shots well, but it felt more like a trickle of coffee than full shots, compared to other coffee machines I've tested. I tended to have half a mug of coffee when making a latte or cappuccino rather than a full one.

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim frothed and heated milk first before dispensing coffee which was something I wasn’t used to. I’ve tested many coffee machines, and the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is the first machine I’ve tried that makes coffee this way round.

Due to this, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim didn’t make a huge amount of foam for my cappuccino or latte macchiato drinks, so if you like your latte art, you won’t get it with this machine. However, the coffee tasted amazing, and I found the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim to heat both dairy and plant-based milk exceptionally well.

Everything was well packed away and designed with the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim. The drip tray and coffee puck container is built-in to keep everything tidy, and I enjoyed how you could raise the coffee dispenser up and down to suit different mug sizes. I was also surprised by how quiet the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim was, even when grinding beans.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: verdict

For those with smaller kitchens who don’t want to faff around customising their own coffees, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is a brilliant choice. It’s compact, stylish and fits in any space, plus everything is packed away tidily to save even more space and minimise kitchen clutter.

In terms of performance, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim made delicious tasting coffee, but at very small amounts. I’d say it works best for espresso, and despite its cheap-feeling milk reservoir, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim can also heat both dairy and plant-based milks to perfection – you just won’t get a huge coffee, nor very foamy milk.

At £499, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim is in the mid-range of bean to cup coffee machines. I’d recommend it to espresso lovers and small kitchen owners, as well as those who want something easy to use and quick coffees from a single touch.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim review: alternatives to consider

One of our favourite automatic coffee machines is the KitchenAid KF8. It’s exceedingly more expensive than the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim at £1,899, but it has an easy touchscreen interface, and a wide variety of espresso options. It’s also the most hygienic coffee machine we’ve ever used as it’s always constantly self-cleaning!

For something more versatile, the Ninja Luxe Cafe makes espresso, filter coffee and cold brew. It has an attractive black and stainless steel design, and simple touch, button and dial controls. It’s not as simple to set up as the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim, but it’s great value for money once you get started.

I’m way overdue with this Garmin Fenix 8 Pro review. I tested the MicroLED version of Garmin’s flagship wearable when it came out and have worn the AMOLED version a lot since then, but somehow I never found the time to put my thoughts into words. Turns out, you can’t forever put off doing things!

Not like writing what’s admittedly the best Garmin watch (well, the most feature-rich, anyway) is a huge burden. I’ve always loved using Garmin products, and the Fenix line has always held a special place in my heart, thanks to its rugged build and excellent mapping functionality.

That said, it almost feels like the Fenix 8 Pro came a bit too soon after the Garmin Fenix 8. Don’t get me wrong, it was an important launch – the world’s first microLED smartwatch! – but from a features perspective, it offers little that is tangibly different from its predecessor.

Sure, inReach Messenger is nice, and so is the MicroLED panel, but otherwise, you’re getting the same sensors and, most importantly, almost the carbon copy of the Fenix 8 user experience, especially if you opt for the AMOLED model.

I certainly wouldn’t throw away my Fenix 8 to get a Fenix 8 Pro, but even with that, it’s hard to deny that the Fenix 8 Pro is the best outdoor watch right now, all things considered. If you have an older Fenix and are keen on staying in the Garmin ecosystem, you’ll love the Fenix 8 Pro. Should you get one? Let’s find out.

Garmin Fenix 8 Pro review

Price and availability

The Fenix 8 Pro was launched in September 2025 and is available to buy now at Garmin UK, Garmin US, Garmin AU and Garmin EU.

The AMOLED version is available in 47mm and 51mm sizes, and starts at £1,030 / $1,200 / AU$2,100 / €1,300. The MicroLED option comes in one case size only (51mm) and costs a whopping £1,500 / $1,700 / AU$3,400 / €1,800.

The MicroLED retailed for more at launch, but Garmin has since permanently dropped the price to entice more people to get the watch. It’s still a huge investment, but there are often deals on the AMOLED version. Recently, Amazon knocked the price down to £726 in the UK.

Design

The Garmin Fenix 8 Pro is available in 47mm and 51mm case sizes, pairing them with a fibre-reinforced polymer case with a titanium rear cover, while the sapphire edition adds a lightweight titanium bezel and scratch-resistant sapphire crystal lens.

You can opt for Garmin's familiar AMOLED screen or the brand's first-ever MicroLED display. Both offer the same resolution and user interface, but the MicroLED panel delivers significantly higher brightness – up to 4,500 nits – making it exceptionally easy to read in harsh sunlight.

In direct sunlight, the MicroLED looks almost as if the graphics have been printed onto the glass, with outstanding visibility from virtually any angle.

The AMOLED model, meanwhile, peaks at around 2,000 nits, which is commendable but not necessarily on par with some rivals, including the Apple Watch Ultra 3 and the much more affordable Amazfit T-Rex Ultra 2. That said, the Fenix 8 Pro is still among the brightest displays you'll find on a sports watch.

The Fenix 8 Pro is rated to 10 ATM, making it suitable for swimming, freediving and recreational scuba diving, while redesigned leak-proof buttons improve reliability during underwater activities. Unlike other brands (e.g., Huawei Watch Ultimate 2), Garmin doesn’t advertise the Fenix line as a dive-first smartwatch, likely because it has its own dive watch line (the Descent line).

An integrated LED flashlight, complete with white and red light modes, returns for everything from pre-dawn runs to campsite chores. The watch itself can also shift to red mode (the screen), which is handy for after-hours watch staring. You can also set the watch to automatically switch to red shift mode after sunset.

Like the standard Fenix 8, the Pro includes a built-in microphone and speaker for Bluetooth phone calls, voice assistant support and offline voice commands, while Garmin's QuickFit strap system makes it easy to swap bands without tools. It all adds up to one of the most capable and best-built adventure watches currently available.

Features

If you've used a recent Fenix 8 or Enduro 3, very little about the Fenix 8 Pro will surprise you. That's not a criticism; Garmin has spent years building arguably the most comprehensive fitness and outdoor ecosystem on the market, and this generation is more about refinement than reinvention.

The only genuinely headline-grabbing addition is support for Garmin inReach messaging over LTE, allowing users to send and receive messages via the satellite communicator without carrying a phone, provided they have a compatible inReach subscription.

Prices start at £7.99 / $7.99 / AU$11.99 / €9.99, which is way more than the Oura subscription, for example, and it ‘only’ lets you message people when there is no reception. As such, this feature is only really useful for people who spend a lot of time off grid and require the ability to communicate with others who aren’t (unless the whole team have Fenix 8 Pro watches).

Health tracking is handled by Garmin's latest Elevate Gen 5 optical heart rate sensor, which debuted in May 2023 on the Garmin Fenix 7 Pro and the now discontinued (and very cheap) Garmin Epix Pro (Gen 2). It supports 24/7 heart rate monitoring alongside Pulse Ox, skin temperature tracking, ECG, respiration, stress tracking, Body Battery, HRV Status and advanced sleep analysis with Sleep Coach and nap detection.

Training features are equally extensive, with Training Readiness, Training Status, Daily Suggested Workouts, Endurance Score, Hill Score, Race Predictor and Garmin Coach all returning. The Fenix is the brand’s top outdoor watch, and as such, the UI prioritises mapping and navigation, but you can find all other training, health and smart features in the menus.

Strength training has also continued to improve, with automatic rep counting, muscle maps and guided workouts making it genuinely useful in the gym, while support for dozens of activity profiles means everything from trail running and ski touring to paddleboarding and open-water swimming is catered for.

The built-in microphone and speaker enable Bluetooth phone calls when paired with a smartphone, while voice assistant support lets you interact with Siri or Google Assistant if that’s what your heart desires.

I’ve never been too keen on chatting with my watch (or phone or smart speaker, the latter of which I don’t have), but given the price and the flagship nature of the Fenix 8 Pro, this is a feature Garmin must include.

The company also includes offline voice commands, allowing you to start activities, set timers or control certain watch functions even when you're away from mobile reception. Music storage, contactless payments via Garmin Pay, smartphone notifications and access to the Connect IQ store round out the experience.

Mapping, navigation and accuracy

Navigation has long been one of the Fenix series' biggest strengths, and the Fenix 8 Pro continues to set the benchmark. It comes preloaded with TopoActive maps, detailed road and trail mapping, ski resort maps and golf course data, while downloadable regional maps ensure you can plan routes and navigate without needing a phone signal.

There aren’t many watches I would trust for offline maps and route planning in uncharted areas, but Garmin watches have never let me down. Maps can be downloaded via the Connect app, and the map options are clearly labelled (e.g., United Kingdom and Northern Ireland). It’s a system that works and has been working for a long time.

Features such as ClimbPro break down upcoming ascents, NextFork shows the distance to the next trail junction, and Up Ahead lets you see upcoming aid stations, summits or points of interest. None of these is new, but they are part of the ever-so-extensive Garmin training ecosystem.

Dynamic round-trip routing remains one of my favourite features, generating surprisingly sensible running and cycling routes directly on the watch, while turn-by-turn navigation makes it easy to stay on course without constantly referring to your wrist.

The Fenix 8 Pro supports multi-band GNSS across GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, QZSS and BeiDou. It features SatIQ (now called Auto Select), which automatically switches to the most sensible GNSS method to conserve battery life. For example, it might switch to single-band in open areas and to maximum-accuracy mode in the forest. The brand doesn’t disclose how this feature works, despite my efforts to find out over the years.

Across months of testing, I found GPS tracks to be consistently clean, with little evidence of corner-cutting or wandering, even on heavily tree-lined trails and urban routes between tall buildings.

As for the Elevate Gen 5, Garmin’s wrist-based heart rate monitoring has improved significantly over the past few years, and during steady-state runs, long hikes and strength workouts, the Fenix 8 Pro tracked closely with a chest strap.

As with almost every optical sensor, short, high-intensity intervals can still produce the occasional lag, but for the vast majority of users, the onboard sensor is accurate enough that a chest strap becomes optional rather than essential.

Battery life and charging

Battery life has always been one of the Fenix range's defining strengths, and while the Fenix 8 Pro continues that tradition, there's now a much clearer distinction between the AMOLED and MicroLED models. If endurance is your top priority, the AMOLED version remains the one to buy.

Garmin rates the 47mm AMOLED model for up to 15 days in smartwatch mode (or eight days with the always-on display enabled), while the larger 51mm AMOLED stretches that to 27 days (or 15 days always-on).

Even in the most demanding multi-band GNSS mode, you're looking at up to 30 hours on the 47mm and 53 hours on the 51mm, giving you more than enough endurance for everything from marathon training to multi-day hiking trips.

Despite using what many expected to be a more efficient display technology, the first-generation MicroLED panel is considerably more power-hungry than Garmin's AMOLED screen.

Officially, the 51mm MicroLED model lasts up to 10 days in smartwatch mode (or just four days with the display always on), dropping to 34 hours in multi-band GNSS mode. That's still respectable by smartwatch standards, but it's a noticeable step backwards for a Fenix, especially one carrying such a significant price premium.

In practice, I found Garmin's estimates to be realistic. As with every Fenix before it, battery life varies widely depending on how you use the watch. Daily GPS workouts, frequent GNSS / map use, pulse oximetry (which I always turn off first thing), music playback (very bad for battery life) and LTE LiveTrack all have a measurable impact.

On the other hand, you have SatIQ, which does an excellent job of balancing accuracy and efficiency by engaging multi-band GPS only when conditions require it. Unless you're intentionally trying to drain it, the AMOLED model is still a watch you'll measure in weeks rather than days, which remains a rarity among flagship smartwatches.

Charging is unchanged (pun intended). The Fenix 8 Pro uses Garmin's familiar proprietary four-pin charging cable rather than adopting USB-C or wireless charging. While I'd still like to see Garmin modernise its charging solution, the cable is secure and reliable, and thanks to the watch's excellent endurance you'll rarely need to reach for it.

Verdict

The Garmin Fenix 8 Pro is, without question, the best outdoor smartwatch money can buy.

It combines class-leading navigation, outstanding training tools, reliable health tracking and exceptional build quality into a package that's as comfortable pacing a marathon as it is guiding you across a mountain range. The new MicroLED display is genuinely impressive, too, delivering brightness that no other sports watch can currently match.

The problem is that most of those strengths were already present on the Fenix 8. Unless you specifically want the dazzling MicroLED display or the ability to use inReach Messenger directly from your wrist, the day-to-day experience is remarkably similar. In short, the AMOLED Fenix 8 Pro is a refined version of an already excellent watch.

That's made more complicated by timing. With the Fenix 9 likely on the horizon, potentially bringing a new optical heart rate sensor and perhaps even combining AMOLED with Power Glass charging, the Fenix 8 Pro doesn't feel like the obvious long-term investment it might have six months ago.

Fortunately, it's now available well below its original launch price, making it considerably easier to recommend than it was at launch.

Even so, I'd still point most people towards the cheaper Fenix 8, which delivers almost the same experience for less money. But if you simply want Garmin's most capable adventure watch and don't mind paying for the privilege, the Fenix 8 Pro wears the crown. At least until its successor arrives.

I must confess, the Oura Ring 5 launch caught me by surprise. I’m used to the company tweaking its software and features for a while before moving on to launch new hardware. After all, there was a nearly three-year gap between the release of the Oura Ring Gen 3 and Oura Ring 4.

The new smart ring arrived less than two years after its predecessor (a year and eight months, to be precise), marking a much faster release cycle than we're used to from Oura. As a result, this is more of an evolutionary update than a revolutionary one, with a handful of notable hardware refinements rather than a wholesale redesign.

All of this makes reviewing the Oura Ring 5 something of a balancing act. With relatively few new features, I didn't need months to get familiar with the hardware or software. The harder part was deciding whether those refinements are enough to justify a new generation, especially in a smart ring market that's become far more competitive since the Ring 4 launched.

The good news is that the Oura Ring 5 is still the best smart ring on the market, but if you have the Oura Ring 4 (or the Oura Ring 4 Ceramic) and don’t mind its ‘heft’, there is no need to rush and order the new ring. What are the new features and how do they affect the user experience? Let’s find out.

Oura Ring 5 review

Price and availability

The Oura Ring 5 was announced in May 2026 and is now available to buy at Oura, starting at £399 / $399 / €429 / AU$649 for Silver and Black finishes, and rising to £499 / $499 / €529 / AU$799 for premium colours, including Gold, Stealth, Brushed Silver, and Deep Rose.

This makes the new wearable more expensive than its predecessor, which retailed for £349 / $349 / €399 / AU$569 at launch. These days, you can find plenty of deals on both the Oura Ring 4 and the Oura Ring 4 Ceramic, making them a lot more affordable.

Even though Oura’s products can be used without a subscription, you’ll need Oura Membership to enjoy the full benefits of the system. It costs £5.99 / $5.99 / €5.99 / AU$9.99 a month or £69.99 / $69.99 / €69.99 / AU$109.99 annually. Oura remains the only major smart ring brand to require a membership from its users.

Design and build quality

In the intro, I mentioned a “handful of notable hardware refinements,” which might have undersold the Oura Ring 5. The new ring is 40% smaller than the Oura Ring 4 and looks and feels very much like a standard jewellery ring when worn.

The Oura Ring 5 is 6.09mm wide and 2.28mm thick across its full size range, which makes especially larger models, including my size 12, look rather dainty. The ring comes in six colours, including two basic colours (Silver and Black), and four premium finishes (Brushed Silver, Stealth, Gold and Deep Rose).

The last two are either new (Deep Rose) or redesigned (Gold). I opted for the Deep Rose model to see how it looks in real life, and, more specifically, how it compares to the Rose Gold colourway it replaces. I’d say it looks more like a deep gold, slightly darker than your average gold jewellery but without the pink undertone of the Rose Gold version.

The Oura Ring 5 is not only slimmer but also a lot lighter than the Oura Ring 4. The weight range is 2.0–2.7g – compare it with the Oura Ring 4’s 3.3–5.2g. It’s worth noting that the new model comes in fewer sizes (6–13 vs 4–15). I’m sure a few Oura Ring users with larger / petite hands will be disappointed to hear this. The majority of Oura users will probably be fine, though.

The company redesigned the sensor paths, reducing the number from 18 to 12. Despite the fewer optical paths, the new ring is said to provide more accurate readings, thanks to the brighter LEDs and – I assume – a refined algorithm that analyses the data.

One thing I forgot to mention (and glad to see and feel the return of) are the notches inside the ring. The Oura Ring 4 was slimmer than the Oura Ring 3 and reduced the bumps to almost nothing.

Now that the Oura Ring 5 is even slimmer, the notches are back, making it much easier to rotate the ring into the correct position without looking. The bumps are nowhere near as pronounced as on the Oura Ring 3, but detectable enough to help you find how the ring should sit on your finger.

The brand says the Oura Ring 5's revised PVD coating is more durable than before, and my experience backs that up. Despite wearing it during kettlebell workouts, the ring emerged without any visible scuffs or scratches.

Features

Oura announced a few new features with the launch of the Oura Ring 5, but most aren’t available in all markets yet due to regulatory hurdles in certain countries. Chiefly among these is Health Radar, which continuously analyses multiple biometric signals to spot changes in your physiology before you notice symptoms yourself.

Health Radar builds on the older Symptom Radar feature but is much broader in scope. At launch, it offers Blood Pressure Signals, which examine long-term patterns that may indicate elevated cardiovascular strain, and Nighttime Breathing, which provides a rolling 30-day view of breathing disturbances during sleep.

It’s somewhat risky for Oura to offer blood pressure-related health features, given that Whoop got in trouble with the FDA for rolling out a similar feature in the US, but brand representatives were confident that Oura's approach is different. Living in the UK, I haven’t been able to test Health Radar yet.

Oura Advisor, the company’s AI chatbot, is now said to be more helpful. Admittedly, the brand focuses on women’s health improvements, but the bot can also give you more usable answers about other health metrics. I asked it why the app said I fell asleep too quickly (3-minute latency), given that I have a steady sleep schedule and excellent sleep scores, and it said there is nothing wrong with me. Thanks!

One area where Oura’s ecosystem has some serious catching up to do is activity tracking. Passive tracking is excellent, and the algorithm will recognise a bunch of popular sports, but historically, Oura Ring hasn’t been anyone’s first choice to track runs with. Now, the app can provide real-time heart rate and pacing feedback on runs via a smartphone widget.

This is commendable, but more of a first step rather than a replacement for Garmin watches. Of course, Oura never claimed it was coming after running watches, but the fact that the company now offers live tracking shows it’s aware of its system's shortcomings.

I imagine most Oura users run with their phones, so having access to live workout data is handy. However, the ring + smartphone setup won’t replace a watch for ‘proper’ training, not to mention the lack of training data, something the Oura ecosystem can’t provide.

As for passive health tracking such as sleep, the Oura Ring 5 is still my top choice. Stress tracking could be better (I ranted about this before), but even that issue won’t push the ring off my finger. There is also the community element; my wife always wants to know how our sleep compares and how many calories we burned during the same walk, for example, which makes me want to wear the ring.

As for accuracy, which Oura claims has improved with the fifth-generation ring, I found it difficult to notice any meaningful difference, purely because the Oura Ring 4 is pretty accurate for sleep tracking as is. Workout tracking is accurate enough, but as I mentioned above, only basic fitness data is being collected, which isn’t much to go on. The ring feels accurate for what it’s worth.

Battery life and charging

The company claims the Oura Ring 5 can last up to nine days on a single charge, depending on ring size and usage, and my experience suggests that's a realistic estimate.

Starting from a full battery, the ring still had 15% charge remaining after almost nine days of continuous wear, including 24/7 health tracking, sleep monitoring and workout logging.

While I didn't let it run completely flat (the app would prompt you to charge when the battery hits 15%), the results indicate the Ring 5 is more than capable of matching Oura's official figures under typical day-to-day use.

Better still, charging is remarkably quick. During testing, the battery climbed from 15% to around 50% in just 25 minutes, making it easy to top up while showering or getting ready in the morning rather than leaving it on the charger overnight.

Verdict

The Oura Ring 5 is an easy product to recommend, but perhaps not for the reasons Oura would like. It isn't a dramatic leap over the Ring 4, nor does it fundamentally change what the Oura ecosystem offers.

Instead, it refines an already excellent formula with a noticeably smaller and lighter design, a more durable finish and slightly longer battery life, all while retaining the outstanding sleep and recovery tracking that has made Oura the benchmark for smart rings.

Most of the headline software features are also rolling out to older rings, meaning existing Ring 4 owners aren't missing out on much. If you're happy with your current ring, there's little reason to upgrade, especially given the higher asking price and ongoing membership fee.

However, if you're buying your first smart ring, or upgrading from an older generation, the Oura Ring 5 is the one to get. No rival combines comfort, polished hardware, insightful health tracking and a mature app ecosystem quite as well.

Activity tracking still lags behind dedicated sports wearables, and the subscription remains a sticking point, but neither detracts from the fact that this is currently the most complete smart ring on the market.

Writing something like this Oura Ring Gen 3 review is always a huge undertaking. Not only do you have to use the actual wearable for a month to get a good picture of what it’s capable of, but you also have to test it against other products in the category to ensure you cover all bases and properly check accuracy.

It’s a painstaking process, although I must admit that testing what I think currently is the best smart ring, the Oura Ring Gen 3, wasn’t as cumbersome as some other bulky wearables. Smart rings are the least intrusive wearables to date, offering an almost pleasant, non-distractive way to track your health and well-being.

Of all the smart rings available now, Oura is probably the best-known and offers the most well-rounded functionality. The Finnish brand was one of the first companies to champion smart rings for sleep tracking and became a household name in the nine years since the first Oura ring was launched.

The Oura Ring Gen 3 is also one of the most expensive smart rings in the sense that you’ll have to pay a monthly membership fee to access most of your health data. Is it worth it? How does the Oura Ring Gen 3 compare to other smart rings? How does it compare to the best smartwatches, like the Apple Watch Series 9? Let’s find out.

Oura Ring Gen 3 review

Price and availability

The Oura Ring Gen 3 was launched in October 2021 and is available to buy now directly from Oura. It’s available in two models, Heritage and Horizon. Heritage (RRP $299) features the classic ‘plateau’ design, while the Horizon (RRP $349) is more ring-like with a smooth outer shell.

The Heritage model is available in four colours: Silver, Black, Stealth, and Gold. The Horizon model is available in two additional colours: Rose Gold and Brushed Titanium. For this review, I used the Oura Ring Gen 3 Horizon in the Brushed Titanium colourway. 

Specifications

• Materials: titanium with PVD coating
• Water resistance: up to 100m/328 ft.
• Width: 7.9mm
• Thickness: 2.55mm
• Weight: 4 to 6 grams
• Available sizes: 6-13
• Battery life: up to 7 days battery life
• Charging (0-100%): 80 minutes
• Connectivity: Bluetooth Low-Energy
• Sensors: optical heart rate sensor, blood oxygen sensor, Infrared PPG sensors, skin temperature sensors and 3D Accelerometer
• Compatibility: works with Android and iOS smartphones

Design and build quality

Considering the Oura Ring Gen 3 was launched three years ago, it’s not heavier or bulkier than other smart rings available now. It has a durable titanium shell with a Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) coating.

There is a small groove ('dimple') on the outer shell that helps you position the ring correctly, with the sensors looking at the underside of your finger (the groove should be on the side where your palm is).

PVD is a hard film layer that provides additional rigidity to metals such as titanium. The Oura Ring Gen 3 feels rugged, and although there are small scratches on the side of the ring that faces the palm (around the groove), the ring survived the month-long testing period without looking too beaten.

The tricky thing with smart rings is that, unlike smartwatches, they see a lot of action. You can use and wash your hands without interacting with a smartwatch, but you can’t do the same with a smart ring. As you grab things, the ring will inevitably be in the way, so it needs to be more durable than most wrist wearables.

The Oura Ring Gen 3 hasn’t got an ingress protection rating (I couldn’t find one, anyway), but it’s water resistant up to 100 metres, meaning you could wear it for showering and maybe even swimming. I’m not sure if it’s safe to use for pool swimming due to the chemicals in the water, but you shouldn’t be afraid of getting it wet, that’s for sure.

I’ve got big monkey hands, so I wore a size 12 ring. It weighs over 5 grams, but what is 5 grams between friends? It’s super lightweight; I had no problem wearing it continuously for days on end.

The Oura Ring Gen 3 most closely resembles the RingConn Smart Ring, albeit RingConn’s wearable has a more square design. Where they are similar is the small protruding area in the inner surface of the ring. The Oura Ring Gen 3 has three of these domes, under which you find the LEDs.

The inner surface isn’t as smooth as the Ultrahuman Ring Air, but that was launched years after Oura Ring Gen 3. The upcoming (?) Oura Ring Gen 4 might have a smoother inner surface.

Sleep tracking

The original purpose of the Oura Ring was to track sleep, and it’s still one of the best sleep trackers on the market. Although the company stresses that the Oura Gen 3 is not a medical device, numerous studies used the smart ring, as it’s considered one of the most accurate wearable devices.

According to the brand, the Oura Ring Gen 3 achieves 79% agreement with polysomnography (PSG) for 4-stage sleep classification (wake, light, deep, and rapid eye movement (REM) sleep).

What this means is that the Oura Ring Gen 3 recognises different sleep cycles with high accuracy. And it doesn’t just recognise your slumber but also rates it! You’re given a Sleep Score each morning and a short summary of the night before. Sleep Score has seven components: latency (how long it takes to fall asleep), timing, restfulness and more.

The Oura algorithm also assesses your blood oxygen levels during the night, as well as respiration rate, resting heart rate and heart rate fluctuations. Plus, it measures heart rate variability, one of the key factors determining your Readiness Score.

Readiness Score takes even more metrics into account and is another way to gamify health. A number of other wearables provide a similar score, including Whoop and Fitbits – it’s a good way to know and understand how prepared your body is for exercise or just in general.

I found sleep tracking on the Oura Ring Gen 3 very accurate. I tested it against the Ultrahuman Ring Air, the Garmin Forerunner 965 and the Apple Watch Series 9, and the numbers looked consistent. Most importantly, of all the wearables, the Oura Ring provided the most data and the most comprehensible suggestions to improve my sleep.

Thanks to the layout of the Oura app, it’s also easier to see trends in your sleep. The scrollable graph at the top of the Sleep page allows you to check sleep scores for each day quickly and efficiently. It’s a simple thing that enhances user experience significantly.

The only thing I missed was something like a smart alarm. Wearables such as Whoop use a vibration motor to gently nudge you awake, something I’d love to see in the next iteration of the Oura Ring.

Illness detection

I ended up getting ill during the testing period due to the combination of overtraining for an upcoming marathon, work stress and international travel. I must have picked up a bug at the Paris Charles de Gaulle Airport, and since my body was slightly run down, it knocked me off my feet completely.

The Oura Ring recognised my illness automatically – I had a fever, which was picked up by the temperature sensor – and suggested I turn on Rest Mode. In Rest Mode, the app doesn’t give you an Activity goal and the stress tracking is also turned off because your body is under stress to get rid of the illness.

I found this immensely helpful. Most wearables, including Garmin watches, almost disregard certain symptoms and tell you to keep exercising. Usually, they recommend you take it easy, but in a sense that you should still exercise, but less.

During my 48-hour rapid illness, I had no appetite and could hardly make myself crawl out of bed. I definitely couldn’t exercise, even if I wanted to, so the Oura Ring acknowledging this was a relief.

Better still, once I started to recover from the illness and the app suggested I disable Rest Mode, it didn’t just throw me back into the deep end. Instead, there was a transition period when the app gradually increased activity suggestions to help me ease back into exercise.

I was thoroughly impressed with this feature!

Activity tracking

Over the years, Oura expanded its features portfolio, and as a result, the Oura Gen 3 can track exercise almost as well as sleep. You are given a daily calorie goal, and the app also provides an Activity Score.

My favourite part of exercise tracking was Automatic Activity Detection (AAD). Similar to the Apple Watch (although not the same), the Outa Ring Gen 3 can recognise and record over 30 activities, including running, cycling, gardening and more.

Best of all, you don’t have to initiate the workout in the app or do anything with the ring–the system automatically does it. Once the activity is done, you’ll see a box at the top of the home page in the app asking you to confirm the activity.

AAD doesn’t always know exactly what exercise you did. When it can’t decide, the aforementioned box will say ‘Maybe: Running’. When you tap on it, you’ll be given a list of potential workout types, letting you adjust the suggestion. Again, a simple interaction that enhances user experience a lot.

Of course, you can also start a workout in the app, and this is recommended if you want to collect GPS data on your runs. The ring hasn’t got built-in GPS, but it can piggyback on the back of your smartphone’s GPS and record your movements into the Oura app.

Even if you don’t record any workouts, the Oura Ring Gen 3 will monitor your calorie expenditure, which is nice. Not all activities that elevate heart rate are workouts, and by logging active calories, the Oura app helps people hit their goals easier.

Resilience score

One of the newest features, your Resilience Score, tells you how well you can withstand and recover from physiological stress over time. This feature was rolled out halfway through the testing period, and it showcased well why you need to wear smart rings and smartwatches for at least a few weeks for them to get the hang of, well, you.

My score went from ‘Solid’ to ‘Exceptional’ in two weeks without changing my sleep or exercise habits. Again, it takes a while for algorithms to get used to you, which is why it might take weeks for features like the Resilience Score to display the ‘correct’ numbers.

Once it does, though, it will stay relatively flat unless you lead a hectic life. I’m lucky enough to have a steady sleep and exercise routine, so I don’t expect my Resilience Score to change drastically over time.

It does provide an extra layer of understanding of your overall health, though, and the Resilience Score is included in the Oura Ring Membership, so I’m not complaining.

Is the Oura Ring Membership worth it?

Oura’s offering is unique, as it charges you to access almost all but the basic health data in its app. The company didn’t always charge users for features but rolled out this model when the Oura Ring Gen 3 was introduced.

Whoop has a similar model, but they don’t charge for the hardware, unlike Oura. One might argue that paying top dollar for the smart ring and then paying a monthly fee to access your data is a bit much.

However, everyone should get used to membership fees, as this is the future of all services. Look everywhere, and companies who can use subscription fees do to provide a better user experience over the long run.

Continuous updates and bug fixes require a lot of resources, not to mention R&D. If the company only makes money when it sells hardware, it’s forced to sell more hardware to keep the business afloat. That’s not good for the environment or the existing customer base.

Subscription fees enable companies to provide a better customer experience. Simple as that. And Oura’s app and features really are best in class, so I’d say the Membership is worth it. Or, more like, I wouldn’t recommend the Oura Ring without the subscription.

Verdict

The Oura Ring Gen 3 boasts one of the most comprehensive feature sets I’ve seen in wearables in recent years. Not just that, but the features on offer, including Sleep, Activity, and Resilience Scores, all work together, enabling you to better understand your health. Highly recommended for those who need a reliable health companion and can’t wear a smartwatch all day.

Three things to consider before buying the Oura Ring Gen 3 are the imminent release of the next generation ring, the membership fee, and the size of the wearable.

The third-generation ring came out three years ago, and Oura is likely working on its successor. The new ring will probably feature updated sensors and maybe even a sleeker look – not to mention, a new Oura Ring would help push the price of the Oura Ring Gen 3 down in the transition period.

Membership cost is also something to keep in mind. It’s not a lot of money, and I firmly believe there is no point in having an Oura Ring without a membership, but it’s certainly an ongoing cost.

Finally, although the ring isn’t massive, most of my female friends said it looked pretty big. It looks fine on my huge hands, but someone with smaller fingers might find the ring too thick. This is true for every smart ring, though, and not an Oura-exclusive issue.

Otherwise, you should go and buy your Oura Ring right now.

Despite making a huge amount of sense, there are only a handful of brands out there that make a video doorbell with two lenses. Not only do they allow you to see much more of your doorstep, but they also instantly boost your home's security, which is never a bad thing.

That's why I couldn't wait to try EZVIZ's new EP8 Ultra. As well as featuring a built-in interactive AI screen that greets your guests with smart animal characters, it also comes with an impressive dual-lens design.

You'll find my full thoughts below, including whether it deserves a place among the best video doorbells on the market today.

Price and availability

The EZVIZ EP8 Ultra is priced at £139.99 (around $175), but at the time of writing it's currently discounted to £109.99 on Amazon.

That's around average for one of EZVIZ's premium video doorbells, and pretty much what you'd expect to pay for a high-performing model.

Unboxing and set up

The EP8 Ultra offers two installation options. It can either be hardwired into an existing doorbell system for continuous power or run on a large 9,600mAh rechargeable battery. Interestingly, EZVIZ includes two batteries in the box, meaning you can always keep one charged while using the other. It also comes with the indoor chime included, which, if you've read some of my previous reviews, you'll know isn't always the case.

The package includes all of the mounting hardware needed for installation, and setup is completed through the EZVIZ app by scanning a QR code and connecting the doorbell to your Wi-Fi network. The QR code actually took a few attempts to work during my setup, so if you experience the same thing, don't panic – just keep trying and it should eventually connect.

The doorbell took around five to six hours to fully charge using the supplied USB-C cable. That's on the longer side, but as mentioned, having two batteries makes this much less of an issue, as you can charge one whilst using the other.

Design and features

The EZVIZ EP8 Ultra offers more comprehensive coverage than a traditional video doorbell thanks to its dual-camera setup. The main forward-facing 6MP camera monitors visitors approaching your front door, whilst the second downward-facing 2MP camera keeps an eye on parcels left directly below the doorbell. Powered by advanced WDR and LDC technology, the EP8 Ultra captures crisp images without dark shadows or distorted edges.

To make those cameras even more useful, the EP8 Ultra uses AI-assisted detection. Rather than simply reacting to every bit of movement, it can distinguish between people, vehicles and package activity, helping to reduce unnecessary notifications. It can also recognise when a parcel has been delivered or removed, sending alerts directly to your smartphone through the EZVIZ app.

Two-way audio is built in, allowing you to speak to visitors from wherever you are, whilst colour night vision keeps footage clear after dark without relying solely on infrared imaging.

Despite housing two cameras, the EP8 Ultra also has a clean, modern design with a slim rectangular body finished in matte black.

Like many of EZVIZ's latest products, the EP8 Ultra supports local storage via a compatible microSD card, giving users the option to avoid ongoing subscription costs. It also works with the brand's cloud storage service if you'd rather keep recordings backed up online.

The EZVIZ app acts as the main control hub, allowing you to view live footage, review recordings, adjust motion detection zones, customise notification settings and integrate the doorbell with other EZVIZ smart home devices. The EP8 Ultra also supports Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant, allowing you to display the live feed on compatible smart displays using simple voice commands.

Another fun feature is its built-in LED light, which automatically illuminates your entryway so you can clearly see who's at your door. It also helps the cameras capture brighter footage, making it easier to recognise faces and spot packages.

At this point, I also have to mention the doorbell's built-in AI screen, which greets your guests with animated animal characters. Depending on who arrives at your door, visitors are welcomed by one of three characters – Pandie Panda, Ray Raccoon or Harry Husky. Similar to a pre-recorded greeting, the characters pop up on the screen and speak to your guests, adding a bit of personality to your front door.

I'll admit this isn't a feature I've really used, and it certainly wasn't what drew me to the doorbell in the first place. However, it's a fun addition, especially if you have children or simply like the idea of making your smart home feel a little more playful.

Performance

In day-to-day use, the EZVIZ EP8 Ultra proved to be a really reliable video doorbell. The app is clean and easy to navigate, making it simple to view live footage, review recordings and tweak settings whenever I needed to. The live feed loaded quickly with no noticeable delay, and the two-way audio was clear enough to have natural conversations with delivery drivers and visitors.

The dual-camera setup is undoubtedly the standout feature, and after spending so much time testing standard single-lens video doorbells, I really appreciated the extra coverage it provides. I also really liked the built-in LED light, which does a great job of illuminating the entrance after dark and noticeably improves the quality of the colour night vision.

Battery life was impressive too, lasting around a month during testing. I did have to spend a little time adjusting the motion detection zones to reduce unnecessary notifications, but once I'd selected the right coverage areas, alerts became much more accurate and battery life benefited as a result.

Verdict

The EZVIZ EP8 Ultra is one of the most complete battery-powered video doorbells I've tested. Its dual-camera setup makes a strong difference, offering far better coverage than a standard single-lens model, whilst the intuitive app, reliable performance and subscription-free local storage make it an easy recommendation. If you want a high-performing video doorbell that keeps an eye on both your visitors and your parcels, the EP8 Ultra is an excellent choice.

Alternatives to consider

The most similar video doorbell to the EZVIZ EP8 Ultra has to be the Eufy E340. It also features a dual-lens design, offers subscription-free local storage and sits at a very similar price point. It also earned an impressive five-star rating in our full review when it first launched.

If you're after something a little more affordable, you can't really go wrong with one of the Ring Video Doorbells. They offer plenty of features, reliable performance and excellent video quality for the money, and because they're part of the Amazon ecosystem, they integrate brilliantly with pretty much anything with Alexa built in.

I don’t think I’ve ever come across a Peak Design bag I didn’t like. From the brand’s backpacks to its camera slings, I often end up using Peak Design products well after the testing period has concluded.

I recently tested the latest slate of bags from the company, including the Peak Design Travel Weekender 25L and the Travel Crossbody 3L. Among the bags sent to me for testing was the small Travel Backpack 20L, with a convenient strap on its back panel that makes it easy to carry on the handle of a rolling suitcase.

My first thought was that it’s a bit strange that Peak Design puts out a travel backpack with this feature without an accompanying carry-on suitcase. Two seconds later, I remembered reading about the Roller Pro, and all of a sudden, it all made perfect sense. Needless to say, I requested the rolling case immediately after.

This was a couple of months ago, and since then, I’ve been using the Peak Design Roller Pro on all my trips by plane. It’s an awesome suitcase that really lives up to its name by rolling incredibly smoothly and exuding an aura of premium quality that not many other bags can match.

It’s probably a bit too expensive for most people who just need a roller for their annual holiday in Benidorm, but if you have expensive (camera) gear to haul around (and maybe some Peak Design cubes/accessories) and appreciate craftsmanship and premium bags, the Roller Pro is one of my top recommendations for you.

Peak Design Roller Pro review

Price and availability

The Roller Pro launched in March 2025 and is available to buy now at Peak Design UK, Peak Design US, Peak Design EU and Peak Design AU for £500 / $600 / €600 / AU$1,150. It comes in three colours: Black, Eclipse and Sage. There are sometimes deals available. At the time of writing, the bag was on offer for £400 / €480 / AU$920 (no current offers in the US).

The brand sells the Roller Pro on its own and in bundles (Creator and Travel), the latter of which saves you 15% compared to buying the bundle’s parts separately. The Creator Bundle adds the XL camera cube, while the Traveler bundle adds two small and two medium packing cubes.

The carry-on closest to the Roller Pro in both price and functionality is another one of my all-time favourites, Db's Ramverk Pro Carry On. It retails for around £550 and weighs a little more than the Peak Design model. I'd say both occupy the premium end of the mainstream luggage market, stopping short of true luxury brands such as Rimowa and Tumi.

Design and build quality

Peak Design said the Roller Pro had been in development for four years, with the biggest engineering challenge being its carbon-fibre "SlimDrive" handle system, which frees up significantly more packing space than traditional telescopic handles.

The handle might have been the biggest challenge for the design team, but the bespoke wheels are the Roller Pro's standout feature. They're exceptionally smooth and quiet, making the case feel almost weightless on airport floors.

They also move well on the streets and cobblestone, but understandably, it’ll be a bit trickier to navigate the case on rough surfaces with the fully extended handle, purely because of the weight distribution.

The four-wheel setup not only allows you to push the suitcase rather than drag it behind you, but it is also incredibly smooth to move. So much so that the bag sometimes rolls away on its own adventures unless you keep an eye on it.

Weighing 3.9kg (8.6 lb), the Roller Pro has a maximum volume of 39 litres when expanded (34 litres otherwise). The extender zipper goes all the way around to keep the case well-balanced, even when you add more stuff to it. It’s not the lightest case, and the Roller Pro is certainly heftier than your average IT carry-on, but it also feels a lot more premium and sturdy.

As you’d expect, Peak Design didn’t skimp on materials when designing the Roller Pro. The bag has a 70% recycled polycarbonate shell and a 100% recycled weather-resistant Versa Shell 500D nylon exterior, the latter of which is also Bluesign-approved. It has a PFAS-free coating that offers water repellency and a chemical-free alternative to DWR.

The #8 UltraZips use abrasion-resistant UHMWPE threads, and so do the cords that are made from ultra-high-strength UHMWPE for extended durability.

I appreciate the small design choices, such as the rubber/plastic bars on the back of the case that prevent it from sitting on dirt when you tip the case over in a public space and the four pull handles located around the edge of the Roller Pro that make it easier to place the case into the overhead locker regardless of its orientation.

Internal organisation and ergonomics

The Roller Pro has a large clamshell opening and offers a decent amount of space inside, thanks to the special handle design. Better still, the lid is designed to stay upright when the Roller Pro is laid on its back, giving you easier access to the mesh organisation pockets on the divider.

The bottom of the bag is by no means flat, but there aren’t massive grooves that take up unnecessary space. The elastic cords that help keep your stuff in place are located around the halfway point, just below the extension. These can be loosened, should your packed items reach the lip of the case.

In addition to using the extender, you can peel back the mesh dividers to create even more space inside the Roller Pro. I find this approach a bit clunky, as it doesn’t necessarily create much extra space, especially if you have smaller gadgets/passports/tissues/etc. in the pocket accessible from the top of the bag.

Speaking of which, this is where you’ll find the dedicated laptop sleeve with a magnetic flap to help keep your large electronic device in place. The small pocket in the same compartment can store essential items you need to access quickly, such as passports. I also tend to shove my paperback in this pocket.

One thing I miss from the Roller Pro – and it’s a strange omission – is the lockable zips. Well, the pull tabs have holes in them, which means you can tie the zips together using a small lock or wire, but on the aforementioned Travel Backpack 20L, the pull tab on one of the zips can be undone and hooked around the other, an approach that would make the Roller Pro safe from accidental (or not so accidental) openings.

It’s true that the exterior fabric can scuff more easily than an all-polycarbonate shell, but I found marks easy to clean with just a cloth. The shell is also somewhat water-resistant, although I haven’t used it in pouring rain.

Verdict

The Peak Design Roller Pro is one of the most thoughtfully engineered carry-ons I've ever tested. Every element, from the ingenious SlimDrive handle that frees up valuable packing space to the exceptionally smooth wheels and premium recycled materials, feels purpose-built rather than added for the sake of marketing.

It's the sort of suitcase that makes travelling feel just a little easier, whether you're lifting it into an overhead locker, navigating a busy airport or living out of it for a few days.

It's not without flaws. At 3.9kg, the Roller Pro is heavier than many soft-sided carry-ons, and the lack of an integrated locking mechanism is a surprising omission at this price. While you can attach a small padlock through the zip pulls, I'd have preferred a cleaner, built-in solution.

Those shortcomings aren't enough to overshadow what Peak Design has achieved here. If you only travel once or twice a year, the Roller Pro will probably feel like an unnecessary indulgence.

However, frequent flyers, photographers and anyone who appreciates beautifully made travel gear will find plenty to justify the asking price. It's an expensive carry-on, but one that genuinely earns its premium positioning through clever design, exceptional build quality and a level of refinement that few rivals can match.

If you're looking to zhuzh up your decor with one of the best smart lights, stick around – I think you may find what you're looking for in this Govee Lantern Floor Lamp review.

While it's far from the first smart RGB lamp I've tested, I was eagerly awaiting its arrival for quite a while – and it's all thanks to its rather unusual, squishy silicone shade.

After spending the last few weeks with it at home, I'm happy to report that it not only nails the essentials, but also makes everything simply more... fun... in the process. I can't speak for everyone, of course, but I'm pretty sure most of us could do with a little more of that in our lives. If only to pause from the scrolling for a while.

Having said that, there's certainly no shortage of competition, and they're not shy about battling it our in the price wars either. So, with all that said, is a fun, squishy lampshade enough to warrant the cost?

Spoiler alert: it is.

Price and availability

The Govee Lantern Floor Lamp is available now for £139.99, although discounts are sometimes available through selected retailers.

For the money, you're getting far more than a traditional floor lamp. In addition to adjustable white lighting, the Lantern Floor Lamp supports RGBICWW lighting effects, voice control, Matter compatibility, music synchronisation, and more than 100 preset scenes through the Govee app. Phew.

Unboxing and set up

Inside the box you'll find a reassuringly weighty circular base, four metal poles that form the stem of the lamp, and the light itself. Assembly couldn't be much simpler – the poles screw together, one end attaches to the base, the other connects to the lamp head, and you're done.

In fact, from opening the box to having the lamp standing in my lounge, the whole process took less than five minutes. Thanks to that sturdy base, there's never any sense that it might wobble or tip over, either.

Getting everything connected through the Govee app proved equally straightforward. From there I added it to my existing Alexa setup, and assigned it to my lounge lighting group. Once configured, I could control brightness, colours, and power using voice commands along with the rest of my downstairs lighting.

Design and features

This is where Govee’s offering really stands out. Most smart floor lamps prioritise tech over aesthetics (you know the type – slim light bars designed to disappear into a corner and bathe the wall behind them in coloured light). They do the job well enough, but many look more at home in a gaming den than a living room.

The Lantern Floor Lamp takes a different approach, and it’s mostly thanks to that wonderful silicone lamp head – resembling a gargantuan marshmallow, it's soft, delightfully squishy, and wonderfully tactile, bringing a smile to anyone’s face when they squish it.

In fact, even when switched off, the lamp strikes a balance that's surprisingly difficult to achieve. It feels playful and modern, and would slot in perfectly in a child's bedroom. At the same time, though, it feels just as at home in a grown-up living room. Many RGB lamps lean too heavily towards novelty, while this one feels like a proper piece of furniture.

As for the controls, they’re located on the top of the lamp, but most owners will likely spend their time in the Govee app. Here you'll find access to far more colour controls, scheduling, automation features, music sync modes, scene presets, brightness adjustments, and smart-home integrations. It’s quick to set up, easy to use, and is crammed with features.

Support for the Matter smart home standard also means that it can slot into a wider smart-home setup without too much hassle, while compatibility with Alexa, Google Home, and other major ecosystems makes integration relatively painless.

One thing worth noting is that the silicone diffuser's soft-touch finish does attract dust fairly easily. It's not a major issue, but you'll occasionally find yourself giving it a quick wipe to keep it looking its best.

Performance

While the design initially grabs attention, the performance is what ultimately justifies the Lantern Floor Lamp's place in your home – the transformation when the lamp switches on is remarkable.

When off, soft-touch silicone material looks sleek, clean, and modern. Turn it on, and the transformation is striking. The entire shade suddenly takes on an almost glass-like appearance, and once lit up, it looks far more premium than its materials would suggest.

Some of my favourite results come from simple colour combinations rather than the more distracting extravagant effects. Soft pinks blending into oranges create a warm glow that looks superb in the evenings, while cooler shades give the room a completely different character. The excellent diffusion also helps colours blend together beautifully, avoiding the harsh hotspots that can sometimes affect lesser RGB lighting products.

White-light performance is equally impressive. With adjustable colour temperatures ranging from warm, cosy evening lighting through to cooler settings better suited for reading, the Lantern Floor Lamp proved far more versatile than many decorative smart lights.

Brightness is strong enough to make an impact on a room as well, but the diffused output ensures it never feels too aggressive. It also produces up to 1400 lumens of brightness and offers an adjustable colour temperature range spanning 1000K through to 10,000K.

The Govee app also offers a huge amount of customisation, from scene presets and schedules through to music-reactive modes and colour creation tools. If you enjoy tweaking and experimenting with lighting, there's enough here to keep you busy for quite some time. Throughout testing, Alexa integration also worked reliably, letting me control the lamp along with the rest of my smart lighting setup using simple voice commands.

Verdict

Most smart floor lamps I've tested are functional enough, but they always feel like tech products first, and decorative pieces second. The Govee Lantern Floor Lamp, however, is one of the first ones that I'd happily keep out on full display in my lounge, rather than banished to the corner of my PC office setup.

The smart features are excellent, too. Alexa integration works flawlessly, Matter support helps future-proof things, and the huge range of colours and scenes makes it easy to tailor the atmosphere to suit any taste.

In short, if you've been put off by the gamer aesthetic of many RGB floor lamps, the Govee Lantern Floor Lamp offers something different – a smart lamp that feels properly at home in a grown-up living space.

Alternative to consider

If you prefer a more traditional minimalist and modern aesthetic, the Philips Hue Signe Floor Lamp remains one of the strongest premium alternatives. It offers excellent smart home integration and impressive lighting effects, although its upright light-bar design lacks the decorative charm and furniture-like presence of the Lantern Floor Lamp.

The Govee Floor Lamp Pro is a close competitor to the Hue Signe, offering similar smart lighting features alongside a built-in Bluetooth speaker. However, it also doesn't feel quite as warm or visually distinctive as the Lantern Floor Lamp.

Ninja is no stranger to the world of coffee machines, having launched several models over the past few years. However, what's been particularly interesting is how the brand has approached coffee from multiple angles. We've seen traditional coffee makers, bean-to-cup machines and hybrid systems that attempt to do a bit of everything. Now, Ninja is taking another step forward with the new AutoBarista Pro, a machine that puts a much bigger emphasis on automation than ever before.

Like some of its predecessors, the Ninja AutoBarista Pro combines multiple brewing methods into a single appliance. This time, however, it's bringing together bean-to-cup espresso, filter coffee and rapid cold brew functionality, creating what is arguably Ninja's most ambitious coffee machine to date.

I'm a big fan of both Ninja as a brand and the coffee machines it's released so far, so I couldn't wait to put the AutoBarista Pro to the test.

Price and availability

The Ninja AutoBarista Pro is priced at £899.99 in the UK, making it the brand's most premium coffee machine yet. It's available directly from SharkNinja, as well as retailers including Currys, John Lewis and Argos. In the US, it retails for $949.99.

At launch, the machine is available in a stainless steel finish, although Ninja's website also lists several alternative colours currently marked as sold out, including Midnight Blue, Oat Milk, Mocha and Vista Green. That suggests a wider range of finishes could become available in the near future.

Unboxing and set up

As with most Ninja machines, but somewhat surprisingly compared to other bean-to-cup coffee machines, the AutoBarista Pro is incredibly easy to set up. The whole process mainly involves removing the seemingly endless amount of packaging stickers (something Ninja is very thorough with), attaching the cup rack, and filling both the bean hopper and water tank.

You're also prompted to install the included water filter, which I'd highly recommend if you live in a hard water area like I do. The process is straightforward, and requires soaking the filter for a few minutes, inserting it into the holder, and setting the reminder dial to the month you installed it. Once that's done, it clips into the bottom of the water tank and stays securely in place. After everything is filled and ready to go, you can switch the machine on and start getting familiar with the controls.

At this stage, I did find it slightly disappointing that the water tank isn't accessible from the front, requiring you to pull the machine forward to remove and refill it. Plenty of manufacturers have started addressing this issue on newer models, so it feels like a missed opportunity here.

GrindIQ

Now, the main step to focus on between physically setting the machine up and pouring your first shot is the GrindIQ process. You'll want to run this before you start brewing and again whenever you switch to a different bag of beans. During the sequence, the machine pulls 2-3 shots whilst automatically calibrating the grinder.

GrindIQ works by pulling a shot and monitoring the flow rate and pressure. If either is off, it'll tweak the grind for the next shot, repeating the process until it's happy. That said, if you prefer your espresso a little finer (or coarser), you can still manually offset the grinder by up to two steps either way.

When I ran the calibration, it used around 200g of beans, which felt like quite a lot for the process. It's definitely worth doing to get the best results, but it's something to bear in mind. Personally, it'd make me think twice about using an expensive specialty coffee for calibration, and I'd probably reach for a more affordable bean that I still enjoy instead.

Design and features

Despite featuring 3-in-1 functionality, the AutoBarista Pro is an incredible looking machine. The integrated grinder, central control panel and automatic milk frothing system are all neatly incorporated into the unit, and it all feels very premium indeed. However, there's no getting around the fact that it's a fairly substantial appliance that will demand a decent amount of countertop space.

At the front, you'll find an intuitive control interface that provides access to 13 one-touch drinks, including Espresso, Americano, Cappuccino, Latte, Flat White, Cold Brew and filter coffee. The machine features the brand's new AutoBarista Technology, which removes much of the trial and error traditionally associated with home espresso machines.

It automatically adjusts key brewing variables depending on the drink selected, including Grind iQ Technology, which calibrates the grind size to suit the beans being used, helping to maximise flavour extraction without requiring manual adjustment. Alongside this sits Calibrated Brewing Technology, which optimises water temperature and pressure to ensure each drink is brewed consistently.

The AutoBarista Pro also allows users to create and save up to two custom profiles, storing preferences such as drink strength, size, temperature and froth style. For households with multiple coffee drinkers, this means favourite drinks can be recreated with a single tap rather than having to manually adjust settings each time.

Milk-based drinks are handled by Ninja's FrothPerfect Technology, and it's a significant step up from the simpler frothing system found on the Ninja Prestige DualBrew System. The automatic wand works with both dairy and plant-based milk and offers five froth settings – steamed milk, thin froth, thick froth, extra-thick froth and cold foam.

Ninja has also included two interchangeable 340g bean hoppers, making it easy to switch between different coffee beans without emptying the grinder. This is particularly useful if you like to alternate between regular and decaf coffee or experiment with different roasts.

A dual-shot brewing function is also included, allowing two espresso shots to be prepared simultaneously for faster drink preparation.

Performance

Once I'd finished admiring the AutoBarista Pro, it was time to see how it actually performed. If you've read my reviews before, you'll know that a cappuccino is always my starting point, so that's exactly where I began.

The first thing that caught me off guard was that this isn't the quickest automatic bean-to-cup machine I've tested. After selecting my drink, there was around two to three minutes of grinding, whirring and preparation before anything actually started pouring. That's not necessarily a problem if you're not in a rush, but compared to many rivals, it does feel a little slow.

You're also prompted to pour milk into the jug before the drink starts. Like the Ninja Luxe Café, the jug features clear measuring markers so you know exactly how much milk to add. I particularly liked its larger size, which seemed to help heat the milk more evenly during the frothing process.

Once the brewing process began, the milk was frothed first. Initially, I was concerned that it might cool down before the espresso was ready, but that wasn't an issue and the temperature remained excellent throughout.

I also loved the small lights positioned above both the milk and coffee dispensing areas. It's such a minor detail, but it's something I haven't seen on many machines before. When the milk starts frothing, one light illuminates, and when the espresso begins pouring, another switches on above the coffee outlet. It makes the machine feel more premium and I can imagine it being particularly useful on dark winter mornings.

That said, my first cappuccino was a little disappointing. Despite running the GrindIQ sequence in advance, the espresso shot felt quite watery and lacked the rich crema I'd been expecting. Given it was the machine's first brew, I was willing to give it the benefit of the doubt. On the plus side, the milk texture was excellent and produced a silky finish.

The next day, I decided to try some different beans to see if the results changed. I therefore ran the GrindIQ sequence and brewed a straight espresso, which definitely helped. There was more crema this time and the shot seemed thicker, so I'd strongly recommend changing coffee beans and running the sequence again if your experience is similar to mine.

Performance then seemed to improve slightly after several drinks, and the machine became quicker once it had settled in. That said, it's still not the fastest bean-to-cup machine I've tested. I'll pop a TikTok below, but please be aware I've cut it down for timing purposes and it features the first cappuccino I made before switching beans.

Where the AutoBarista Pro really shines is customisation. The large display is excellent, making it easy to adjust drink strength, add an extra shot, alter milk texture and tweak brewing temperatures. Everything is clearly laid out and straightforward to navigate.

One feature I particularly appreciated was the dual bean hopper system, which is something you typically see more often on manual bean-to-cup machines than fully automatic models. Whilst I probably won't switch between hoppers every day, I love the fact that they're removable for cleaning.

I've lost count of the number of times I've had to tip a machine upside down to remove leftover coffee beans before returning it to a brand, so being able to lift the hopper off entirely will make maintenance far easier.

Verdict

The Ninja AutoBarista Pro is an incredibly user-friendly automatic bean-to-cup coffee machine. Setup is simple, the interface is intuitive, and the sheer amount of drink customisation on offer makes it easy to tailor drinks to your exact preferences. Features such as the dual bean hoppers, automatic milk frothing system and user profiles also help justify its premium positioning.

That said, it isn't perfect. Brewing can feel slower than some rivals, and a high espresso quality can involve multiple GrindIQ sequences, which uses up a lot of beans. However, if convenience, versatility and ease of use are your priorities, the AutoBarista Pro is a highly capable all-in-one coffee machine that you will immensely enjoy.

Alternatives to consider

If you'd prefer to stay with Ninja but don't necessarily need the AutoBarista Pro's fully automatic approach, the Ninja Luxe Café remains an excellent alternative. It's a little more hands-on and requires more user input, but it rewards that effort with fantastic coffee and remains one of the brand's strongest machines.

Another impressive alternative is the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra. It's one of the newest premium bean-to-cup machines on the market and offers an enormous drinks menu alongside excellent personalisation features. It is more expensive than the AutoBarista Pro, however, so you'll need to decide whether those extra features justify the additional outlay.

Not sure how I ended up reviewing fans for T3, but I’m not complaining, especially in this weather.

After my AirCraft Lume review, which helped me survive the last heatwave in the UK, Meaco got in touch asking if I were up to review one of the brand’s new models, the WiFi-enabled MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10” Air Circulator.

At the time, the temperature wasn’t nearly as high as it is now, so I agreed to the review but told the brand I won’t be able to test the fan until the weather gets hotter. Fast forward two weeks, and I’m writing these words with the Sefte Pro facing me on almost full blast – otherwise, the heat is pretty unbearable.

I’ve been using the MeacoFan Sefte Pro all week during the 30+ heatwave, and I’m pretty impressed with its build quality and performance. It’s quiet, robust, and thanks to its WiFi capability, it can also be integrated into your smart home setup (Alexa and Google Assistant).

It’s an air circulator, so don’t expect it to be cooling your home (unless you place a bowl of icy water in front of the fan), and the WiFi connectivity doesn’t make a lot of sense if you don’t have smart ambitions, as you can just use the controller to operate the Sefte Pro from afar.

However, if you’re looking for a sturdy fan with strong air-circulation performance, the Sefte Pro is an excellent option. Plus, thanks to its battery, it’s truly portable and can be moved around the house without having to hunt for sockets everywhere. Just wish I could adjust its height gradually, like my trusty MeacoFan 1056.

MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10” Pedestal Air Circulator review

Price and availability

The Sefte Pro 10” Pedestal Air Circulator retails for £200 (~$264 / €232 / AU$382) at Meaco and third-party retailers such as John Lewis, Amazon and B&Q in the UK. Needless to say, the fan is out of stock or on backorder at the moment, but most retailers will ship units by the end of the week.

Meaco doesn’t seem to sell its fans in the US or Australia, and availability in the European market varies by country, so I can’t tell how much they cost there. If you need more of a tabletop fan, MeacoFan also sells the Sefte Pro 10” Table Air Circulator for £120 (~$158 / €139 / AU$229).

Specifications

• Fan type: Air circulator
• Format: Pedestal
• Number of speeds: 12
• Oscillation: Yes
• Timer: Yes
• Maximum fan flow: 19.18 m³/min
• Standby power consumption: 0.5 W
• Weight: 5.8 kg (~12.78 lbs)

Design and build quality

The Sefte Pro comes in four parts, and it’s easy to assemble. Just screw the two pedestal columns together wth the fan and base units using the collars, and voila! The Sefte Pro is ready to go. You can also attach the fan unit directly to the base unit, forming a sort of tabletop fan (albeit quite oversized), or use just the one column for a slightly shorter setup.

The 9,200 mAh battery that enables the Sefte Pro to operate without a cord is located at the bottom of the base unit. To me, this is the most appealing feature of the fan – I can just lift it up and take it to a different room without hunting for sockets. Better still, the battery is powerful enough to power the Sefte Pro for 5.5 hours at full blast (and 11 hours on the lowest setting).

The circular remote is reminiscent of the MeacoFan 1056 and lets you control all aspects of the fan, including vertical and horizontal oscillation, fan speed, and more. You can also use the buttons on the fan to turn it on and off and cycle through speed settings, but nothing else. Weirdly, Meaco didn’t think about adding a carry handle to the Sefte Pro.

The unit weighs 5.8 kg (~12.78 lbs), light enough to be carried in one hand. The connecting poles are thick-ish, lending the Sefte Pro a sturdy feel without making it look or feel bulky. The cable attaches to the base unit, which is a lot tidier than the AirCraft Lume’s mid-stem approach.

Performance and features

The Sefte Pro can move quite a lot of air, thanks to its large blades and robust fan unit. It has 12 speed settings, with the lower settings producing almost no audible noise. You will start hearing the fan when you reach level 7, but even on the maximum setting, you will be able to converse with people near the Sefte Pro without having to shout.

Power consumption on the second speed setting (with no oscillation) is around 5W, which is low enough not to rack up a huge electricity bill. Crank up the intensity to 11 and turn on the spin, and the needle goes up to 22-23W, which still isn’t huge. Meaco claims standby power consumption is around 0.5W.

As mentioned above, the Sefte Pro can connect to your smartphone via WiFi. This allows the fan to be controlled via the app, which is somewhat redundant given that a remote is included in the box.

However, things get more interesting when you connect the app to third-party smart assistants, such as Alexa or Google Assistant. Meaco says you can control power, fan speed, modes and timers via both the app and voice assistants (and a smart speaker). Not just that, but you can also weave together all your Meaco products around the house and instruct the smart assistant accordingly (e.g. turn on the bedroom fan on speed 4).

Back to the fan operation, you can adjust both vertical and horizontal oscillation angles to narrow, medium, or wide. The Sefte Pro offers limited downward tilt, meaning its maximum 65º tilt is primarily useful for directing airflow towards the ceiling. It will go up to 120º horizontally, though.

It has three modes: Normal, Night and ECO. Normal is, well, Normal, while Night mode will gradually reduce speed to 1 and turn off the display. In ECO mode, the Sefte Pro will automatically adjust fan speed based on the room temperature, which is displayed in the middle of the screen at all times (unless you turn off the display).

Verdict

The MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" is an excellent air circulator that combines strong airflow, whisper-quiet operation and genuinely useful portability thanks to its built-in battery. The sturdy build, flexible oscillation, multiple height options and excellent remote make it a pleasure to use, while ECO mode helps keep running costs low.

The Wi-Fi connectivity is the one feature that feels harder to justify. Unless you already have a smart home setup with Alexa or Google Assistant, the app doesn't add much over the included remote control, making the Sefte Pro pricier than it arguably needs to be. If voice control and automation aren't priorities, you'll likely get better value from one of Meaco's non-Wi-Fi models.

That said, if you want a premium fan that's quiet, efficient, genuinely portable and ready to slot into a connected home, the Sefte Pro is one of the best pedestal air circulators I've tested.

Also consider

If you don't need Wi-Fi or voice control, the MeacoFan 1056 remains the sweet spot in the brand’s range. It offers similarly excellent airflow, whisper-quiet operation, ECO mode and the superb magnetic remote, while its sliding height adjustment is actually more convenient than the Sefte Pro's fixed positions. You lose the built-in battery and smart features, but save around £40-£60 depending on current prices.

If you're spending premium-fan money anyway, the Dyson Pure Cool TP04 is worth considering. It combines powerful air circulation with HEPA air purification, smart home integration, and a companion app, making it a better fit for allergy sufferers or anyone who wants cleaner air and a cooling breeze. It isn't as portable as the Sefte Pro and lacks a built-in battery, but it offers a much broader feature set.

Pellet grills – or smokers as we sometimes call them – have been around since the 1980s but until relatively recently they occupied a niche corner of outdoor cooking – ie, too technical for casual grillers and viewed with suspicion by conventional barbecue purists who considered thermostats, sensors, computer processors and augers borderline cheating.

Fast forward to today and pellet cooking has exploded in popularity because it delivers something increasingly rare – consistently brilliant wood-fired food without requiring the user to spend hours hovering over a fire with a look of mild panic.

The appeal of pellet grilling is obvious. Simply fill the hopper with compressed hardwood pellets, set a temperature, press a button and let the grill’s electronic controller, auger and fan manage the rest, whether it’s cooking standard BBQ fare, a low-and-slow rack of ribs, baked salmon, a roast chicken or a seared steak. With this type of grill you get genuine wood-fired flavour and all the theatre of alfresco cooking, but with indoor oven-like temperature precision.

With this in mind, I recently took delivery of the Pit Boss Competition Titan, a pellet smoker so unapologetically huge and feature-packed that it feels less like a barbecue and more like a permanent outdoor cooking installation. The question is, does all this size and technology actually make for a better alfresco feast? Let’s fire it up and see.

Pit Boss Competition Titan review: price and availability

The Pit Boss Competition Titan occupies premium pellet-grill territory so, as you might reasonably expect, its pricing reflects both its sheer scale and impressive set of features.

In the UK, expect to pay around £1,999, although discounts are already appearing. At the time of writing, stock is available at my personal go-to store Pro Smoke BBQ plus BBQ Land and Appliances Direct, where it’s currently shifting for £1,799.

In the US, the Titan’s official retail price is a much cheaper $1,299, mostly because shipping is far less expensive. US buyers should check out Academy since it appears to be Pit Boss’s main US dealer, at least for this specific grill.

Pit Boss Competition Titan review: design and features

The Pit Boss Competition Titan is a pellet grill designed with the sort of visual presence normally reserved for American pit master competitions, pickup trucks and outdoor Texas kitchens. It looks enormous and imposing in any situation – let alone on a small UK patio – and once you take a peek inside and see its gigantic cooking area, the scale of this monster grill becomes properly apparent.

Like all pellet grills, the Titan thankfully arrived with the cooking section, lid and pellet hopper pre-assembled. However, since this beast is so big and heavy (about 120 kilos), it will require at least two people to haul its main carcass to where you want to assemble it. I’d say it took me a leisurely four hours to build with the odd break and most of the assembly went very smoothly with only one occasion where I had to force a panel into alignment.

The Titan’s construction is reassuringly over engineered with heavy-gauge steel, a substantial two-door cupboard finished with chunky steel handles, four lockable castor wheels and generous prep areas courtesy of fixed and folding side tables plus a sturdy collapsible front table.

The heavy-duty roll-top lid deserves special mention, too. It’s seriously heavy but thankfully it opens with surprisingly little effort, gliding backwards rather than lifting skyward. Its oven-style rope sealing, meanwhile, keeps heat in while providing a soft close.

The headline figure with this smoker is its vast cooking area – a humongous 10,474cm² (162in² in old money) – spread across three deep stainless-steel grill inserts. For the record, the two bottom grills measure 80cm x 42cm (31”x16.5”) and the shallower top one at 80cm x 32cm (31”x12.5”).

But get this, rather than having the grill trays fixed in position like almost all barbecues, Pit Boss has fitted removable sliding mechanisms to each grill shelf so each section can be pulled outward independently like an oven rack, which makes access dramatically easier when you’re juggling briskets, ribs, Moroccan lamb and enough burgers to feed half the street. Better still, unused inserts have dedicated storage at the rear of the grill.

The Titan’s fuel comes from an equally oversized 18kg (40lb) pellet hopper mounted to the left. It includes a transparent viewing window so you can check pellet levels at a glance and, unusually, an internal divider that allows different wood blends to be mixed or separated for customised smoke flavours.

Central to any pellet grill is the electronic control display that regulates the grill's temperature much like a kitchen oven. In a pellet grill, this is performed using an auger (a long corkscrew mechanism) that feeds the compressed wood pellets in the hopper to a raging fire pot directly under the obligatory heat shield that sits just below the grill grates. The higher you set the cooking temperature, the faster the pellets are delivered and vice versa.

In the past, some pellet grills have caught fire – very rare it must be said – usually because of a poorly-designed auger channel and too much fat build-up as a result of inadequate maintenance. Thankfully, the Titan’s up-hill auger is designed to improve pellet flow efficiency while eradicating the chance of burn-back and auger jams.

If you need to change your pellets from, say, apple to mesquite wood, there’s a large lever on the left of the hopper which you pull to release the contents into a bucket. However, ‘big red button’ syndrome makes this intriguing lever too inviting for inquisitive visitors who may feel the urge to pull it, releasing the contents of the hopper all over the floor. I’m telling you this because a friend of mine did just that, but thankfully managed to close it immediately without too many pellets spilling everywhere. But if there are children about, I would warn them in advance or you’ll be sweeping up pellets for the next hour or so.

The Pit Boss Competition Titan’s control interface strikes a smart balance between simplicity and depth, making it approachable for beginners while offering enough flexibility for experienced pit masters. Dominating the front panel is a bright 10.9cm touchscreen display controller that shows current and target temperatures, pellet delivering status and probe readings at a glance.

The display controller’s main role is precise temperature management from 65˚C to 260˚C (150° to 500°F) in five degree increments. Set the temperature low (around 110˚C) for traditional smoking sessions where ultra long exposure to wood flavour is key. Mid-range settings of around 180˚C work brilliantly well for roasting chicken and vegetables, while higher temperatures transform the Titan into a traditional barbecue grill, and one that can genuinely sear steaks. This is made possible by dint of Pit Boss’s unique Flame Broiler system which is activated by pulling on a handle on the left hand side which opens a series of slats in the heat shield just above the burn pot. If you look through the slats you’ll see a raging inferno beneath, and once fat starts dripping it creates a scenario ripe for naked flame grilling, which is perfect for caramelising steaks.

Furthermore, this model comes with Pit Boss’ proprietary VST (Variable Smoke Technology). VST lets you fine-tune smoke output by adjusting how often pellets are fed and how much airflow is used in the burn chamber. This gives greater control over flavour intensity, allowing heavier smoke for brisket or ribs, or a lighter profile for poultry and roasting, while still maintaining stable cooking temperatures throughout. The Titan’s integrated meat probe inputs, meanwhile, remove much of the guesswork of barbecuing, allowing users to monitor internal food temperatures without repeatedly lifting the lid and losing heat.

The whole process of cooking with this grill is mostly hands off because it allows plenty of time for you to chat to your guests instead of being chained to the grill. You can even monitor and control the Titan’s internal temperature using the Pit Boss app.

Pit Boss Competition Titan: performance

Before I get to this model’s performance, I should add that any cooking system requiring electricity, computer processors and sensors to function should ideally be checked well before guests arrive because things can go wrong where tech is involved.

Thankfully I’ve had no such pre-party shenanigans happen to me and I’ve reviewed many pellet smokers and smart barbecues over the years, but I’m still mindful that they are not like standard charcoal barbecues which will work 100% of the time, mostly because there's nothing but charcoal involved.

To assess the Pit Boss Competition Titan’s low-and-slow credentials, I loaded it with a rack of pork spare ribs and followed the classic 3-2-1 method: three hours exposed to smoke at 110˚C with occasional apple juice spritzes, two hours wrapped in foil with a splash more juice, and a final hour back on the grate while I coated the ribs with glaze. For the finishing flourish, I raised the temperature to 175˚C for the last 15 minutes to set the glaze while keeping a close eye out for scorching.

The Titan’s performance during the cook was extremely impressive. For the entire opening stage it sat resolutely at 110˚C, deviating by no more than around two degrees either side of target. That level of temperature stability is exactly what you want from a premium pellet grill because consistency, more than outright heat output, is what separates a decent barbecue from an exceptional one.

There was one interesting wrinkle, however. Since I had no option but to cook in direct sunlight, the steel lid eventually absorbed enough heat to trigger a temperature spike in the companion app, which briefly reported 143˚C. This isn’t unique to the Titan, mind, because most pellet grills can produce exaggerated readings when the body is exposed to strong sun. Positioning the grill in shade, under a large parasol quickly calmed things down and restored normal readings.

As for the ribs? They emerged exactly as hoped, with a deep smoky flavour, a shiny lacquered exterior and indulgent, fall-off-the-bone tenderness.

I also tried a whole chicken at 180˚C and it turned out noticeably better than if cooked in my kitchen oven. Pellet grills always seem to hit a sweet spot between convection roasting and gentle smoke, and the Titan absolutely nailed it. The meat remained astonishingly juicy while the skin crisped up beautifully – something domestic ovens often struggle to achieve without drying the breast. Better still, because the chicken sat directly on the grill grate rather than stewing in a roasting tin, the underside browned properly, too, instead of emerging pale and soggy.

Although the Titan comes with two wired probes, I elected to use the superbly reliable wire-free Meater Pro (£129) for all my cooks. This probe syncs with its dedicated phone app to keep tabs on the food’s internal temperatures. I simply inserted it into the ribs and the whole chicken, set my preferred done-ness target and it sent me warnings just before the food was ready and when it had reached the time to take the food off.

It goes without saying that this smoker-cum-grill has become my new go-to outdoor cooker, whether it’s just a quick whip up for my partner and I or a veritable feast for half the village.

I personally find this style of automated outdoor cooking so amazingly effortless and versatile that it's hard going back to standard charcoal and gas. But then I’m no purist and will always take the easy option when hunger strikes.

Pit Boss Competition Titan review: verdict

The Pit Boss Competition Titan is a huge American-sized set-and-forget pellet grill that dominates any outdoor space and delivers impressively consistent, flavourful cooking across a wide temperature range, including searing.

No question, the Titan’s performance is exceptional, but its sheer scale and premium price put it firmly in enthusiast territory rather than something for casual patio or backyard use.

Seeing as both the Ninja Woodfire Electric Outdoor Oven and Electric Smoker went down extremely well at T3 Towers, we have been chomping at the bit (or should that be burned sausage?) to have a go with Ninja’s take on a propane grill.

But like the two aforementioned five-star items, Ninja cleverly pairs its expertise in electricity with the support of propane gas to create what it claims to be a true 5-in-1 outdoor cooking solution that’s just as happy banging out burgers and searing steaks as it is slow-roasting an entire bird.

The premise is relatively simple: it fuses a standard three-burner system with a cyclonic fan that gets the unit up to temperature in record time, as well as circulating heat and smoke evenly around the food inside. Flavoured smoke comes courtesy of a small pellet burner that sits next to the unit, which pumps out smoke for the fan to draw in and swirl around the culinary masterpiece for genuine barbecue flavours.

Ninja’s claim of 5-in-1 versatility also comes from the fact that it will sell you a pizza stone and flat-plate or plancha griddle separately, which adds a further three cooking methods to the existing grill, smoke and roast functions.

It’s a handsome unit, available in four colours (the blue and green look the smartest), but it’s not exactly cheap and, as you'll see in this review, it takes a fair amount of assembly to get it set up. But before I give anything away, here's my full Ninja FlexFlame review.

Ninja FlexFlame review: price and availability

In the UK, the Ninja FlexFlame currently costs £999.99 / $999.99, but this is for just the barbecue itself. Ninja throws in a small bag of wood pellets for free, which is enough for one cook.

There’s also a 5-in-1 bundle, which is very much worth the extra money, as it includes a plancha grill surface, pizza stone, pizza peel and a waterproof cover — important if you want the FlexFlame to stay looking fresh after a few winters.

This bundle is currently priced at £949.99, down from its original RRP of £1,249.99, although the items can all be purchased separately.

It is worth noting that you’ll need patio gas to run it, as well as access to mains power, although it will work if you happen to have portable power stations, such as those from EcoFlow and Jackery, which are capable of delivering DC output.

Ninja FlexFlame review: design and build

The Ninja FlexFlame arrives in an enormous box, which will require at least two people to lift into position. While the stand and panels aren’t particularly heavy, the main cooking grill weighs a ton, so you’ll need to rope those friends back in when it comes time to build.

For me, this was the most annoying part, as constructing the FlexFlame is akin to embarking on a complicated Ikea flat-pack project — the instructions are clear and simple, but set aside around two hours to get it done. There’s also a lot of packaging to store or get rid of afterwards.

Once built, it’s a handsome-looking thing and most of the surfaces feel robust and well made. The brass-coloured handle for the grill lid is a nice touch and the digital display for the precision burner control is easy to read in the sunshine.

If I was to get picky, the metal used for the side-mounted prep tables and front doors feels thin and flimsy, while the plastic dials would look and feel much better if they were made from something more robust.

As previously mentioned, it is well worth heading out to purchase a cover, as I am not convinced it wouldn’t start rusting after a few torrential downpours. Similarly, the half- or full-griddle optional extras feel like essentials, as the gaps in the metal grill surface are large enough for kebabs and other smaller food items to easily fall between.

Alternatively, you can save a bit of money and pick up some inexpensive non-stick grill mats, which do a very similar job to a plancha for a fraction of the price.

Ninja FlexFlame review: performance and features

The first thing to hit any new owner is just how fast the FlexFlame gets up to temperature, with Ninja suggesting a 10-minute pre-heat, but it can be far less if you’re happy not cooking on a molten 315°C searing surface.

Once plugged into the mains (or portable power, like I had to while my patio was being ripped up), it’s simply a case of selecting from the pre-set cooking modes via the precision burner dial. These include roasting or baking, low-and-slow cooking, and grilling or searing.

There’s further control over the temperature via a dedicated temperature dial, while the digital read-out indicates which gas burners are active. This is another clever and well-thought-out feature, as it allows for precise, slow roasts with the middle burner deactivated in bake or roast mode to ensure outer layers or skins of meat aren’t burnt to a crisp.

It’s also possible to cook with just the front two burners running, allowing vegetables and other more delicate foodstuffs to cook slowly at the rear.

During one cook-out, I placed some fresh corn on the top rack, well away from the grill surface itself, and, over the course of a full BBQ session (chicken, pork belly and some burgers, yum), it was beautifully soft with a tasty exterior crunch (yummier).

The woodfire smoker box also allows budding chefs to inject more flavour, with plenty of control over how much smoke is entering the cooking chamber. Simply fill the small hopper with Ninja-approved pellets, hit the big button and wait around 10 minutes for it to ignite.

It generally kicks out a lot of smoke and you’ll need to leave the lid down to get the most out of these aromatic flavours (the cyclonic fan automatically shuts off when the lid is opened anyway), but it’s potent enough to give a light woodfire hint to burgers, steaks and chicken when grilling.

Set the FlexFlame to low-and-slow or roast mode and the charring really penetrates the meat or vegetables that you have in there. I roasted a whole chicken one Sunday with Ninja’s All-Purpose Blend pellets and the meat was delicious — a rich, smoky flavour to the crispy skin, but with fantastically moist meat underneath.

The possibilities are near endless when it comes to cooking an array of food in a variety of styles and, while it is difficult to beat a real charcoal barbecue, the addition of these woodfire pellets aims to make up for some of the shortcomings.

Ninja FlexFlame review: verdict

The Ninja FlexFlame is incredibly easy to use and works brilliantly as a standard outdoor gas grill, but it also makes up for its lofty price tag with the ability to cook in multiple ways.

More adventurous chefs can spend hours slowly smoking an entire pork shoulder, while family pizza night is dead simple if you throw a pizza stone onto the surface.

Simply because it ignites and heats up so quickly, I found myself using it whenever the weather was good enough to cook outdoors. It’s very easy to clean, requiring only a quick scrub of the enamel-coated cast-iron grates and the occasional emptying of the included fat tray, which can also be tossed in the dishwasher.

In essence, it takes everything that’s brilliant about Ninja’s electric barbecue grill and smoker technology and beefs it up with a 425-square-inch cooking surface and the ability to open the lid and cook just like you can on a good old-fashioned gas grill.

The Apple Studio Display XDR is the second generation of Studio Display, providing a relatively affordable home monitor to pair with the Mac Studio or MacBook Pro.

It replaces the former 32-inch Pro XDR model, which sat alongside the original Studio Display, which was close to five grand. At double the price of the original Studio Display, it’s by no means cheap though.

This new 27-inch model is a step up from the Studio Display in almost all areas. It uses a mini LED rather than an LED display, which is much brighter, and finally offers a faster refresh rate of up to 120Hz – something previously lacking from Apple’s lineup.

Those using a Mac mini or MacBook Air are probably better served by the standard Studio Display or one of the many third-party options. However, for those wanting ultimate performance, the Studio Display XDR is likely to fit the bill.

Having used the Studio Display as my main display for the last year, I was keen to see how much better this new model is. I’ve been running both the Studio Display and Studio Display XDR from a Mac Studio for the past few weeks, to compare. While the Studio Display still holds up as an excellent monitor, the XDR model is that much better.

How much is the Apple Studio Display XDR?

Released in March 2026, the Apple Studio Display XDR starts from £2999 in the UK, $3299 in the US or A$5499 in Australia. Unlike the Studio Display, the height-adjustable stand comes as standard, though you can purchase it with a VESA mount adapter for wall mounting or attaching to monitor poles.

The only configurable feature is the option to have the nano-texture glass display. This provides a matte surface to the display, much like on the iPad Pro and the MacBook Pro. This isn’t a coating, this is part of the display, and the difference is stark. It does add £300 to the price, but if you are placing it in a bright room where reflections are likely, it’s well worth it.

Design and features

Design-wise, it’s difficult to tell the XDR version apart from the standard Studio Display. From the front, the black bezels are identical, with a 12MP CentreStage camera built in at the middle of the top bezel. Meanwhile, the back view has the same two USB-C and two powered Thunderbolt 5 ports.

The one potential giveaway is if it has just a tilting stand, though it’s possible to get both with the height and tilt adjustments. To really tell the difference, you need to plug the display in and take a look at the picture, as that’s where the difference really lies.

While the Studio Display XDR still offers a 5K resolution, it now has a 120Hz refresh rate with adaptive sync to adjust the frame rate to suit different media. This makes the display ideal for gaming, which is an area the Studio Display range has previously fallen down on.

The display itself now also uses mini-LED backlight technology, as opposed to standard LEDs, with 2304 dimming zones to provide more precise lighting and, therefore, deeper blacks and whiter whites. This is high compared to most mini-LED TVs, especially considering the size of the screen.

It’s brighter, too with up to 1,000 nits in standard definition and a peak of 2,000 nits for HDR content

Using the Apple Studio Display XDR

The Studio Display XDR is a great-looking monitor. With the brushed aluminium stand and back, along with the clean black bezels on the front, it looks every bit the Apple product and therefore sits perfectly alongside any Mac.

Due to the cost of this monitor, it’s likely to be paired with higher-end machines, but it will work perfectly well with any MacBook, Mac mini or Mac Studio. A 27-inch display is the perfect size for most desks, and more than enough real estate for most users. If you are connecting it to a MacBook, you can still use the laptop’s screen as a second display, but in practice, it’s not necessary.

The main requirement is that your machine is running on Apple silicon (so M1 and above) and is using macOS 26.3.1 or later. It is also compatible with newer iPad models, including all iPad Pro models and the iPad Air 5th generation or newer. The latest iPad Pro M5 will even support 120Hz when connected to the Studio Display XDR, while all other iPads are limited to 60Hz.

I love how clean and simple the Studio XDR display looks, thanks to the ports being kept on the back. I also love the height adjustment on this model, as it means you can position the screen in the right place for your line of vision – there’s nothing worse than spending out on a fancy monitor and then having to prop it up on books, or an additional stand.

As with the standard studio monitor, the built-in webcam is excellent, giving you 12MP images or high-quality video calls. It also has built-in microphones and speakers – the speakers especially sound nice and big, giving you full spatial audio from the six-speaker system.

The best thing about the display, though, has to be the picture. As I said in my review of the original Apple Studio Display, its picture is absolutely stunning, and for general use the Studio Display XDR looks very similar.

Where it differs most is in the brightness, though there are subtleties between the images from the XDR and the standard model, with a little more contrast and gentler gradation on tones. It’s a tough call to the naked eye, though, and you wouldn’t be unhappy with either.

Refresh rate is the big ticket feature here, and having 120Hz on the XDR. You can test this quite easily for yourself using different online tools, like Test UFO, but you can really see it if you play fast-frame-rate games, such as DOOM Eternal. I noticed the difference playing Cyberpunk 2077 and even in the sequences of Civilization VII.

Should I buy the Apple Studio Display XDR?

For most Apple users, the regular Studio Display is still more than enough monitor, and if you want 120Hz, there are other options that cost significantly less. However, if you want the very best experience for your Mac, the Studio Display XDR is the one to go for.

Using this monitor is a dream, whether you’re working or gaming. The quality of both still and moving images is hard to beat, and the built-in speakers, microphone and cameras save you needing any add-ons apart from the computer itself.

While possibly overkill for most home users, it does offer pro-quality, so whether you’re editing video, images or 3D modelling, you will get a precise image and accurate colour. It’s the perfect pairing for the Mac Studio devices, but equally at home with a MacBook Pro.

Some users may miss the 32-inch size of the former model, but there’s always the option to pair two of these screens together for a giant workspace. Personally, I wouldn’t want anything bigger than 27 inches on my desk. I would love to see an iMac Pro offering, though, at this size.

I have been a big fan of Omorpho since I tried the brand’s weighted vest a couple of years ago. If you know anything about weighted vests, you might be familiar with the absolute lack of innovation in the category, which is why it’s nice that at least one company takes these products seriously.

The Omorpho G-Vest, which I tried back in 2024 and still use to this day, features a set of ball bearings (the so-called MicroLoad spheres) that distribute weight evenly across the vest. The updated G Vest Icon follows the same approach while also introducing the G-Pack system.

It’s three flat weight panels that snap inside the vest, allowing progressive overload while keeping the same slim profile. Men's versions can go from 10 lb to 20 lb, and the women's from 6 lb to 12 lb.

The G Vest Icon also has a more refined silhouette, making it even better suited for running and walking than its predecessor. It’s the best weighted vest you can buy right now, unless you prefer bulky models that flop around every time you move during your workout.

Omorpho G Vest Icon review

Price and availability

The G Vest Icon was launched in October 2025 and is available to buy now at Omorpho US, Omorpho UK and Omorpho EU, with prices starting at $319 / £259 / €299. It comes in three colours in the UK and EU (the new Deep Sea, Ocean (blue) and Black), with the good folks in the US also having a fourth option, Black Earth.

The weighted vest comes in three size options: Small-Medium, Large-Extra Large and Extra-Extra Large. The G Pack costs $99 / £79 / €99 when purchased with the G Vest Icon and $129 / £109 / €129 if you buy it on its own. The G Pack comes in only one colour (black).

Design and materials

The G Vest Icon uses the same 100% laminated polyester-to-synthetic-rubber construction as its predecessor, with stainless steel ball bearings encased inside. I haven’t counted the balls, but there are quite a few both on the front and back. The front has angled lines with no balls, presumably to let you bend forward more easily.

The three size options weigh differently, between 4.4 and 4.9 kg. My L-XL model weighs 4.8 kg. The G Vest Icon is fully adjustable via the side cords and the shoulder straps. One of the main benefits of Omorpho’s system is that it lets you find the closest fit to your body, which is handy during fast-paced workouts, especially walking and running.

The front features a full-length zip, and thanks to its slender design, the vest is easy to put on and take off. The curved hem helps, too. Running down the middle of the back is a ventilation channel. Omorpho recommends spot-cleaning or hand-washing the G Vest Icon in cold water, then hanging it to dry in the shade.

Performance and comfort

One of the best things about the G Vest Icon – especially in the heat we’re experiencing at the moment – is that you can wear it directly on your skin. I found the straps even more comfortable than those on the original G Vest, distributing weight evenly across both shoulders.

The side cords can be adjusted with just one pull, with the little gadget locking into position automatically. Once you've adjusted the vest, you won’t have to adjust it again for a while, unless you share it with someone else. Just make sure you wipe it off after every use.

The MicroLoad system works just as well as before. I used the G Vest Icon mostly for home workouts and had zero complaints about it. Of course, it’s still not ideal for exercises when you have to lie down on the floor, but that’s a tall ask from any weighted vest.

The vest works wonderfully for walking and can be used for running, too. A running-specific model (G-Vest Run) is coming soon; if you want to use the vest for that, I might wait. That said, the G Vest Icon is versatile enough for running, so if you need a model that does it all, I’d go with the current one.

If I have to offer any criticism, it’s that even with the G Pack, which costs extra, by the way, the vest is still pretty light compared to the competition. Of course, it’s also a lot more comfortable, so there is that.

Verdict

The Omorpho G Vest Icon takes everything that made the original G Vest one of my favourite fitness accessories and improves on it. The addition of the G-Pack system provides much-needed flexibility, while the refined fit makes the vest even more comfortable for walking, running, and general workouts.

It's still lighter than many traditional weighted vests, particularly once you start doing more strength-focused training, and having to pay extra for the additional weight panels feels a little cheeky at this price.

That said, no other weighted vest I've tested comes close to matching the G Vest Icon's comfort, fit and versatility. If your idea of weighted training involves moving rather than simply loading up as much weight as possible, the Omorpho G Vest Icon is the best weighted vest money can buy.

I jumped at the chance to review the Roborock Qrevo S Pro. Why? Because it is a robot vacuum and mop and the thought of something else cleaning the floors was a huge relief.

The reality was no different. I’ve been releasing the Roborock Qrevo S Pro on a daily roam around the ground floor of my home, to vacuum the carpets and rugs and mop the hard wooden floors. It has been two weeks and so far, so good.

I’ve challenged it with deliberately dropped dried cereals and the daily debris bought in by a young family. It certainly had its work cut out for it. Keep reading to see if it’s the best robot vacuum cleaner for your household, or if you’re going to stick with the best cordless vacuum after all.

Price and availability

The Roborock Qrevo S Pro is available to buy for a cool £549.49, either direct from the brand or a go-to favorite reseller, Amazon.

While it was only just launched at the end of April 2026, this robot vacuum and mop combo regularly takes a discount. For example, right now it’s discounted by 15% which takes the price you pay down to £479.99.

Regardless of where you buy it from, Roborock or Amazon, you’ll get free delivery and free returns. This alone will save a small fortune because I would consider it a “bulky” item to ship.

Unboxing and set up

The Roborock Qrevo S Pro is one of the easiest smart devices I have ever tested. It’s a bold claim, I know, but in fewer than five minutes I had all the hardware to this robot and mop combo set up and connected to the Roborock app on my phone.

This was helped by the Quick Start Guide which is included in the package contents. On this sheet of A3 laminated card were printed five steps to installation and four steps to connect to the app. Also included were mop cloth mounts, a user manual, the robot itself, a power cord and the dock.

I located my Qrevo S Pro, aka “Richard”, in our hallway backed against the wall. This is a hard, wood floor situated between the lounge at the front of the house and the kitchen/diner to the rear. It’s recommended that the dock is positioned on a hard, flat floor and flat against the wall, with a minimum radius of 0.4m wide and 1.2m depth of non-obstructive space around it.

With the dock base attached to the main dock (it's removable for easier cleaning), power cord connected to the back of the dock, water tank filled up and the mop cloth mounted, all that’s left to do is download the app and follow the on-screen instructions.

The maiden voyage of the Qrevo S Pro will be to map the floor space that you want cleaned. If there are any rooms that you don’t want cleaned for whatever reason then just shut the door; our “Richard” soon got the hint.

Design and features

On paper, the Roborock Qrevo S Pro is packed full of features; precise mapping and obstacle avoidance, 18,500Pa suction and anti-tangle system, dual liftable spinning mops, 65-days without dustbag emptying, 45°C high temperature cleaning and 75°C warm air self drying.

The reality is no different.

It maps the space/s you want cleaned on the maiden voyage. It took our “Richard” a couple of attempts because a door to a room was shut during the mapping process and a few too many dining chairs (each with four legs) caused a bit too much of an obstacle course to navigate.

While the map doesn’t appear to update after each clean, certainly each cleaning course is different when “Richard” is working its way across the floors. With two young children in the house, there are always toys around – and the toy storage moves with it. This means that no two cleaning routes are the same, but “Richard” takes this in its stride and just cleans what it can get to by dodging any obstacles.

I have to admit that I don’t have a way to measure the suction being promised. However, I can hear that the suction is adjusted as “Richard” transitions between the carpets, rugs and hard flooring. I also can not see any hairs in a tangle on the roller bar or side brush.

It does also feature two mops that rotate when cleaning, and lift while vacuuming. It does look as though these mops are dragged across the carpet and rugs, but I haven’t noticed any dampness on its route to report.

After two weeks of testing “Richard” at least once-a-day I can see that both mop pads look (and smell) clean. I can not see any obvious staining and I’m satisfied that they will continue to clean the floor, rather than make it dirty again.

These two mop pads are positioned on the underside of the Roborock Qrevo S Pro, alongside the all-rubber main brush which, as we’ve explored, doesn’t get into a tangle with hair.

This main brush is nestled between two wheels with an enhanced omni-wheel featuring a built-in brush that aims to reduce maintenance. Furthermore, a side brush on the top left of the robot & mop combo will sweep crumbs and debris into the path of the main brush for banishing to the dustbag.

Flip over to the otherside and there are two buttons – “Home” and “Stop”. Both are self explanatory but "Stop” will ultimately pause the Qrevo S Pro mid-task and “Home” will send it back to base. Above these two buttons is a crumb catcher that can be accessed by lifting up the top cover. There's also the all-important Precisense LiDAR-based navigation system in a dome-like cap which will scan the space when creating a map.

Then, at either end of the vacuum & mop combo are structured light sensors that detect and steer away toys, socks and furniture – steer through, as I’ve found. Though I wouldn’t recommend it for fear of losing anything, it can be said that you may be able to get away from tidying before setting off the Qrevo S Pro.

Measuring h3.8 x w13.8in, the robot vacuum and mop will easily slip under most furniture and cupboards to clean those floors that don’t often see the light of day. It weighs just 0.7lbs also so it’s easy to lift should you need to move it or look underneath it for anything that may become lodged (like a sock).

The dock on the other hand measures h20.4 x w19.2 x d13.4in. This is where the Qrevo S Pro will empty, clean and recharge itself. It has a 4-litre clean water tank which can be easily lifted and removed for refilling. Similarly, the dirty water tank has the same capacity and ease of removal.

A dustbag is located at the front of the dock behind a cover. I’ve been testing our Qrevo S Pro, “Richard” for at least two weeks, and I’ve yet to replace the disposable dust bag (it’s estimated that it’ll need replacing every 65 days). This dust bag is pre-installed upon arrival.

App

To control the Roborock Qrevo S Pro I could either use the two buttons on top of the vacuum, or the app. The Roborock app has a greater amount of customisation and control so I used it to activate most cleans, unless it was a scheduled clean – something else that you can do in the app.

Once the map had been established, and I was satisfied that it had accurately sussed out the space, I could select a preferred cleaning mode for each room depending on the floor type. I could also select the room I wanted to clean if I didn’t want “Richard” to clean our entire ground floor, and set routines for more personalised cleaning sequences.

The map also updates after every clean, like it was learning the space. After a week of test, it also identified a threshold without any prompt from me and added this to the map.

At any point during a clean I could also “Pause” the clean or “Return to Base” through the app. If I wanted to hand over the control over to another human in the house then I could also share the device with them although, of course, anyone can just press a button on vacuum to start a clean.

I also found it helpful to receive notifications when the water tank needed to be refilled, or when a sock had become lodged. You can, of course, disable these notifications if you want to tone down your phone's activity. Alternatively, the Qrevo S Pro can connect with Matter, Alexa, Google Home and Apple Siri for hands-free control.

Performance

I’ve been using the Roborock Qrevo S Pro at least once per day for two weeks to vacuum the carpets and mop the hard floors, and I wouldn’t be without it.

It effortlessly removes the majority of debris from the floors which has ultimately saved me the time it takes to clean and saved on the effort of reaching for the vacuum cleaner and mop. Our “Richard” sensed the difference in flooring as it moved between carpets and hard flooring, adjusting the suction accordingly and lifting / dropping the spinning mops.

As it worked its way around the mapped floor space and there was a person or item in its path, "Richard" navigated around the obstruction and continued to clean the remainder of the space. It then returned to where the obstruction was to finish the clean before returning to base.

However, it was totally hopeless at banishing larger dried cereal to the dustbin; multigrain hoops were swept around in circles or swept away from the path of the roller. Similarly, it doesn’t scrub the floor, only lightly wets it, so wet wheat biscuits remain cemented on the floor (until I can scrub it off).

There were also a couple of instances that the robot dragged a small toy along the floor, so make sure to lift anything off the floor that you don’t want dragged, or banished into the dustbin. I also found that socks can become lodged in the roller so try to ensure that these are picked up before a clean too.

It's one of the more bulkier robot vacuum and mops that I have tested also, so it's a bit cumbersome when manouvering around furniture and seems to miss some of the floor area in the process. It's size also means that it can't always get down the sides of the sofa or, in my case, behind the hair chair in the kitchen which is next to the table unless I move it to be somewhere else in the way.

While it does remove the majority of debris from the floors, which is great, it does miss some. This seems to either be because the debris is on a textured rug so the 18,500Pa suction isn’t great enough, or the zig-zag cleaning pattern simply misses it.

The noise is also worth mentioning. I used a decibel meter reader app on my phone which measured; 70dB while emptying, 64dB while vacuuming, 52dB while mopping and 48dB while returning to base. It was quiet enough not to disturb us while vacuuming or mopping, but emptying was so loud that it temporarily drowned out the TV.

Maintenance

The Roborock Qrevo S Pro self-cleans so there is very little maintenance, although it will need a few things from you to keep in a working order.

For example, the water tank will need refilling every few days so it can keep mopping, and the dirty tank will require emptying every few days. You’ll know when to do this by the red light shown on the docking station, or a notification to your phone.

The dust bag will also need replacing every 65 days. These can be bought either direct from Roborock or Amazon for £31.99 (pack of 6). Speaking of dust, the dock and vacuum would also benefit from dust-down – especially, if like “Richard”, yours is in black.

Verdict

If you don’t have a robotic robot and mop, and you have a variety of floor types, then the Roborock Qrevo S Pro should be at the top of your wishlist. It is a mid-range price tag but a high-end device that’ll sweep away most daily debris, so it’s a bit of a steal in my eyes.

I’ve tested several robotic vacuums in the past which have carried a much higher price tag. This may be because technology is much more advanced or production costs have reduced but, even so, for £599 (when not on sale) it’ll save you the time and hassle of cleaning the floors at the end of each day – especially if you have children.

If you only have a robot vacuum cleaner or a robot mop, this would also be a good upgrade because it is suitable for all floor types; carpets, rugs, tiled, sealed wood and stone.

Alternatives to consider

If you have your heart set on a robot vacuum and mop but are after a greater suction power, like double that of the Roborock, then the Dreame Matrix10 Ultra is our top choice. Our Senior Homes Writer, Lizzie Wilmot, shares that the combination of cutting-edge technologies create a level of automation that's just effortless, all pulled together with the impressive Dreamehome app.

If £1,399/€1,399/$1,799 for the Dreame is way off your budget, then let it be known that the SwitchBot Mini Robot Vacuum K10+ Pro is T3’s best affordable robot vacuum cleaner. It costs the same as the Roborock Qrevo S Pro but it’s smaller, measuring 24.8cm x 24.8cm x 9.2cm.

The fact that the DX3000CL are the most affordable model – as well as the first closed-back model – in Final Audio’s ‘DX’ range is not the same as saying they represent any sort of bargain.

Final Audio's DX6000 flagship costs approaching four times the price – at nearly £1900 / $2000, after all – so everything is relative. However, the DX3000CL could conceivably represent great value for money if you're looking for a wired closed-back over-ears.

Price & Availability

The Final Audio DX3000CL have been on sale since late 2025. In the United Kingdom they sell for £549. You’re looking at $599 in the United States. And it's around the AU$1099 mark in Australia.

This is affordable by the standards of Final Audio’s ‘DX’ range, sure – but this is still a fairly pricey pair of headphones, one that faces plenty of competition from plenty of equally credible brands among the best wired headphones.

Features & What's New?

Some cable and some drivers – that’s generally it for ‘features’ where passive hard-wired headphones are concerned. And Final Audio is not the sort of company that will pile on the fripperies just for the sake of it. What you get here are the essentials.

Which means a 2m length of oxygen-free copper cable in a flexible polymer sheath, with a 4.4mm balanced termination at the business end and a chunky unbalanced 6.3mm adapter too. The other end of the cable divides into two 3.5mm terminations, as each earcup needs to be wired.

The cable sends analogue information to a pair of 40mm free-edge dynamic drivers, designed and engineered in house by Final Audio in Japan, and which feature a paper/carbon composite diaphragm.

The company is claiming a frequency response of 10Hz - 40kHz, and given that sensitivity is quoted at 96dB and impedance at 37Ω, the DX3000CL shouldn’t be any kind of hardship to drive.

Sound Performance

Being a specialist is not automatically a bad thing – it means that people know where to come when they need something specific done to a very high standard.

But when you’re spending this sort of money on a pair of headphones, you’re entitled to expect a level of across-the-board competence that the Final Audio DX3000CL don’t seem capable of mustering.

To be fair, the things the DX3000CL are good at outweigh the things they’re not quite so good at to quite a degree – and at their best, the Final Audio are among the very best around. Certainly when you consider ‘detail retrieval’ and ‘insight’ as disciplines, off the top of my head I can’t think of a more effective way at this price point.

In the simplest terms, the Final Audio know everything about the recording you’re listening to. There isn’t an aspect of it that’s too minor, too deep in the mix or too transient to escape their notice – and once they’ve identified a particular detail, they have absolutely no problem in putting it into context with just the right amount of weighting.

They’re analytical in the least pejorative sense, because they don’t make teasing out the most fleeting details in your favourite recordings the whole point. They simply want to give you as complete a picture as possible.

The fact these headphones are capable of mustering a large, well-defined and very spacious soundstage helps no end when it comes to revealing all these fine details, too.

The DX3000CL give the participants in even the most complex recordings all the space they need to express themselves – but they also ensure a performance is knitted together convincingly at the same time.

There’s a togetherness and a singularity about the way these headphones present music that might seem at odds with the sheer scale of their staging – but only until you hear them in action.

They are very well judged where tonality is concerned, too, with just the tiniest hint of heat at the bottom of the frequency range making them less than utterly neutral.

Frequency response is similarly judicious: low frequencies hit with determination, and are controlled to the point that rhythm expression is very assured, but they’re never overstated.

The same is true of the midrange, and the brightly substantial top-end of the frequency range too. The amount of weight each area receives is entirely appropriate in every circumstance.

What’s lacking in the way the Final Audio present music is a convincing sense of drive or dynamic impetus. Some recordings simmer along at a consistent level of volume and intensity, and in these circumstances the DX3000CL are perfectly happy.

But those recordings that indulge in big shifts where volume or intensity are concerned – or, even more problematically, both – will expose a lack of willingness on the part of the Final Audio to properly dig in and attack these fluctuations with anything approaching conviction. It makes for an overly 'polite' listen – and that’s not always what’s required.

Design & Usability

Unusually, the DX3000CL earcups move up and down on a slender length of shaped steel in order to adjust the fit of the headphones – it’s more common in over-ear headphones to find the earcups are fixed and the headband has some adjustment.

But that’s it as far as esoteric design choices go – in every other respect, the Final Audio adhere closely to the long-established ‘over-ear headphones’ template.

The earcups are made from a resin that’s reinforced with glass-fibre, and a couple of pronounced circular grooves in the material constitute a design flourish.

The earpads are of synthetic leather, and they’re padded with quite a lot of medium-density memory foam – so be prepared for these headphones to make your head quite a lot wider than many alternative designs insist on.

There’s more synthetic leather on the outside of memory foam for the inside of the headband, too – although thankfully a slightly more manageable amount.

The total weight (with cable) is 410g – which looks like more than it feels like, thanks to a judicious hanger arrangement and some carefully judged clamping force.

It’s worth mentioning that Final Audio uses no adhesives in the DX3000CL's construction – instead, a combination of precision screws and ‘O’-rings are used, and the result is exemplary build quality. Plus, of course, the headphones are much easier to disassemble and repair or renew, and are more sustainable as a result.

Final Audio DX3000CL review: Verdict

If the DX3000CL could attack a recording with as much conviction as they extract all of the information from it, they’d be a shoo-in for that fifth star and be real wired contenders. As it is, they have a remarkably specific skillset that is bound to delight as many listeners as it frustrates.

Also Consider

The best wired over-ear headphones we’ve heard at this sort of money aren’t, strictly speaking, alternatives for the Final Audio DX3000CL at all.

The FiiO FT5 are a tremendous pair of headphones, and at the money are about the most affordable taste of planar magnetic driver technology around – but they’re open-backed, and so nothing like as realistic a proposition for listening to when in company.

The same is true of the Sennheiser HD 660 S2 – outstanding sound quality from a company that is as credible as they come, but from an open-backed design that leaks sound quite readily.

So unless you’re prepared to spend quite a lot more than DX3000CL money, or to spend less and compromise on sound quality, the Final Audio have a little part of the market all to themselves.

I've been testing the Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro – aptly, given the product's name – for four months now. I've tested using the Galaxy S26 Ultra and a bunch of the year's other best Android phones – including Oppo Find X9 Ultra and more.

During my time reviewing these earbuds, I've jostled between a batch of other review units – Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds 2nd Gen included – and have also seen various software updates further finesse the Samsung's already solid offering.

Compared to previous generations, the Buds 4 Pro up the comfort and noise-cancelling ante. But in a field that's already full of big-hitters, do Samsung's flagship earbuds stand out? If you've got a flagship Galaxy phone to match then the ecosystem tie-in may well be reason enough.

Price & Availability

The Galaxy Buds 4 Pro launched in tandem with the Galaxy S26 phone series earlier this year. The initial on-sale price was £219 / £249 / AU$399 – which represented a like-for-like price position per their predecessors.

Since the launch date, however, the price has dipped a bit – as you can see in the live shopping widget above. However, the earlier Galaxy Buds 3 Pro are far cheaper still, if price is your main purchase incentive.

Buds Pro 3 vs 4: What's New?

Paying the extra may well be worth it, however, as the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro bring some tasty extras over the previous model.

Design is the most considerable shift, with the 'Blade lights' of the older model – yes, there were actual lights on the stems – banished from the Buds 4 Pro.

The new model's stems are now finished with a brushed metal, providing a different aesthetic that helps stand them apart from looking like "yet another AirPods replica".

Sound has also been revised, with the 10mm woofer of the previous model upped to an 11mm version. The separate 5.5mm tweeter has also been retuned in balance with that upgrade.

In addition to the promise of better sound, Samsung has also revised the active noise-cancelling (ANC) for greater aspirations, too, with less "hiss" and greater reduction of ambient sounds.

The latest Bluetooth standard and better wide-band call quality are also added to the Buds 4 Pro.

Comfort & Setup

For years I've been an advocate of the best over-ear headphones, but recent years have shown me that in-ear 'buds have come a long way – this Samsung pair very much included.

That's because the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro have been created following "10,000 simulations with global ear data points", Samsung tells me, to create a 'master' average that's more likely to be comfortable for more people.

It's worked a treat for my ears, as even after all these months of on-and-off wearing, from the very first time I put the 'buds into my ears through until now, I've felt largely satisfied with the comfort.

There's no real stress or sensation of pressure, although this can build to some degree after longer periods of wear. I find the Bose QC Ultra Earbuds 2 feel nicer, even if their far larger design might seem at odds with such a statement.

How the 'buds will actually look in your ears is another matter, of course, and this will come down to personal preference. White is the review model I possess, when I'd pick the Black finish all day long – or there's also a Pink Gold, if that's more to your tastes.

But I'm getting ahead of myself here: as setting up the Buds 4 Pro is the first thing that you'll have to perform after taking the earbuds out of their box and, indeed, the included charging case.

Pairing via Bluetooth is easy: simply place the earbuds into that case, with the lid open, then perform a typical Bluetooth pairing function. That's the most basic connection established, but for fuller functionality you'll need Samsung's Galaxy Wearable app to handle everything.

The app is an important aspect of setting up the finer details, as the Buds 4 Pro can do a lot more than just deliver audio straight to your ears. They can read notifications from specific apps, for example – a feature that I found nothing but infuriating in disrupting my music flow (and which took ages to locate and fully disable – a 'do not disturb' override would be lovely).

Other features include a 'fit test' for how well the 'buds sit into your ears; pinch and voice control settings; a fully adjustable graphic equaliser (EQ) with preset options available; 'Adaptive' automated adjustment between noise-cancelling and ambient modes; plus various tutorials.

Sound & ANC

Samsung's hardware upgrades have worked some audio magic, as the Buds 4 Pro sound spectacular right off the bat. Make some EQ tweaks and they'll only sound better, in my view – avoiding distortion and delivering more personalised audio.

While the abundance of bass is the obvious takeaway from these earbuds, the rest of the frequency range is well handled, too, with higher frequencies nicely separated thanks to that dual-driver design. It's a very clean, wide and enveloping listen – which is just what you want from a pair of earbuds.

This sound profile can take on the best of them, plus those with a Samsung Galaxy phone can benefit from even better audio thanks to SSC (UHQ) codec support – that's Samsung Seamless Codec (Ultra High Quality – designed for connection stability with up to 24-bit/96kHz hi-res audio sources. There's also Seamless Earbud Connection to flit between Galaxy ecosystem devices with ease.

If you don't have another Galaxy device, however, then no need to fret – the audio quality remains top-notch, as I've experienced on my various test devices, from Google to Oppo and Honor to OnePlus. From a sound perspective, therefore, there's little to criticise about Samsung's top-end earbuds.

The active noise-cancelling (ANC) has also shown generational improvements, seeing it do a great job at keeping ambient sounds further at bay. You can adjust the degree of ANC through five levels within the app.

You can also permit some 'ambient sound', i.e. the amount of surrounding sounds that can pass through, again on a five-level slider control. This doesn't have to be done manually, though, as Adaptive mode can take control based on your scenario.

Adaptive can be set to maximise ambient sound when there's voice or sirens detected, or during calls, for example. Call quality is very good, by the way, with microphone improvements making a big difference in clarity – whether or not you have Adaptive switched on.

Personally, I'm all about ANC being on and set to its maximum. Even at this setting, however, the Buds 4 Pro can't blot out some 'clickier' high-frequency sounds – which will continue to pass through. So Samsung's ANC solution isn't the best on market for my money – close as it gets.

It's still very good in most scenarios, though. Whether you're surrounded by road traffic or noisy air-conditioning fans, or on an aeroplane where the background "hiss" is abundant – all of which are effectively muted through this ANC system. It just needs a few tweaks to be 100% effective.

Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro review: Verdict

If you're looking for comfortable earbuds for your Samsung Galaxy phone that offer big bass, a broad soundstage, and decent active noise-cancelling, then the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro are an all-round success.

Even if you've got another type of Android phone, while you'll lose the Samsung-specific audio codec and some baked-in operating system controls, these earbuds deliver features to take on the best of the competition.

Indeed, it's only really the ANC allowing some ambient sounds to cut through that hold these 'buds back from near perfection. Battery life is also beaten by Apple's key competitor, at a maximum of 6 hours per charge – but the case will deliver three further full charges.

All in all, though, Samsung's flagship earbuds deliver a raft of improvements in a better-looking and better-sounding design than it's ever managed before. I'm still wearing them months on from acquiring a pair – and will continue to do so.

Also Consider

If you want the best-of-best in ANC, however, then Bose's QC Ultra Earbuds are a winner – and the 2nd Gen is preferable, should the price be on point.

Otherwise, Apple's AirPods Pro 3 do make a strong case for themselves – albeit more for iPhone users. Indeed, Samsung's efforts are the equivalent tie-in for a Galaxy ecosystem.

As someone who reviews everything from the best coffee machines to robot vacuums, there are certain products that inevitably end up being delegated to my long-suffering partner. The best body groomers fall firmly into that category, and whilst I was technically overseeing the testing process, it's fair to say my role involved inspecting the results from a respectful distance and trying not to laugh.

The Manspot Body Trimmer is one of a growing number of affordable grooming tools promising a smoother and less stressful manscaping experience. With waterproofing, ceramic blades and a wallet-friendly price tag, it certainly ticks plenty of boxes on paper.

After several weeks of testing – mostly carried out by my partner, much to his delight – here's how the Manspot Body Trimmer performed.

Price and availbility

It doesn't get much cheaper than the Manspot Body Trimmer, which comes in at just £21.99 on Amazon. The Manspot version is available in either black or a stylish khaki green, whilst there's also a Ladyspot model offered in pink or purple.

Slightly unnecessary gendered marketing, but at least there are a few colour options to choose from.

Design and features

The Manspot Body Trimmer is designed as an all-in-one grooming tool for body hair, with a clear focus on comfort and ease of use in more sensitive areas. It has an ergonomic shape that sits comfortably in the hand, whilst the textured finish provides plenty of grip. It's also fully waterproof, allowing you to use it wet or dry and rinse it clean afterwards.

The trimmer uses a high-performance motor paired with an anti-cut blade system that's designed to minimise irritation, nicks and razor burn. The blades themselves are made from ceramic and aerospace-grade materials, which Manspot claims improve both durability and comfort during use. They're also intended to be more hygienic than some traditional blade materials, making them well suited to regular grooming.

The trimmer ships with four guide combs offering cutting lengths of 1.5mm, 3mm, 3-6mm and 9-12mm. The shortest guard delivers a very close trim, whilst the longer options give you a bit more flexibility depending on the look you're after.

Manspot claims the battery can last for up to 20 grooming sessions, or around 90 minutes of runtime from a single charge. Charging takes around 2.5 hours and is handled via USB-C, and there's also a small cleaning brush included in the box.

Performance

My partner actually started testing the Manspot Body Trimmer on his face first, simply to get a feel for how the trimmer handled. That said, I wouldn't recommend regularly using a body trimmer as your main facial grooming tool, as it's specifically designed for more sensitive areas of the body. If facial shaving is your priority, you're much better off sticking with one of the best electric shavers.

His first impression was how comfortable the trimmer felt in the hand. The ergonomic shape makes it easy to manoeuvre, whilst the soft-touch silicone provides plenty of grip. It feels secure to hold, which is particularly important if you're using it in the shower where things can quickly become slippery.

He also liked the blade width, which strikes a nice balance between covering larger areas efficiently whilst still being precise enough for more detailed grooming. Swapping between the included guards is equally straightforward thanks to the simple clip-on, clip-off design.

Moving onto the rest of his body, he was pleasantly surprised by the overall performance. Whilst it doesn't quite match the refinement of premium options like the Wahl Manscaper, it comfortably performs above what its price tag would suggest. The trimmer followed body contours well, delivered a neat trim and, most importantly, managed to avoid any uncomfortable pinches or nicks.

One thing he did note is that the Manspot Body Trimmer is fairly compact. Whilst that means it doesn't cover large areas quite as quickly as some bigger rivals, it makes it an excellent option to take travelling. As a result, it would have been nice to see Manspot include a travel pouch or storage case in the box, but considering the price, it's hardly a dealbreaker.

Verdict

The Manspot Body Trimmer is a budget-friendly grooming tool that prioritises comfort and safety over premium refinement. It performs reliably for everyday body grooming, especially in sensitive areas, and whilst it doesn’t quite reach the smooth efficiency of higher-end competitors, it still delivers impressive results for its price. Its compact size also makes it travel-friendly, though the lack of a storage pouch is a small but noticeable omission.

Alternatives to consider

If you're looking for another affordable body groomer, I'd also recommend the Philips Series 3000 Bodygroomer. It delivers an impressively smooth shave for the money and feels remarkably similar to Philips' more premium Series 7000 models, despite costing just over £40.

I also couldn't finish without mentioning the Wahl Manscaper, which remains our favourite body groomer overall. Not only is it competitively priced, but it combines a lightweight build with a comfortable rubberised grip and a handy LED display that shows both the selected cutting length and remaining battery life.

In the gaming headset stakes, Turtle Beach is an established name. It's one of the longest-standing brands in the market, and particularly in the US there was a time when it felt like basically anyone with a third-party headset had a Turtle Beach one.

That's changed a lot, though, and the best gaming headsets now come from a more diverse pool of brands. Still, Turtle Beach is clearly trying to move with the times, and the Stealth Pro II demonstrates that with a spiffy new design and premium price.

I've been using one for a couple of weeks to see if Turtle Beach's flagship can live up to the billing. Here's what I make of it – the good and the bad.

Price and Availability

The Turtle Beach Stealth Pro II is available now in most regions and comes with an undeniably punchy price tag attached. In the UK, it's £299.99, in the USA that's $349.99, while in Australia it's AU$549.95. No matter how you spin it, that's pricey.

For only a little more money you could have my top recommendation in this device category, the SteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro Omni, which boasts very similar features – so Turtle Beach is undercutting that slightly, while clearly trying to fight for the same ground.

One important note – like many others, there are two versions of the Stealth Pro II on sale. One is seemingly standard and works on PC, Switch consoles and PlayStation. The other has Xbox in the name and adds compatibility with Microsoft's consoles at no extra cost. So, if you're going to buy one, make sure it's the Xbox one for maximum compatibility and no downsides.

Design and Features

I've tested Turtle Beach headsets for well over half a decade at this point, and I've consistently marked them down for mediocre designs and ergonomics. They've often been very sensibly priced, but generally felt plasticky and cheap, which is something the Stealth Pro II completely fixes.

It has a sleek new design that's way more futuristic than past generations, and has a really lovely look, whether you pick it up in the white version or black. Each earcup is really big and spacious, and on the outside it has a metallic plate with the Turtle Beach logo.

One of these earcups can be pried off to reveal the replaceable battery pack, but the other is fixed. On the left earcup, you'll find a button to swap between audio modes, a dial for master volume, another for game/chat balance, a USB-C charging port as a backup, and a power button.

The microphone comes out of the same left earcup and is removable if you don't want to use it. It can flip up out of your way when not in use, too. The right earcup, meanwhile, holds a microphone gain dial, a device-switching button, and a Bluetooth pairing button.

Each earcup is secured to a slim metal arm that joins up to the headband, and each can telescope for adjustment. The headband itself is sturdy plastic, with a section of woven stretchy mesh at the top. This is clearly intended to soften how the headset sits on your head, but I didn't find that it worked too well.

Wearing the headset for a few hours, I found that the top of my head did ache a little, which isn't a great sign, especially since its weight of 393g isn't all that substantial. My gold standard comfort-wise remains SteelSeries' suspended headband system, and this falls quite a way short of that, even if it looks really slick.

The Stealth Pro II comes with a base station that holds a battery on standby to swap out when your headset runs low. Swapping them is fairly easy, and you get around 40 hours from each. It's a great system, cribbed shamelessly from SteelSeries, and means you never really need to think about charging.

That base station connects to your console or PC by a USB cable, but curiously, this is where Turtle Beach takes a new approach. Rather than having multiple wired inputs that you can swap between to manage more than one device, you instead get another, traditional and small USB dongle in the box. This adds a second device to the headset's connection options, and you can swap between devices on the headset itself.

I'll be honest, this system is a mixed bag. In some ways, it can look really flexible since you can have devices that aren't next to each other paired to the same headset. In practice, though, most of my gaming happens at my desk, and this just became a more inconvenient way to swap devices, and with more dongles coming in at £30 / $25, I'm not convinced this is great for most people.

If it would suit your setup, though, it could be a boon instead of a detriment – that's going to be a personal situation. What's more universally solid is the audio suite on offer here. The headset uses 60mm drivers to provide its sound, and comes with active noise-cancelling (ANC) to help cocoon you too.

Finally, the headset comes with a hard case for storage and packing, although it's worth knowing that this case is massive. It's flat and has slots for the transmitter, headset, microphone and cables, and that makes it a beast, albeit one that I'm still glad comes at no extra cost.

Sound and Performance

The blend of features that Turtle Beach has stuffed into the Stealth Pro II is quite an interesting one, then, and its redesign is better visually than in comfort terms, but how does the headset perform from a sound and connectivity standpoint?

Well, in terms of gaming immersion and clarity it does very well. I've used the Stealth Pro II in a range of games, from Forza Horizon 6 to Battlefield 6, and have found it an adaptable and reliable performer in all of them. In shooters I've been able to locate footsteps and gunshots easily, while single-player games have been immersive and three-dimensional.

The headset is a little quieter than I'd expected, so you might find yourself dialling it up a bit, but that's not something that matters given its loudness ceiling goes really high. I've also been extremely impressed by its microphone, which is really clear and doesn't suffer from much muffling or fuzziness – an otherwise typical bugbear in the headset world.

Its ANC is also very solid, with a clear difference made if there's background noise (whether it's a washing machine, a roommate, or traffic noise). Similarly, connectivity has been rock-solid, and when I've been connected to the main transmitter it's been exemplary, with a range that can easily stretch to a few rooms' distance if you need.

That said, the nature of the connection system that Turtle Beach has designed does mean that it's less immediately flexible than something like the SteelSeries Arctis Nova Omni, but it's similarly easy to customise the Stealth Pro II. On PC the Swarm 2 software is slick and simple, while console gamers can use a mobile app when connected to their phone by Bluetooth.

Verdict

The Stealth Pro 2 is a great step forward for Turtle Beach, showing that the brand can compete in design terms and make sleeker, more modern headsets.

That makes it all the more painful that its design also brings a flaw that holds it back – a headband that I found uncomfortable to wear for more than a couple of hours.

That'll be partly down to my head shape, and I can't know whether others will find it more comfortable, but it makes me feel people should try the headset on if they can before buying it.

Aside from that, though, the sound quality on offer is excellent, the ANC is better than before, and connectivity could be perfect for some disparate gaming setups. That makes the Turtle Beach flagship feel like a winner in many areas.

Also consider

My favourite gaming headset has already got a couple of mentions in this review, and it's the clear upgrade on the Stealth Pro II at the moment – the SteelSeries Arctis Nova Pro Omni. It has all the same features, but I prefer how it handles multi-device swapping, and it's incomparably more comfortable.

Another more comfortable alternative with fewer features but equally excellent sound is the Sony Inzone H9 II. It's almost unbelievably light and has great precision, while stripping things back for a simpler experience.

As T3’s Home Editor, I’ve tested many different kitchen appliances over the years, but one that I try to avoid testing if I can is the (not so) humble air fryer. Before you all collectively gasp at your screens, I’m not the problem here – it’s my husband. He loathes air fryers, so as soon as I’ve tested an air fryer, I tend to give them away to a friend or family member who will use and appreciate them more.

But sadly for him, the day has come that I won’t be parting with an appliance, and we’re officially an air fryer household now. The air fryer that won me over? It’s the Tower AIRX AI air fryer.

A new launch from Tower, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer came out in late 2025, and as you can see by its product name, it uses AI technology and sensors to cook your food. Now, for me, the jury is still out over whether an air fryer needs AI but I loved using the Tower AIRX AI air fryer, and it’s now my go-to appliance for quick and easy cooking – here’s why.

Tower AIRX AI air fryer review: price and availability

The Tower AIRX AI air fryer is available to buy for £99.99 at Tower and select retailers, like Amazon, Boots and Dunelm. It comes in one colour, and with a removable grill plate. If you buy it at Tower, you can get a three year warranty on the Tower AIRX AI air fryer.

Tower AIRX AI air fryer review: design and features

The Tower AIRX AI air fryer is a single basket air fryer and has a streamlined design so it takes up minimal space in your kitchen. Despite being a single air fryer, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer has a generous capacity of eight litres, and the accompanying grill plate can divide up the drawer so you can cook in extra layers.

Tower uses Vortx technology for its air fryers, and the Tower AIRX AI air fryer is no exception. Powered by an 1500W motor, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer rapidly circulates hot air around food to cook up to 30% faster than an oven and reaches up to 200°C. It also cooks using little to no oil to make healthier meals.

Speaking of technology, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer is the first model from the brand to use AI technology. Inside the air fryer is a sensor that analyses the volume and heat of food within the basket, and calculates the right cooking time and temperature for your meal.

The Tower AIRX AI air fryer can be used both manually and automatically. It has six pre-sets to choose from – fries, steak, wings, prawns, fish and cupcake. All of this can be selected and customised via the HD TFT touchscreen display that sits at the top of the air fryer.

Tower AIRX AI air fryer review: performance

Visually, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer is great to look at. I don’t have a huge amount of countertop space in my kitchen, but the Tower AIRX AI air fryer took up hardly any room. The touchscreen is definitely a winner, as it’s organised neatly for each pre-set, and its manual controls are easy to use. It’s extremely clear and responsive, although at times, I had to press down hard to adjust the temperature.

I was slightly confused by the pre-sets on offer. I know that people tend to cook everything in their air fryer nowadays, but having cupcake and wings pre-sets over chicken and vegetables was surprising to me, as these are the most common foods to be cooked in an air fryer. I’d never normally cook steak in an air fryer either, but the steak pre-set worked nicely. It cooked well on the outside and gave it that nice char texture, and the inside was less cooked to retain that moisture and rawness, which I found impressive.

Other foods I used the Tower AIRX AI air fryer to cook were chicken, meatballs, bacon and vegetables. I really liked how the Tower AIRX AI air fryer cooked meat. For chicken, it didn’t dry it out and gave it a nice crust on the outside. I felt that it could make food a bit crispier but the results were still tasty and texturally pleasing.

I found the Tower AIRX AI air fryer to work exceptionally well without any oil. I’ve found with other air fryers a little oil is needed to avoid sticking but the Tower AIRX AI air fryer didn’t have an issue with this at all. It also handled marinated or saucy foods well, and while some sauces did stick to the bottom, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer was quick and easy to clean without any scrubbing or soaking involved.

My main issue with the Tower AIRX AI air fryer was its noise. While it cooked, it made hardly any noise but the beeping when it finished was incredibly loud and annoying. I also found that a shake reminder wasn’t available unless you’d selected a pre-set and I would have liked to have had that for the manual controls.

Tower AIRX AI air fryer review: verdict

For ease, speed and delicious results, I couldn’t recommend the Tower AIRX AI air fryer more. As dual baskets have taken over the air fryer space, the Tower AIRX AI air fryer shows that a single air fryer can be just as good, if not better, plus its eight litre capacity and additional grill plate makes more than enough food for everyone.

The design of the Tower AIRX AI air fryer is attractive and versatile, and is compact enough to sit in any sized kitchen. I can’t fault the cooking results either, and the clean-up was simple. At £99.99, I can ignore the beeping and the strange pre-sets, as the Tower AIRX AI air fryer is excellent value for money.

My verdict on whether you need AI in an air fryer is that I honestly don’t know. I didn’t really notice a difference between an AI air fryer and a non-AI air fryer, so I couldn’t tell you if it was needed.

Tower AIRX AI air fryer review: alternatives to consider

If it’s a single air fryer you’re after, the Instant Vortex Air Fryer is similar to the Tower AIRX AI air fryer in terms of looks and features. It’s easy to use, cooks food fast and has one-touch controls and a dial for easy customisation. It’s also got the same price as the Tower AIRX AI air fryer at £99.99.

Another great Philips single basket model is the Philips Air Fryer XXL. It might be a single basket but it’s a big’un with 1.4kg capacity which can feed up to six people. If it’s a larger capacity you want though, I’d actually recommend the Philips 4000 Series which is the brand’s stacked dual basket air fryer option. It might have two big baskets on top of each other, but it’s slim enough to fit comfortably in your kitchen.

I was lucky enough to be in Chamonix last year for the UTMB, which also coincided with the launch of Hoka's then brand-new trail running shoes, the Rocket X Trail.

The trainers made a lasting impression on me, which is why I ended up using them afterwards. The combination of speed and cushioning makes the Rocket X Trail an excellent option for my local trails, which are pretty flat and less technical.

This is not to say Hoka's speedy trail runners are for training only. If anything, the Rocket X Trail is best for tempo training and racing. And it's likely people will use them for their purpose, given the hefty price tag.

Should you get one? Let's find out.

Hoka Rocket X Trail review

Price and availability

The Hoka Rocket X Trail was launched in August 2025 and is available to buy now at Hoka UK, Hoka US and Hoka EU for the recommended retail price of £185 / $250 / €225 (~AU$367).

That puts it in direct competition with other high-end trail racers, including the Nike Ultrafly, Adidas Terrex Agravic Speed Ultra and Hoka's own Tecton X 3.

This isn't a shoe aimed at casual runners or weekend dog walkers. It's designed for athletes chasing personal bests in trail races, ultras and fast-paced adventures.

Specifications

• Weight: 297g / 10.5lb (men's UK11 / US11.5D)
• Drop: 6mm
• Lugs: 3mm
• Midsole: A-TPU Superfoam
• Plate: H-shaped parallel carbon-fibre plate
• Outsole: Lightweight zonal rubber (not Vibram Megagrip)
• Best for: Trail racing, gravel roads, runnable terrain

Design and fit

While most trail racers still borrow heavily from mountain shoes, Hoka has taken the opposite approach here. The Rocket X Trail feels much closer to a road super shoe adapted for dirt roads, gravel paths, and fast-flowing trails.

At just 297g / 10.5lb (men's UK11 / US11.5D), it's impressively lightweight for an off-road shoe. The silhouette is sleek and aggressive, with a pronounced rocker that immediately hints at its racing intentions.

Hoka pairs an A-TPU Superfoam midsole with an H-shaped carbon-fibre plate, creating a platform designed to maximise energy return while keeping weight to a minimum.

The lightweight engineered mesh follows the same philosophy, keeping things airy and breathable, while the stretch vamp is designed to accommodate foot splay as your feet expand.

The tongue is deliberately minimal, helping shave unnecessary grams without compromising comfort. Combined with the secure midfoot lockdown, the Rocket X Trail feels race-ready from the moment you lace it up.

Underfoot, Hoka has opted for a lightweight zonal rubber outsole with shallow 3mm lugs. It's optimised for the sort of surfaces where runners can really open up the throttle: gravel roads, hard-packed trails and smooth singletrack.

Fit is true to size, and I found there was enough room in the toe box to stay comfortable on longer runs without sacrificing the precise feel you'd want in a racing shoe.

The overall package feels more streamlined and performance-focused than the Speedgoat or Mafate lines, which is exactly what I'd expect from a shoe carrying the Rocket X name.

Performance

Within the first few miles in Chamonix, it became obvious that Hoka wasn't trying to build a do-it-all trail shoe. If your local trails consist of gravel roads, compact dirt paths and flowing singletrack, the Rocket X Trail feels right at home.

The combination of the A-TPU Superfoam midsole and H-shaped carbon-fibre plate delivers a level of responsiveness that's rare in trail running, with every ride feeling energetic. At the same time, the aggressive rocker helps maintain momentum, particularly when running at tempo pace or pushing hard during races.

In many ways, the experience is closer to wearing a road super shoe than a traditional trail runner. The Rocket X Trail encourages you to pick up the pace and rewards efficient running, and on long stretches of gravel and hard-packed trail, I often found myself running faster than intended simply because the shoe made it feel effortless.

The lightweight zonal rubber outsole provides plenty of traction on dry dirt, gravel and compact trails, while also coping just about well enough in damp conditions.

The shallow 3mm lugs strike a sensible balance between grip and efficiency, helping keep weight down without leaving you feeling under-equipped.

The Rocket X Trail becomes less convincing as the terrain becomes more technical, such as rocky descents, muddy sections and uneven ground.

What impressed me most was how well the Rocket X Trail maintained its performance over longer distances. Lightweight race shoes can often feel brilliant for an hour, but Hoka has managed to balance speed and comfort remarkably well.

Verdict

With the Rocket X Trail, Hoka has created a specialist racer for runners who prioritise speed on runnable terrain. Gravel roads, buff singletrack and fast trail races are where this shoe truly shines.

The combination of the lightweight construction, energetic A-TPU Superfoam midsole and carbon-fibre plate creates a ride that feels remarkably efficient.

Few trail shoes encourage pace quite as enthusiastically as the Rocket X Trail, and fewer still manage to do so while remaining comfortable over longer distances.

If you're targeting a trail marathon, a gravel race, or any event where maintaining speed matters more than navigating rocky mountain passes, the Rocket X Trail is a compelling option, as it captures the magic of a road super shoe while delivering enough grip and protection for fast off-road adventures.

Also consider

If the Rocket X Trail feels a little too specialised, the Hoka Speedgoat 6 is the safer bet. Hoka's trail-running workhorse offers better value, more grip and greater versatility across a wider range of terrain. It lacks the explosive propulsion of the Rocket X Trail but makes up for it with comfort, durability and everyday usability.

The Rocket X Trail thrives on fast, runnable terrain, but I'd reach for the Brooks Cascadia 19 when the trails become more technical. Brooks' latest mountain-ready shoe offers a more stable platform, deeper traction and superior control on rocky, uneven ground. It's heavier and less lively, but far more reassuring when the terrain gets challenging.

Motorola's Edge family of phones is a little complex, with the standard Edge 70 an ultra-slim model to rival the iPhone Air, and the Edge 70 Pro the new Edge flagship model – now that the highest-spec model has been repositioned as the Motorola Signature.

The Edge 70 Fusion – yet another entry in this range – continues to be a mid-range model, packed into a body that's very similar to the Edge 70 Pro mentioned above, but making a few key sacrifices to hit its mid-range price.

There are also two versions of the fusion: one has a smaller battery (5200mAh), while the other has a far larger one (at 7000mAh – as on test here). There's only a £10 difference in price, so it's a no-brainer to pick the biggie.

Price & Availability

The Motorola Edge 70 Fusion (7000mAh) is available now from a wide range of retailers, with an RRP of £379.99 for the 8/256GB config – which is the only option available. It's not currently available in the USA, but retails at €439.99 in Europe.

At the time of writing it is discounted to £329.99 in the UK, with free Moto Buds Loop included, worth an extra £129.99. That's a sweet deal.

Motorola Edge 70 Fusion vs Edge 60 Fusion: What's new?

• Big battery option
• Switch from MediaTek to Qualcomm
• Main camera sensor updated
• Display is brighter

At a glance the Edge 60 Fusion and the Edge 70 Fusion offer the same sort of design, just with the annual switch to a different selection of Pantone colourways. The finish and materials are essentially the same.

The big difference is the option for the 7000mAh battery over the 5200mAh battery of the previous generation. That sees the Edge 70 Fusion a little thicker and 15g heavier, but that's easily a trade-off that's worth making.

There's a move from MediaTek hardware to Snapdragon 7s Gen 3, while the display moves to 5200 nits peak brightness (up from 4500 nits) and offers a 144Hz refresh rate (but only when gaming).

Finally, there's a new Sony Lytia 710 sensor for the main camera, which is an incremental change rather than anything hugely meaningful.

Design & Display

• 6.78-inch AMOLED display
  • Corning Gorilla Glass 7i
  • 2772 x 1272 pixel resolution
  • 144Hz maximum refresh rate
• Plastic frame, Nylon or linen inspired back with Pantone colours
  • IP69 protection
  • 193g; 7.95mm thick

Motorola's design feels like it's been set in stone. A textured back, curving towards the edges, meeting a display that curves into the frame too. The highlight of this design is those Pantone colours and the textures, with Motorola doing (almost) everything it can to avoid offering a phone with a glass back in boring colours.

As such, the Edge 70 Fusion is a Nylon or linen effect, meaning it has texture that other phones lack. That brings grip and distinction, leaving the fingerprints to glossy phones like the Samsung Galaxy A57, while coming in Pantone Silhouette (pictured here).

Unfortunately, this big battery version only comes in the one colour, while the 5200mAh version comes in the striking Pantone Orient Blue, Pantone Country Air and Pantone Sporting Green too – all of which are admittedly more exciting.

The camera remains in the top left-hand corner, with what looks like four lenses on display. There's a bit of an aspirational upsell here, because only two are actual cameras.

The 6.78-inch display continues Motorola's trend of throwing everything it can at the screen. The curved edges are a little retro by modern standards. Most rivals are flat, so it's arguably a little dated in design, but the specs certainly are not – especially at this price.

There's high-resolution for detail, with a standard refresh rate that runs up to 120Hz in normal use, while 144Hz is supported in compatible games. There's a really high touch sampling rate for responsiveness, while the brightness is plentiful.

Before we all get excited about that brightness, however, it's worth considering that this only applies to HDR content. That will come through UltraHDR images in Google Photos, but a quick examination of Netflix revealed no content listed with HDR support.

With that said, the display on the Edge 70 Fusion is nice and rich with great colours, so content, in general, looks really good. You might not think this is a mid-range phone as a result.

Performance & Battery

• Qualcomm Snapdragon 7s Gen 3
• 7000mAh battery, 68W wired charging

Mid-range phones are potentially a bigger battleground than flagship models right now, because there are variations in pricing and the hardware you'll get. For example, the Nothing Phone (4a) uses Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 at around the same price, while Motorola is using hardware that's a generation older.

It has also shifted from MediaTek Dimensity used in the previous model, but the important point here is that the Snapdragon 7 series hardware performs really well. There's little that marks it out as mid-range in daily use, if you make one important settings tweak.

The shortcoming of Edge 70 Fusion is that it's limited to 8GB RAM. It offers a RAM extension option by utilising some of the storage (which is off by default), but I set this to the max, adding 12GB, which seemed to improve the overall performance.

I've used the Edge 70 Fusion for a full range of apps and tasks and it's just been smooth sailing, with the only performance issues I'd call out related to the connectivity. While testing, I found it had a tendency to drop off Wi-Fi for no discernible reason, while it also disconnected a number of calls unexpectedly.

I found that playing intensive matches of Call of Duty Mobile was rewarding enough, and while it won't match flagship devices it still made for a great experience – with only the curves of the display letting the side down for gamers.

The battery life is stellar, though. This is a hugely capacious battery and, as a result, I found the phone would last through two days easily. Finding that your device is still in the high 90% range after lunch never gets boring, so I was happy to not even charge it every night.

When plugged in, it will support 68W charging. This isn't the fastest that Motorola offers – the Signature supports 90W charging – but it's still faster than most of the big brands. There's no wireless charging support though, which isn't a surprise.

Camera Performance

• Double rear camera:
  • Main: 50-megapixels, f/1.8 aperture, Sony Lytia 710, autofocus (AF), stabilisation (OIS)
  • Ultrawide: 13-megapixels, f/2.2
• Front: 32-megapixels, f/2.2

Aside from the battery, Motorola pushes the main camera experience as the focus for this device. Packing in 50-megapixels with an f/1.8 aperture, it's a typical setup for this type of phone, aided by a 13-megapixel ultrawide lens in support.

There's no zoom camera on this phone, though, instead leaning on sensor-cropping to provide 2x zoom – with digital zoom out to 10x, by which point the photos are mush, so best avoided.

Meanwhile, the ultrawide powers the 0.5x photos, as well as the close-up macro feature, benefitting from the f/2.2 aperture for a wider depth of field than the main camera (so more appears in focus – unless you're particularly close to subject).

The main camera puts up a good performance in most conditions offering bright and colourful images. There's a choice of styles, including one you can customise, which uses AI to pick a tone you prefer. Staying true to the actual scene doesn't seem to be the consideration – just getting good-looking results is.

The low-light performance is average, but images look reasonable when using the night mode – not that it can hold a candle to the Google Pixel 10a.

The ultrawide is thankfully pretty good, with a colour tone that's close to the main camera, although I found it could be a little inconsistent. There's noticeable chromatic aberation on the ultrawide (with purple lines along contrasty edges, for example), but otherwise it's good for this price – which is a rarity.

Moving to the front camera and you'll be able to snap reasonable selfies. However, I found that it overexposes in brighter conditions, leaving some highlights blown out. There's a useful Portrait mode, but it turns on face smoothing by default, so it's worth tapping that back off if you want to look like, well, you. The edge detection is a little woolly, too, blurring the edge between subject and background and lacking precision.

In terms of video, there's Motorola's clever horizon lock feature (which limits capture to 1080p), but it downgrades the quality fairly substantially. It's a shame, because it's really effective as a feature, but the results just aren't good enough – especially when in dim conditions. Stick to the 4K capture to get the best results.

Software & AI

• Android 16 with Hello UI
  • 3 years OS updates, 5 years security updates

If you've been keeping up with Motorola's devices over the past year, you'll know that the company has made a big step towards owning the software experience through its Hello UI interface. While previous Motorola phones were praised for being close to stock Android – that being Google's baseline operating system – that's now less the case.

The cause of that is the injection of artificial intelligence (AI) features. Google's own AI services (through Gemini) don't seem to be enough for Motorola, with the addition of Moto AI that turns to Perplexity, CoPilot and Gemini to provide its answers. You have to login to access it, however, which is where it feels like Motorola gatekeeping the experience to a certain extent.

I'm not opposed to the AI, per se, but am the implementation here. There's a universal AI search now sitting in the apps tray, so you might think you're just going to search for an app, but you're entering a multi-functional search space instead, which is messy and a big diversion from the Android norm. I've found Moto AI to generally be slower than using a straight Gemini for general AI interactions.

Changes to the apps tray also come in the form of a newsfeed (which you can switch off), while the lockscreen also wants to serve up "content" (which can also be switched off

This layers into a device that prompts you into installing bloatware through the setup process, with some preinstalled apps unavoidable, yet uninstallable. For the seasoned Android owner, most of these things can be stepped around, but if you're less familiar with smartphones, don't just say yes to everything.

Step away from that and the Moto Edge 70 Fusion runs Android 16 out of the box, but only offers 3 years of software updates. The sting is taken out of this by the 5 years of security updates that are offered, which is average for a mid-range device, but can't match the Pixel 10a (7 years), or the Samsung Galaxy A57 (6 years) for longevity.

Motorola Edge 70 Fusion review: Verdict

Motorola's Fusion model has always been about value for money. In this case, it's also about bona fide battery life – and I'd ensure you only consider buying the 7000mAh model in particular for excellent performance.

The Edge Fusion 70 is the sort of phone that will get you through a weekend (or the longest night out of your life) without a charger. That's a rare thing indeed, marking this handset apart from its core competition.

The hardware positions this phone as a mid-range device, but there's plenty enough power to keep it ticking along, for a smooth day-to-day experience. That's hampered slightly by some of Motorola's software additions, but with some effort you can turn most of those off.

Overall, then, Motorola's Edge Fusion 70 delivers some big wins from its huge battery, decent screen, and workable camera duo. There are some nitpicks, but you'll largely forget about those thanks to how long it lasts per charge – which is the real appeal.

Also Consider

The best phone in this category is the Google Pixel 10a, which has a better user experience with cleaner software and longer support. It also offers a better overall camera experience, although the battery is nowhere near as impressive and the smaller screen can't compete – especially considering the price difference.

The mainstream Android alternative is the Samsung Galaxy A57, which offers One UI with longer software support, but otherwise matches the Motorola on the specs fairly closely – except for the Motorola's massive battery upsell, of course.

Outdoor security cameras tend to excel at watching one thing. Your front door. A driveway. The side gate. However, what if you want to cover more – much more – without plastering your property in multiple cameras?

Enter the Reolink TrackFlex Floodlight WiFi – one of the few smart cameras I've tested that’s actually up to the task of replacing multiple fixed-position cameras. Thanks to its combination of pan-and-tilt tracking, dual cameras and wide-area motion detection, it can monitor far more of your property from a single mounting position.

After living with it for a few weeks, it became clear that its biggest strength isn't any individual feature. It's the fact that one camera can comfortably cover areas that would normally require two or three.

Is that enough for it to deserve a spot on your wall? Let’s find out.

Price and availability

At the time of writing, the Reolink TrackFlex Floodlight WiFi has an RRP of £239.99 directly from Reolink, and it's also available through Amazon.

That places it firmly in competition with premium outdoor security cameras from Eufy, Ring and Arlo. However, once you factor in the dual-camera design, motorised pan-and-tilt functionality, AI search, and the lack of a mandatory subscription, it starts to look like strong value for money.

Installation and set up

I had the TrackFlex professionally installed by an electrician, largely because my DIY skills are best described as enthusiastic rather than competent.

The camera was mounted on the side of the house above our front side gate. This position allows it to cover the front of the property, our driveway and cars, while also being able to rotate and monitor the side of the house, access route to the garden, recycling area and even an upstairs cat flap that exits onto what used to be the barn stairs before the property was converted.

The installation itself was straightforward. Wiring was routed through the wall into our living room and connected to a plug socket, creating a neat and tidy finish. While experienced DIYers should have little trouble fitting it themselves, professional installation was entirely hassle-free.

Once powered on, setup through the Reolink app was refreshingly simple. Pairing was quick, Wi-Fi connectivity was reliable, and I encountered no issues getting the camera online.

Design and features

The TrackFlex is a substantial bit of kit. Between the dual floodlights, triple PIR (Passive Infrared) sensors and motorised camera assembly, it's noticeably bulkier than many fixed-position rivals.

That said, it looks smart. The black and white finish feels modern and well considered, while build quality is excellent throughout. Everything feels solid and reassuringly premium, with none of the creaks or flimsy plastic that can sometimes undermine cheaper security cameras.

It's not the sort of device that disappears into the background, but that's arguably part of the appeal. A visible security camera can be a deterrent in itself, and the TrackFlex manages to look purposeful without becoming an eyesore.

The headline feature is its dual-camera setup. One lens provides the main 4K wide-angle view, while the second telephoto lens delivers a closer crop for pulling extra detail from faces, vehicles and other subjects. Rather than relying on digital zoom, the TrackFlex can switch to a dedicated zoomed view, allowing it to retain more detail when focusing on faces, vehicles and other points of interest.

The camera can pan almost a full 360 degrees and tilt vertically to follow activity around your property. Supporting that movement are three PIR sensors positioned across the front of the unit. Rather than only detecting motion directly in front of the camera, they can also pick up activity approaching from either side and prompt the camera to rotate and investigate.

Storage is refreshingly flexible too. Those who prefer to keep everything local can record directly to a microSD card of up to 512GB, while Reolink also offers cloud storage and compatibility with its Home Hub ecosystem. Importantly, none of the camera's headline features are locked behind a mandatory subscription.

Other features include Wi-Fi 6 connectivity, AI-powered video search, two-way audio, Alexa and Google Assistant support, a built-in siren, colour night vision, IP66 weather resistance and floodlights with adjustable brightness and colour temperature.

Performance

The first thing that struck me after installation wasn't the floodlights or the tracking features – it was the sheer amount of coverage.

Mounted above the side gate, the TrackFlex could see the front of the house, our driveway and cars, while also rotating to monitor the side of the property, the route to the garden and even an upstairs cat flap that leads out on to the old barn stairs. Most cameras would have forced me to prioritise one of those areas. The TrackFlex didn't.

Fire open the app, and the wide field of view immediately impresses, with image quality looking crisp and detailed. Even zoomed-in footage remains sharp, helping justify the dual-camera approach.

As an end-of-terrace property with access running along the side of the house, this extra coverage provides genuine peace of mind. Rather than faffing around installing multiple cameras, the TrackFlex lets me keep tabs on several key areas from a single mounting position.

Coverage aside, I’m also happy to report that tracking also works exactly as intended. The camera reliably follows movement, and the combination of pan-and-tilt movement and wide PIR coverage made it feel useful rather than a gimmick – especially when it comes to more challenging use cases like keeping tabs on our cat’s comings and goings while we were away.

Those PIR sensors, by the way, are one of the standout features. Traditional pan-and-tilt cameras can only see what's currently in front of them, but the TrackFlex's side-mounted sensors can detect activity approaching from outside the camera's current viewing direction. In practice, that means somebody approaching from an angle is less likely to slip past unnoticed simply because the camera happened to be looking elsewhere. Instead, it detects movement off-camera, then pans around to cover it.

Away from home, the whole thing makes for a very reassuring setup, letting me remotely move the camera and check different areas of the property whenever I fancy. During testing, building works were taking place on the road outside, so it was useful being able to quickly check on the front of the house, driveway and parked cars remotely.

While manually operating a camera like a top secret security operative is fun though, there are plenty of automatic motion detection options available, letting you setup and customise alerts – aka, the things you want to be made aware of, like cars, people or animals.

Given the amount of cars that drive past, I turned car detection alerts off, but the animal detection came in very handy on holiday. This meant I could see that my cat was entering and leaving the house as normal, doing whatever it is that he does all day (read: likely terrorising the other cats).

Elsewhere, image quality itself is excellent, both in the day, and at night. The 4K main camera captures plenty of detail, and footage remained consistently sharp throughout testing. Whether I was checking on parked cars at the front of the house or zooming in on activity around the side gate, there was rarely any doubt about what I was looking at, and number plates are also clearly legible, even after zooming.

Infrared mode provides clear black-and-white footage after dark, while the integrated floodlights unlock colour night vision when enabled. With them enabled, recordings retain colour information that would otherwise be lost, making it easier to distinguish things like clothing colours and vehicle details.

The second telephoto lens also proves its worth. Unlike cameras that simply crop into a digital image, the TrackFlex can switch to a dedicated zoomed view that preserves much more detail. Faces remain recognisable at greater distances, while vehicles and number plates are easier to identify than they would be with a conventional single-lens security camera.

When you open the app, the default view shows both the zoomed out and zoomed in feeds. I came to prefer one regular overview feed, with the option to simply zoom in if I wanted to check out anything in more detail, but hey, it’s nice to have options.

The floodlights are also among the most configurable I've used. Along with adjusting brightness, you can tweak colour temperature and configure different lighting behaviours depending on how you want the camera to operate.

I eventually dialled things back slightly because I wasn't entirely convinced the neighbours appreciated being illuminated every time somebody walked past the house, but it's easy to fine-tune exactly when the lights activate and how long they stay on.

The Reolink app deserves praise, as well. It's packed with options but remains approachable, making it easy to adjust detection zones, alert preferences and tracking behaviour. There is a slight delay when manually panning the camera remotely, but that's hardly surprising for an internet-connected device and never impacted day-to-day use.

I also used the camera with our Echo Show 10, asking Alexa to display the side gate reliably brings up the live feed, making it easy to quickly check outside without reaching for my phone.

Storage is another area where Reolink gets things right. Those who prefer everything stored locally can use a microSD card, while cloud storage is available for users who want off-site backups and easier access to recordings. I used a microSD card for local recording and never felt any need to subscribe to a cloud service.

Given how many products now require yet another monthly payment to unlock core functionality, Reolink's approach earns significant brownie points. The fact it's hardwired is another benefit. While battery-powered cameras are often easier to install, there's something reassuring about never having to worry about charging schedules or finding the camera offline because the battery has run flat.

AI-powered search is another useful addition. If you've ever trawled through hours of footage looking for a specific event, you'll certainly appreciate it. Rather than manually scrolling through recordings, the system can identify and categorise subjects like people, vehicles and animals, making it much easier to locate the clip you're actually looking for.

Verdict

If you only need to monitor a single doorway or a narrow section of driveway, there are cheaper cameras available. With that said, the Reolink TrackFlex Floodlight WiFi makes the most sense for people who want broad coverage without installing multiple cameras, and this was its biggest strength throughout my testing.

One installation point gave me visibility of the front of the house, driveway, side gate, garden access route and cat flap, all while providing reliable alerts and the ability to remotely check different areas whenever I wanted.

After researching the competition, what impressed me most is just how few cameras actually offer this combination of dual cameras, floodlights, pan-and-tilt tracking and subscription-free local storage in a single product.

Having lived with it for two weeks, what stands out isn't any individual feature. It's how effectively all of those features work together. Add in excellent image quality, bright and highly configurable floodlights, useful AI search, local storage and no mandatory subscription fees, and you've got one of the most capable outdoor security cameras currently available.

Alternatives to consider

The Eufy Floodlight Camera E340 is the closest direct rival. Like the TrackFlex, it combines dual cameras, pan-and-tilt functionality, local storage and subject tracking in a hardwired floodlight design. If you're already invested in Eufy's ecosystem, it's the most obvious alternative.

The Eufy SoloCam S340 is a great option if you want similar dual-camera flexibility without running power cables. Its solar-powered design makes installation much easier, although it can't match the TrackFlex's floodlight performance or continuous power supply.

TP-Link's Tapo C545D is the value choice. It adopts a similar dual-view concept and motorised tracking system at a significantly lower price, making it worth considering if your budget won't stretch to Reolink's flagship model.

Sennheiser made some of my favourite headphones ever when it brought out the Momentum 4 Wireless. It updated what I'd personally found to be an off-putting design in the originals, yet retained its excellent yet neutral sound signature – with the addition of adaptive noise-cancelling (ANC). I've used those over-ears every time I've travelled for a couple of years (save for when testing the best headphones for work).

That position had recently been taken over by the Sony WH-1000XM6, though, so I was hugely interested when Sennheiser announced the Momentum 5 this summer. With the brand's long-term health a topic of some debate, I've found it fascinating to use the Momentum 5 for a few weeks to see how it stacks up to the ever-increasing competition.

Price and Availabilty

The Momentum 5 Wireless was unveiled in May and is available to order now, so you can pick it up from a range of retailers around the world. It comes in at £329 / $399 – which means that it's quite cannily priced from Sennheiser's point of view.

While it shares a lot of its features with the likes of the Sony WH-1000XM6, and the same can be said of Bose QuietComfort Ultra Headphones 2, it comes in as a decent chunk cheaper than those competitors. That could give it quite an advantage among smart buyers, although the proof is obviously in the performance.

Design and Features

There are people out there who'll still tell you that the updated design Sennheiser brought in between the Momentum 3 and Momentum 4 was a total shame, and left the Momentum line looking generic and boring. I get where they're coming from (there's much less exposed metal now), but don't agree at all – I really like the refined and subtle look of the newer design.

That's lucky, since it's barely changed between 4 and 5, which suggests that Sennheiser was pleased with its work, too. In the years that have passed, all that's really changed is some minor finishing detail. This time you can buy the headphones in black (as tested here), white or "denim" blue, with the last of those being the most eye-catching (albeit not really to my taste).

The earcups here are pretty massive, yet they're nicely cushioned for comfort. The Momentum 5 comes in at 290g, so it isn't the lightest set of cans out there – but I find they sit on the head nicely and comfortably. That's something about Sennheiser's design that's always been on point for me.

The build is almost entirely plastic, though, so if you're looking for some headphones that scream "premium" from every stitch and bolt, this isn't the answer for you. Then again, nor is the more expensive WH-1000XM6 from Sony, for some context (the WH-1000XX The Collexion push that envelope further, though).

Normally, I'd talk about on-earcup controls, since most headphones have an array of buttons and dials, but Sennheiser takes a different road. In design terms, it keeps things admirably simple – even if not everyone will like it.

On the right earcup, there's a power and pairing button, some LEDs to give you charge and status indicators, and a USB-C port for charging. That's it – everything else is controlled through swipes and taps on that same earcup's outer surface, while the other side is completely bare.

The Momentum 5 does come with a nice slim hardshell case, impressively smaller than the equivalent for the Momentum 4, and therefore great for travel. The headphones fold flat in it, rather than into any smaller arrangement.

From a feature point of view, the battery life situation has stayed relatively stable, but at a very impressive level. You'll get around 57 hours with ANC turned on, which means the headphones can more than make it through a week of use in normal situations. One huge but less obvious upgrade is that said battery can be easily replaced, with just a Philips-head screwdriver needed to access it.

There's also fairly comprehensive codec support (SBC, AAC, aptX, aptX HD, aptX Lossless, and aptX Adaptive), which means that LDAC is also covered, making these a great choice regardless of how you listen wirelessly. The headphones ship with Bluetooth 5.4, but a future firmware update will bring this up to 6.0, apparently.

I think the Momentum 5 is a really solid iteration on what's come before it – even if the only visible or obvious changes are some more external grilles for ANC microphones. They're still among my favourite headphones to wear from a subtlety standpoint, as much as I value crazier choices like the Nothing Headphone (1).

Sound and Performance

We don't just look at headphones and wear them without any connection, though – how the Momentum 5 actually sounds is just as important.

That does require starting with some ergonomics, though, because Sennheiser's touch controls are a factor in the headphones' performance. In short, they work ably, but I'd still much prefer some more buttons in addition. Swiping and tapping are responsive enough, once you learn what does what, but the lack of volume buttons in particular feels churlish.

Sennheiser's SmartControlPlus app is a smooth enough way to get some extra control over these features (including turning them off entirely if desired). It also lets you choose when (if ever) the headphones will turn themselves off after a period of idling, and gives you a decent amount of EQ control, too.

That last point is relevant because the Momentum 5 makes a slightly bigger change to the sound signature of the Momentum line than I'd expected, principally in the form of a boost to the low-end bass register. It's certainly beefed up, and that might cut differently for different people.

I really liked the neutrality of the Momentum 4, so the new sound tuning is a little less to my tastes straight out of the box – albeit a quick EQ tweak basically reverses it entirely (praise be the EQ controls coming to AirPods soon for similar reasons). Still, even before any tweaks, the overall sound quality is excellent.

I used the Momentum 5 to run the gamut of genres, from a little bit of Vivaldi (get me) to test the highs, to some Queens of the Stone Age to get a sense of that boosted bass – and it was a really zesty yet precise listen the whole time. Plus, there's one audio area where the upgrade is far clearer and more unequivocal – ANC.

The Momentum 4 had good ANC for its day, but that day is now years ago, and rivals have made some big steps in the intervening time, so it's reassuring to report that the Momentum 5 takes a welcome leap forward. That's not to say that this adaptive noise-cancelling is completely different from what came before, but it definitely blocks more ambient noise and does so with less of an audible static feedback, in my experience.

I used the Momentum 5 on a long trip to and from Edinburgh from my home in London as my first proper stress test of their quality, and they kept me really nicely bubbled whether I was connected to my phone or my Switch 2. This combination of really solid sound quality and much-improved ANC is a winner, in my book.

Verdict

The Momentum 5 feels like a really solid return to the top table from Sennheiser, not least because it continues to offer a sensible option to those looking for very similar features to a top-end pair of headphones, but for a little less. Sure, the asking price is hardly tiny, but it's still a chunk cheaper than much of the established competition.

Given time and sales, that advantage should be maintained, and I think that leaves the Momentum 5 positioned really nicely as a great option for those looking to spend a little more cannily. You'll still get excellent sound, and a design and fit that I personally find comfortable in the extreme – making these over-ears a pretty stellar way for Sennheiser to at least partially silence the doubters of its longer-term health.

Also consider

The obvious upgrade if you are willing to spend that extra cash, of course, is the WH-1000XM6. The Sony's ANC is just a little superior and the headphones' more compact folding options might float your boat too. I think they're in a similar bracket comfort-wise, though, so the gap is pretty small.

Another option is Sennheiser's own HDB 630, which is much more geared for home listening. You lose ANC and battery life, but gain in sound quality quite noticeably, especially when using the included dongle for your connections. If you're intending to do your listening at home, they might be a great choice.

Fellow's one of those brands that has really only just made a name for itself in the last few years. It's a brand based out of the US that's designing some of the most cutting-edge coffee tech we've seen in the industry to date, and the Espresso Series 1, is its first debut on a fully fledged coffee bar, and I'll tell you right now, for the price, it is outstandingly good.

The Fellow Espresso Series 1 coffee machine has been designed in part with ex-barista champions and all manner of technical experts and delivers extraordinary espresso, through and through. It's a difficult product to review because there are so few negatives to be said about it. That's not to say it's perfect; there is the odd hiccup here and there, but overall, what you're getting for the price, it's well worth living with and it's easily one of the best espresso machines money can buy.

Fellow Espresso Series 1 review: Price and availability

As of June 2026, you can pick up an Espresso Series 1 in the US for around $1,499 from Fellow directly. Alternatively, you can also grab one on pre-order in the UK for about the same price from Origin as well. Although availability is still limited at this time.

There's all manner of different finishes as well. You can pick up the Cherry Red & Walnut version we have here, but Fellow will also sell you a black version, along with malted chocolate & maple, a woodland green and walnut, sesame white and maple, a marine blue and walnut.

Fellow Espresso Series 1 review: Design and build

I'm going to sound like a broken record for much of this, but the overall build is exemplary. The unboxing experience isn't anything too special, but once you get the Series 1 out of its packaging, that's when you really get to appreciate it. The chrome-plated group head, the walnut handle, the bold fellow logo lovingly etched into everything. Even the steam wand looks good. The finish, too, with that gloss metal body, is just lush.

The group handle itself is a hefty wooden unit, with a naked bottomless portafilter, meaning your espresso prep needs to be on point to avoid any mess (perhaps my only gripe is that they don't include a full metal dual-spout portafilter as well). The basket is the industry standard 58mm design, but the group handle itself is bespoke to the Series 1, so if you want to swap it out, you'll need to get one that's compatible with the group head design.

Fellow also included a full water hardness kit, used during the first setup (the machine asks you to test your water before proceeding to fill it so it can set its own descaling cycle, with a handy digital indicator and PH test stick). Alongside that, there's also a small milk pitcher included, as well as a wooden tamp as well. The tamp is a little light, but that's mostly an aesthetic grievance (as realistically you're going to be using your body weight, not the tamp, to compact your coffee puck).

Other things to point out. Steam wand? Fully articulating, with a built-in temperature probe. It's got a 2L water reservoir on the right side that's fully removable, and a fairly sizable drip tray too. Oh, and of course, you get a full circular display and control dial, plus three simple buttons on top for quick use as well. Although more on that in a bit.

Fellow Espresso Series 1 review: Performance

It's the display of the Fellow Espresso Series 1 that's half the fun here as well. Once you've finished your setup and you've got the tank full (don't worry, it'll let you know if it's running short, because of course it does), you can then run through all the settings, including the insane amount of espresso logic that's built in here.

You get a whole plethora of different shot profiles as standard, modern-arc, classic, turbo shots, and tonnes more, all fully customizable. You can control pre-infusion times, shot duration, water ratio, temperature to within 0.1 of a degree (thanks to a digital PID), ramp curves, the lot. It's properly deep, and there's even more nerdy settings (in a menu literally called settings for nerds).

Shot analysis too is top tier, with a very simple display that shows you pressure, shot completion percentage, and total time all in a handy little circular panel. It's perfect for dialling in quick too. Switch to steaming milk after you've pulled that perfect shot, and that too is all visible on the display, where you can set what temperature you want, hit go, and then it'll auto-shut off once it reaches that point.

There's just so much going on here, it's radical. It's commercial-grade tech in a machine that costs half as much as it probably should. Combined with a pump that's honestly as silent as the grave. Compared to Gaggia's Classic UP (itself a more than capable machine) I could barely hear it at all, when it was pulling a double.

Fellow Espresso Series 1 review: Verdict

I can't express enough just how impressed I've been with my time with the Espresso Series 1. I've been using it for about two weeks now at the roastery, and it's by far my favourite bar to use in place.

Is it perfect? Well, there's a few things that frustrate me a little. But they're very minor. It's still not quite as heavy as I'd like. That's particularly annoying when you're trying to lock the group handle into position with a fresh puck prepped in it, and the steam wand is very low to the drip tray as well. Which is great if you're ghosting milk (the act of just leaving the steam wand in the jug while it steams and not controlling the pitcher), but less useful if you want to actually control your texturing.

The pucks, too, are a little on the wet side. From my research, this seems to be a result of the solenoid design in the Series 1. But again, it's mostly cosmetic and doesn't impact flavour at all, just the clean-up.

And yet still, if someone came to me, looking to build the ultimate home espresso setup, without breaking the bank, I'd recommend this over practically every other machine out there. Particularly if you've got the budget. Pair it with something like a Niche Zero single-shot zero-retention grinder, and you'll never need to visit a coffee shop ever again.

Fellow Espresso Series 1 review: Alternatives to consider

At this point, there's no use denying just how phenomenal the Espresso Series 1 is, but if you're not keen on all the manual faff involved with pulling your own shots and steaming your milk, but are still looking for a solid alternative, I'd highly recommend you check out Sage's Oracle Dual Boiler. It's a brilliant automatic machine, ideal for those too tired to worry about what the pressure profile is on their latest batch of Ethiopian Gesha.

Alternatively (and to be honest, it's quite a bit cheaper) the Gaggia Classic UP is a redesigned icon that refuses to go down without a fight. At £800, the UP refresh finally brings dual PID to the legendary line-up, and the handy display gives you a good chance of getting the perfect shot dialled in. Is the steam wand as good as the Series 1? No, but it's pretty close, particularly at near half the cost.

The Govee Outdoor UpDown Wall Light brings a splash of colour to your outdoor space, with a huge array of colour and scene options, and a fleet of smart controls that allow you to create the perfect illumination.

Govee makes some of the best smart lights around, and its Outdoor UpDown Wall Light joins a roster of impressive products such as the Govee Ceiling Light, Gaming Pixel Light, Mini Panel Lights and Floor Lamp Pro – so I knew I was in good hands when it came time to test these lights.

I installed them on my own home – one in the garden, and the other on my driveway – to find out how well they perform, and to see whether they hit the same highs as the brand’s other products.

Price and availability

The Govee Outdoor UpDown Wall Light is priced at £229.99/$229.99, although it’s regularly discounted, so shop around before making any purchases. It's available directly from Govee's online store, as well as a range of third party retailers in the US and UK, including Amazon.

You get two UpDown lights in the box, and there's currently no option to purchase a single unit. That means if you're only looking to install an odd number of wall lights, you may end up with one spare.

Govee does offer a cheaper option if your budget doesn’t stretch to the premium UpDown model, with the less feature-packed Outdoor Wall Light costing £169.99/$169.99.

Unboxing and set up

The first thing that struck me when the package arrived was just how heavy it was. Sure, you get two lights in the box, but each has a considerable heft to it.

After carefully lifting the lights out of the box, I discovered each one has an accompanying small plastic bag with the mount and accessories required to install them. A paper quick start guide is included, along with a user manual, combining to offer enough details to get the units physically installed on your walls and setup via the app.

I was fortunate enough to have preexisting, wired exterior lights I could swap out for the Outdoor UpDown lights, meaning there was no need to call an electrician. However, if you don’t already have wiring for exterior lights, you will need to get a professional in to safely run cables to the locations you want to place the lights. There is no battery or solar power option here.

Once you have suitable power cables in place (and you’ve turned the electricity off), installation is very simple. The mounting plate for the lights requires four holes to be drilled into the wall, with four wall plugs and screws included in the box to secure it in place.

It's then a case of connecting the blue neutral and brown phase wires on the rear of the lights to the cables in the wall, using the terminal blocks included in the accessory kit.

For the neatest installation, you’ll also want the cables from the wall to go through the middle of the mount, which hides all wiring from view. If this isn’t possible, there’s a small plastic notch you can remove at the bottom of the rear cavity on the light to allow a wire to run down the wall.

Finally, you slide the light over and down on the mount, locking it in place, and screwing the two together with a couple of small screws on either side of the light. I’m the first to admit I’m not particularly handy when it comes to DIY, but I found the process to be straightforward and easy to complete.

I then turned the power back on at the fuse board, and set up the light via the free Govee Home app (iPhone / Android). The app walks you through connecting the UpDown Wall Light to your home network, and prompting any software updates that might be available.

It typically takes less than a minute, and then you’re ready to start enjoying everything the Outdoor UpDown Wall Light has to offer.

Design and features

In terms of its design, the rectangular light looks almost as if it’s hovering off the wall from some angles. Its black facade hides the illuminating power inside, with lights on the top, bottom and both sides of the unit. It’s a modern looking light, and works well on my new-build property. It’s less likely to aesthetically fit with historic and period homes though.

At the top and bottom of the unit, you'll find RGBWW (Red, Green, Blue, White and Warm White) LEDs capable of changing both colour and white temperature. These lights use a reflector cup design, which helps project light further vertically and creates an enhanced wall-washing effect across areas of up to 12 square metres.

On each side of the light are 17 RGBIC (Red, Green, Blue with Independent Control) LED beads. Unlike traditional RGB lighting, each bead can be controlled individually, allowing different colours to be displayed simultaneously across the same fixture.

Combined with the top and bottom lighting zones, the UpDown Wall Light can create what Govee calls "four-side magic colour", providing dynamic 360-degree illumination around the entire unit.

When it comes to the Govee Home app, there are more than 70 preset lighting scenes available, divided into categories including Natural, Life, Festival and Soothing. It can feel slightly overwhelming at first simply because there are so many options to choose from, but it means there's something for almost every occasion.

For those who prefer more control, the app allows you to adjust brightness up to 1,400 lumens, select custom colours and choose white temperatures between 2,700K and 6,500K. Quick-access colour presets make it easy to switch to simple shades such as white, yellow or blue, while the Subsection menu lets you customise individual sides of the fixture independently, including their brightness, colour and colour temperature.

When I was feeling really creative, I enjoyed the Finger Sketch feature. Here, you can manually assign colours to all 34 RGBIC side LEDs, as well as the top and bottom light zones. Once you've created a design, you can add animated effects such as twinkling or clockwise movement and adjust the speed of those effects to suit the mood.

Govee has also included an AI-powered lighting mode within the app. Using a built-in chatbot, you can describe a scene and have the system generate a matching lighting effect. It's not as sophisticated as tools like ChatGPT or Gemini, but it worked surprisingly well during testing. For example, I asked it to recreate the neon glow of Miami's South Beach at dusk, and it generated a colourful neon-inspired lighting scene. This feels more of a gimmick rather than a useful feature – especially when you consider the sheer volume of presets Govee already has available – but it’s a nice addition for those wanting to flex their creativity further.

Elsewhere, the UpDown Wall Light is designed to withstand life outdoors. It carries an IP66 rating for dust and water resistance, which means it should cope well with heavy rain and challenging weather conditions. That said, Govee still recommends applying silicone sealant between the mounting plate and the wall during installation to help prevent moisture from reaching the wiring behind the fixture.

Smart home support is also included. Once linked to Google Assistant or Amazon Alexa through the Govee app, the lights can be controlled with voice commands. I connected the lights to Google Home without issue, which allowed me to turn them on and off, adjust brightness levels and switch between block colours directly from the Google Home app or with voice commands.

For example, I could simply ask Google to "turn on the garden wall light", "dim the drive wall light to 50%" or "change the garden wall light to blue", and the commands were executed without issue.

There's also support for Govee's optional Outdoor Motion Sensor, which can add motion-activated lighting functionality. Unfortunately, I wasn't provided with the sensor during testing, so I wasn't able to evaluate how well this feature performs in practice.

Performance

In day-to-day use, the UpDown Wall Light delivers exactly what it promises. I found the RGBWW LEDs provided excellent wall-washing effects, while the independently controllable RGBIC side LEDs create striking patterns and colour combinations that stand out far more than standard outdoor wall lights. At maximum brightness, the 1,400-lumen output provides more than enough illumination while still being capable of creating softer ambient lighting when dimmed down.

What impressed me most was the sheer level of control available. Whether I wanted a simple warm white glow for everyday use or a colourful animated display for an evening gathering, the app made it easy to switch between styles. Despite the huge number of options available, the interface remained relatively intuitive once I'd spent a little time exploring it.

The scheduling features also worked well during testing. I set routines for the lights to automatically switch on in the evening and turn off in the morning, providing useful overnight security lighting without any manual input.

One feature I enjoyed, but ultimately found slightly frustrating, was Music Mode. When activated through the Govee app, the lights react to music and pulse in time with the beat. It worked particularly well with tracks such as Metallica's Enter Sandman and Master of Puppets, creating an impressive visual effect.

The problem is that Music Mode only works while the Govee app remains open. As soon as you close the app, switch to another application or simply allow your phone screen to lock, the effect stops. It feels like a missed opportunity, as the feature would be far more useful if it could continue running in the background while you use your phone normally.

Verdict

The Govee Outdoor UpDown Wall Light offers a unique proposition that no other brand currently does. If you’re after modern wall lights with great versatility and 360 degree illumination, look no further.

I really like the range of modes and options available in the app, the ability to seamlessly integrate it with my smart home assistant, and (if you have existing wiring in place) the easy installation.

Sure, the AI feels gimmicky and the music mode could do with an upgrade, and it’s rather frustrating you can’t buy a single UpDown if you want an odd number of lights. However, these don’t detract from the fact the Govee Outdoor UpDown Wall Light delivers fantastic exterior illumination that transforms your outdoor space.

Alternatives to consider

There are plenty of smart outdoor wall lights on the market, but none offer the versatility and lighting sequences of Govee’s Outdoor UpDown Wall Light – putting them in a unique position with no direct rivals.

Philips Hue, another leader in smart lighting, has a range of wall lights, such as the Resonate Outdoor wall light and Dymera indoor and outdoor wall light. While both of these offer the ability to have different colours on their up and down lights, there are no side lights for that 360 degree splash of illumination. They’ll also cost you more than the Govee if you want two of them.

Nanoleaf doesn’t, at time of writing, have wall lights in its outdoor line-up, while the folks over at Wiz have a couple of basic offerings in the Wall Light ELPAS and Wall Light Classic.

In a world with a zillion home speaker options already available, what's the trick to standing out? If you're Bose, then it's down to a couple of factors – with its new Lifestyle Ultra Speaker bringing not only style, but a distinctive additional channel.

The LS Ultra Speaker (as it's known for short) has a built-in upfiring output as part of its arsenal, offering additional height to its soundstage. That's something you won't find in a Sonos Era 100, for example, providing a key point of distinction.

This is a wired-only speaker for the home, however, with Wi-Fi, various casting options, and Bluetooth providing myriad ways to get your music on board. However, it's not a multi-functional moveable device such as the Sonos Play, despite carrying the same asking price.

Does all that equate to enough for the Bose Lifestyle Ultra Speaker to set itself apart from the competition as the ultimate small-scale home speaker? As a solo option it's a compelling choice among its peers, with some caveats, as I'll address in this review.

Price & Availability

You can buy the Bose LS Ultra Speaker right now, with the recommended price set at £299 / $299 / AU$549. That's for either the Black or White Smoke finishes.

There's also a special edition version, called Driftwood Sand, priced at £349 / $349. Which, as the name hints at, adds a real wood base and a marbled sand-colour finish.

If you wind back to when the Sonos Era 100 was launched – more than three years ago at the time of writing – then its original price was £249 / $249 / AU$399. It's since dropped, plus a cheaper 'SL' version has been launched. Nonetheless, Bose is positioned with that core competitor in mind.

The Sonos Play, meanwhile, is like-for-like priced, keeping competition as tough as ever. Brand allegiance – however applicable – may therefore play a big part in your purchase incentive here.

Design & Setup

On the assumption you buy a single, standalone LS Ultra Speaker – I'll cover stereo pairing issues and home theatre successes separately in a section down page – then setting it up is an absolute doddle.

Simply plug in, load up the refreshed Bose app, and you'll get a step-by-step walkthrough. It'll educate you about the on-body controls and how they function, before leaving you to make personalised sound adjustments should you wish.

The on-body controls are a real highlight of this design. Up top – and akin to a smaller version of what you'll find on Bose's LS Ultra Soundbar – is a control 'wheel', which you can spin your finger around to adjust volume, akin to an old iPod control. It doesn't have any moving parts, it's just a nicely recessed, touch-sensitive design.

As an object, I really like this Bose speaker's style. It's well finished, brings a 'floating' material shield to its frontage to add visual interest, while that exposed, round upfiring speaker is clearly visible on the top panel.

There are no flashy displays to distract, with only two LED dots illuminating as required: a (multi-coloured) one to the front, above the protruding Bose logo, to reflect status; another up top to signify whether the microphone is muted – so Alexa can't listen and react. It's pared back nicely.

Sound Quality

For a speaker of such diminutive size – the LS Ultra measures only 12cm wide (although it's not a cylinder, with a 16.7cm depth) – this Bose has a fair stab at audio bigger than its chassis would suggest.

It sits just 18.5cm from a surface – think of that like an adult's palm with fingers casually extended – which is near-identical to the Sonos Era 100. I've been testing the two side-by-side to gain additional context in how the Bose sounds by comparison.

What's very apparent from the off is how the Bose's additional height channel succeeds in projecting sound upwards and outwards, creating this much taller soundstage. This composition really does give the Bose an edge that's a joy – wherever it's set up for you to listen.

Bass delivery is tight and well-shaped, too, which is to its credit. It's not nearly as bass-driven as the Sonos by comparison, but that product has a 'looser' sense to its low-end – as if it's less controlled and more warbly. Which you prefer will be a case of preference, though, noting there's simply less low-end from the Bose.

The Sonos is also inherently louder overall. The Bose isn't quiet, per se, but doesn't deliver quite the same wallop as the Era, as I've found in my A-B testing. Driving the Bose beyond 80% volume and it loses cohesion, too, lacking balanced dynamics when stretched and eventually pushing into distortion.

Keep the Bose within a sensible remit, however, and the overall sound is nicely judged, with attention to detail and decent separation that functions well across multiple genres.

And if you want to make adjustments then there's plenty of tweaking that can be done in the app – from simple bass/mid/treble levels, to a height adjustment, all proving effective.

Stereo Pair – A word of caution

When I first tried out Bose's LS Ultra Speaker, I was impressed by the promise of stereo pairing – which I heard for myself and thought sounded far better than a solo product – and even the brand-agnostic take, meaning you could add multiple non-Bose products into your setup and Cast to them.

Problem is: I can't get any of it to work. The Bose app tells me I have a stereo pair with two LS Ultra Speaker units, but it will only play from one speaker at a time. Casting from various audio sources – Spotify, Soundcloud – fails on repeat. I've hard reset the two products five times, but to no avail. My Wi-Fi connection is excellent – showing a consistent 300Mbps down, 100Mbps up at the site of testing – so that's not to blame.

I'm not the only one suffering issues either. A quick Reddit search shows up plenty of frustrated users who can't get their pairings to function correctly. Some speak of sync/timing issues (which I've not experienced at all). It seems, therefore, there are bugs afoot at the time of writing – and I'd strongly recommend not buying two LS Ultra Speaker units for stereo pairing at this time.

On the flip side of that, I've used my two units in tandem with the excellent LS Ultra Soundbar and LS Ultra Subwoofer, creating a 7.1.4 surround sound system that's worked faultlessly for weeks. That experience, for me, has been a million miles from the stereo pairing frustrations – so I'd wholeheartedly recommend buying for a home theatre setup.

However, I think Bose could address the LS Ultra Speaker's multi-functional use aspect better. When two units are part of a home theatre setup, as shown in the Bose app, you can't simply switch off the rears (well, you can, it's a simple toggle in the app) and then use one elsewhere in your home.

It ought to be more flexible and rapid to adjust from single speaker to stereo to home theatre rears in a flash – even if that feature wasn't used frequently. I, for one, would use a single unit in my office, for example, then move it back into my home theatre setup for one of those special Dolby Atmos movie nights.

Bose Lifestyle Ultra Speaker review: Verdict

Taken from the perspective as a standalone product – as stereo pairing two units has issues in my experience – Bose's Lifestyle Ultra Speaker delivers good looks with well-judged sound.

Its upfiring channel upsell works very well, too, providing a taller and wider soundstage than many a small-scale speaker can muster. Taut bass and a balanced overall mix please, while the app provides an excellent personalisation contorls.

That upfiring output pays dividends if you're going all-out in buying a pair with the LS Ultra Soundbar and LS Ultra Subwoofer – as that home theatre package truly excels. Buy in this format, however, and you're 'locked in' – as the Speaker units effectively become dedicated rears that are too much faff to disconnect and use standalone.

It's impossible to ignore the competition, too. The similarly sized Sonos Era 100 is now far cheaper, delivering a bassier (albeit less controlled) and louder output. The Sonos Play, meanwhile, is priced the same – but doesn't have to be hard-wired to a socket at all times, bringing the versatility that many want.

All in all, then, Bose's Lifestyle Ultra Speaker gets many key components right. It looks stylish. It's got that distinctive upfiring output. The sound is nicely rounded – and easily enhanced further via the app. There's a lot that gives it an edge – but it needs a slightly broader one to really appeal to the masses.

Also Consider

There's been a big rise in powered wireless speakers of late, so don't rule out the Kanto Ren or Ruark MR1 Mk3 products of this world – which are inherently designed to be used in stereo from the off, thus justifying their asking prices.

Otherwise, in the visually like-for-like stakes, there's no denying that Sonos' now older Era 100 will save you some cash yet deliver bigger sound – just minus the upfiring addition that Bose brings to the party.

The Atlas is a first for Secretlab. While it looks similar to its existing line of gaming chairs, this smaller and lighter model is designed for the office – perhaps more specifically, the home office. It’s a chair for those who don’t want the bulk of a gaming chair, but still want something they can sit comfortably in all day.

Back in 2020, as people around the world moved to working from home, sales of gaming chairs went through the roof. Compared to your standard home office chair, gaming chairs offer a more comfortable option, especially when sitting for long periods. After all, they are designed for gamers who could be spending upwards of 12 hours in the chair.

Secretlab has produced some of the best gaming chairs on the market, with its flagship Titan Evo setting the bar for all others. More recently, it offered a new Titan Evo NanoGen edition, featuring new materials for the chair, including soft leatherette and cold-cure foam, for a more comfortable, premium finish that rivalled even the Nappa leather version of the chair.

The downside of gaming chairs is that they tend to be larger and bulkier than your typical office chair. This can make them tough for home use, where users have little spare space. The larger form and often louder colours also often don’t fit with a home office aesthetic. Even for those who might consider a larger leather chair.

This isn’t the first time Secretlab has produced an office chair, though. Back in 2023, it launched the NeueChair, a subbrand of Secretlab that looked much like a regular office chair, complete with mesh upholstery and a high neck support. Though it was very premium, it felt very different from a Secretlab chair.

With the Atlas, Secretlab has taken a very different approach. First of all, this is a true Secretlab product; it carries the Secretlab branding on the back of the chair, the arms and the head pillow. And despite its smaller build, it still looks like a Secretlab chair.

Ahead of the Atlas's launch, I visited Secretlab's headquarters and heard the thinking behind this new office chair. Even the most ergonomic office chairs are designed only to be sat in one position – working – but not everyone works the same way. And what about when you’re thinking, taking a few minutes’ break, or are on a video call?

The Atlas is designed for work but also for rest, so you can sit back and relax, or get comfy while you have to watch the screen. All things that a gaming chair is really good at. It uses a version of its patented cold-cure foam or its premium Nanofoam, with either a softweave fabric or a hybrid leatherette to cover it.

The chair is slimmer and lighter than a Titan Evo, and has a simplified lumbar support, though it does gain a new seat depth adjustment, so that you can properly adjust your position on the chair. In fact, all of the seat controls have been redesigned to make them cleaner and easier to access.

So does the Atlas deliver a new world in terms of office chairs, or task chairs as it’s also called? I’ve been using the chair now for just over a week in place of my regular office chair, and this is what I’ve found.

Price and availability

The Secretlab Atlas comes in two main versions, two finishes and a choice of five colours. The standard model starts from £399 / $499 / €499 (around A$750), this comes in classic black hybrid leatherette, Moon (black and white) hybrid leatherette, cookies and cream (grey and black) SoftWeave, black SoftWeave or Dune SoftWeave (black and cream).

The premium version is denoted with a plus after the name and uses NanoFoam combined with the SoftWeave or the full NanoGen leatherette and foam. This model starts from £599 / $699 / €699 (around A$1130) and comes in Black+ SoftWeave, Dune+ (all-cream) SoftWeave, Pure White+ Nanogen or Pure Black+ Nanogen.

The premium, or plus models are all a single colour, including legs, wheels and adjustment controls, while the standard edition all feature black legs, wheels and adjustment controls.

Setup and installation

The Atlas comes in a relatively large box but still needs some construction before it’s ready to use. The process is simple, though, and can be done by one person in around 20 minutes to half an hour.

There’s a large printed instruction sheet that covers the eight steps, as well as a booklet that repeats the steps and provides usage instructions. There’s even a video tutorial if you get stuck, or prefer to follow along that way.

The tools you need are all in the box, and most sections either just slot together or are held in place using one of the 12 screws supplied. The final step of attaching the magnetic neck pillow is pretty satisfying and means you’re ready to go.

Adjustments

Once you have the chair built and in position, it’s important to set the chair up to your body shape. As an ergonomic office chair, it’s important to ensure that the chair is at the right height for your legs, to keep them at right angles, keeping your feet firmly planted on the ground. That’s why this chair is set 4cm lower than other models.

If you’re coming from a gaming chair, you may find the chair a little low for that reason. At a touch under six feet tall, I needed the chair at full height.

For the first time on a Secretlab chair, there is a seat depth adjustment. This allows you to move the seat plate forward and backwards, helping accommodate either longer or shorter legs. According to the guide, there should only be a small gap of around 5 cm (2 inches) between the edge of the seat and the back of your knee.

For the tilting element of the chair, which is best engaged when relaxing, there are four levels of force adjustment. These are selected by turning the dial in the centre of the adjustment handle on the right and have a powerbar-like display so you can see what setting you have it on.

The manual advises the settings correspond to different weights, with the level one setting being for those under 60kg (132lbs) and the level four setting being for those over 80kg (176lbs). Here again, I needed the maximum setting to get the right level of resistance.

As you lean the chair back, the seat plate also tilts a smaller amount – at a 2:1 ratio – to reduce the strain on your back. The back can also be set by flipping the lever on the left into the locked position while fully upright for working or at four different tilt positions.

The recline on the Atlas is up to 120 degrees, which is less than the Titan Evo, which offers up to 165 degrees for an almost lie-flat feel. However, it’s more than enough for those just wanting to sit back from the screen.

There’s no adjustable lumbar support on the Atlas. Instead, springs have been built into the foam to create a hybrid system and the re-curve S-shape design offering increased support.

There is still adjustment of the armrests, in height, forwards and backwards, and rotationally. The only movement they lack is to move sidewards. They also don’t have the lock button for forward/back and rotation, so the the arms move freely, which can be a little annoying.

There are two sizes of the Atlas chair to correspond to different heights and weights. The regular chair is designed for those under 5’10” (178cm) and less than 100kg (220lbs), while the large chair is for those 5’10” to 6’5” tall (178-195cm) and under 120kg (265lbs).

I was using the large model for the test, though I have tried both sizes and both felt comfortable for me. I do suspect anyone much taller and heavier may not get on as well, as I had both the force resistance and chair height at their maximum (due to a tall home desk). I feel even the regular-sized Titan Evo is more accommodating for larger users, plus there’s an extra-large version if you require it.

Design and look

Overall the Atlas still looks like a Secretlab chair, only less bulky. The design is actually curvier than the Titan Evo, with the back of the chair following an S-curve. It’s noticeably thinner and even the side supports look more sculpted than other models.

The result is gentler, softer and more design-led. It’s something that looks much more suited to an office environment. While the Titan is by no means loud, unless you go for one of the special edition finishes, the Atlas is more reserved, even down to the colour-matched logo on the front and back of the chair.

The models that really stand out to me are the Dune editions, particularly the Dune+, which is all one colour. It’s a sandy cream colour that is completely unique to the Atlas. It’s far less stark than the white leatherette we’ve seen on the Titan NanoGen (and remains an option on the Atlas), and has an almost Scandinavian feel – it actually reminds me of the inside of the new Volvo EX90.

All of the premium or plus models have a nicer look, thanks to the colour-matched features. I suspect the Black3 with the SoftWeave material will be the most popular model. This looks great in both the standard and premium editions, the difference being the use of the NanoFoam in the premium model. The Pure Black NanoGen model is also likely to be a winner, with black NanoGen Hybrid Leatherette on the premium version or a Neo Hybrid Leatherette on the standard edition.

Credit has to go to the Secretlab team though for the design of the seat controls on the Atlas. Though I was a little unsure about having a twist movement for the height rather than the traditional lever, the way they have combined all functions into two controls is impressive. The left control twists to adjust the seat depth and the lever flicks up and down to lock or unlock the tilt, with the words unlocked in green and locked in red for clarity.

On the right, the control twists for the height and the centre dial turns to adjust the tilt force, between one and four, with a status bar showing your current setting. It’s certainly the clearest set of controls I’ve seen on any chair, and I hope it’s something they bring to the rest of the range in future.

Overall comfort

The biggest selling point of the Atlas compared to a mesh office chair is comfort. I have always recommended gaming chairs to those looking for a home office chair because they are far more comfortable. Working from home, particularly in summer, can mean sitting in shorts, which is not something you want to do on a mesh chair. Gaming chairs are designed to maintain comfort over long periods, which makes them better for work too.

The thinner design of the Atlas still manages to offer that gaming chair comfort. I was testing the Dune+ model with NanoFoam, and it’s actually a lot more comfortable than my old Secretlab Titan SoftWeave chair I bought back in 2020 – the newer models use the same cold-cure foam as the Atlas.

Though you don’t get the huge recline of the Titan, the tilt here is more than enough for relaxing between meetings, or for some after-work gameplay. With the chair locked upright, into task mode, it feels really supportive on your back, and I didn’t miss the adjustable lumbar support at all.

Should I buy the Secretlab Atlas?

With the Atlas, Secretlab aimed to take their gaming chair formula and put it into an office friendly product. That has been an absolute success here, as this chair feels every bit the Secretlab product while looking suited to a home office with a smaller frame.

It’s a modern interpretation of the Secretlab design that feels more lifestyle living space than gaming cave. Perhaps a sign of the times, when gamers reach middle age and need a grown-up space to work and play. The Atlas doesn’t look like a gaming product, yet still provides that level of comfort.

While the standard model is still a comfortable option, I would recommend going for one of the premium options to take advantage of the NanoFoam, particularly for the white and Dune models.

So is this the ultimate chair for those hybrid or remote workers? The ones that previously might have opted for a gaming chair over your standard Staples ergonomic option. I would definitely recommend the Atlas to those people, but I would also still also suggest looking at the Titan Evo.

With the Titan Evo Lite no longer on sale, the standard Atlas chair is now Secretlab’s cheapest option. However, the Titan Evo SoftWeave is cheaper than the premium Atlas model, and arguably offers better value. Even the NanoGen Titan is only £70/$100 more than the Atlas equivalent.

For adjustment and comfort, the Titan is still the ultimate chair. However, for a home office where you don’t want the bulk of a big office chair, the Secretlab Atlas is the perfect choice.

So you’re considering a robot vacuum, and you’ve got a healthy budget. Well, Ecovacs has one it hopes challenges the best robot vacuum cleaners around. Say hello to the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone.

The X12 OmniCyclone is Ecovac’s latest flagship robot vacuum, sitting atop the firm’s extensive range of clever floor cleaners and boasting new technology to help justify its premium price tag. With standout premium models like the Dreame Matrix10 Ultra and Roborock Saros 20 already on the market, I expected seamless setup, mapping, cleaning and maintenance from the X12 – if it wants to mount a worthwhile challenge.

So, does its new FocusJet technology, along with its Ozmo Roller 3.0, Zero Tangle 4.0 and docking station features live up to the billing? I’ve put the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone through its paces to find out.

Price and availability

The Ecovacs Deebot X12 OmniCyclone price is £1,249/$1,499, placing it firmly in between its key competitors. The Dreame Matrix10 Ultra is slightly more expensive, while the Roborock is a touch cheaper.

That price includes the robot vacuum, docking station, and cleaning solution for the mop function. You can currently buy the X12 from Amazon.

Unboxing and set up

The Deebot X12 OmniCyclone arrives well packaged, although the station is packed with more plastic and polystyrene than I’d like to see for a product in 2026. The robot itself is packed in its own box within the larger package, and it features solely cardboard packing protection.

As well as the X12 robot and Omni station, you also get a base ramp that simply, but securely clips to the front of the front of the station, along with a bottle of cleaning solution, a bottle of heavy-duty cleaning solution, power cord and manual.

There’s also a couple of corner guards to help soften a couple of sharp corners on the front of the docking station. I was able to position the station in my laundry room, away from walkways, and with no small children to worry about, I didn’t see the need to stick these on. However, if you do have young children, or there’s a chance you might accidentally catch the docking station as you walk past, the inclusion of these rubber bumpers is a nice touch.

One thing to note is there’s a lot of protective film on both the OmniCyclone station and the robot itself, so take time to peel these all off, checking you’ve removed every piece.

A useful one-sheet quick start guide is included, giving you clear visual and written instructions on how to get the base setup, easily add water and cleaning solution to the correct reservoirs, download the app, and get the X12 connected to your Wi-Fi.

You’ll need to place the OmniCyclone station close to a power outlet, as the power cord is only a meter and a half long.

The free app on your smartphone provides step-by-step setup instructions, and is complimented by audible voice guidance from the X12 robot vacuum, keeping you updated every step of the way. It’s all very straightforward, and I applaud Ecovacs for that.

You can give your robot vacuum a name. I called my review unit Vinnie, allowing me to use this name with voice commands to send Vinnie out on a clean, or check things such as battery level.

Before I could get going the app notified me of an available firmware update. I had to place Vinnie in the docking station, ensuring the connector pads on the rear of the robot were against the connectors in the dock. I got audio confirmation from the X12 when I had it properly docked.

From there, the update downloaded and installed in five minutes, and you get the option to set future updates to download and install automatically overnight. Once this is complete, it’s time to send the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone out to map your home.

Mapping

The Deebot X12 OmniCyclone automatically maps your home – you just need to set it going and it’ll work out your layout. It does a really good job, but you need to ensure the pathways around your home are clear before it heads out, as I found when I set it off to map.

I placed the base station in my laundry room, and the X12 was able to manoeuvre its way around this small space and make its way into my main living area. Here it did well moving round my kitchen island, sofa, TV stand, plants and coffee table. It even did pretty well under the dining table, among the web of chair legs, although it did spend around 30 seconds working out how to free itself from between a few of the legs – it made it out in the end though.

All seemed to be going well, but instead of venturing into the hallway and then the lounge, the X12 returned to the base station, saying it had completed mapping.

That’s because as it made its way round the kitchen, my cat was blocking the door to the hallway as it watched suspiciously as the X12 trundled past it. Due to this feline blockade, the robot clearly assumed there was nothing worth investigating beyond it.

After I had gently ushered my cat out of the way, I sent the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone out on a fresh mapping run, and this time it managed to find its way into the hallway and lounge.

It completed the mapping task in five minutes, producing an impressive floor plan of my home, with each space colour coded and rooms auto-named – although the names can be easily edited in the app if it hasn’t got them quite right.

Carpets, rugs and mats were also automatically detected without my intervention, which means the X12 knows where to mop, and where not to mop.

You can also fine tune the map it's created as well, by moving walls, highlighting additional carpeted areas, setting no-spray zones, and creating virtual boundaries if you don’t want the robot going into certain areas.

Design and features

With the weight of a sizeable price tag on its shoulders, the Deebot is at least dressed for the occasion. Its slick, premium design looks modern, and the base station features a smart Deebot logo design on its top, adding to the premium aesthetic.

The base station and robot vacuum also feel premium, with a certain heft to them, and a well built finish that suggests they’re capable of years of loyal service.

I did find the glossy front section of the robot a bit of a dust and fingerprint magnet though, picking up cat hair and fluff as it trundled round my home. This isn’t a huge issue, but it can lead to the machine looking a little grubby after a while, not to mention potentially blocking the view for the AI sensors and cameras. Giving it a quick wipe with a cloth every now and to keep it looking smart.

You’ll need to find a decent chunk of space for the base station, as it’s bigger than some of the competition, chiefly due to its bagless design and powerful cyclone dust bin that sucks out debris from the robot’s bin with impressive force.

The design of the clean and dirty water tanks on top of the station have also been improved, with comfortable handles making it easy to remove and empty/refill them.

In a lot of ways, the features here are similar to those found on its predecessor, the Deebot X11 Omnicyclone, but there is one major new addition with the X12.

FocusJet is the firm’s latest technology, with the robot’s AI able to automatically detect heavy stains, spraying them with a cleaning solution from two nozzles on the front of the robot before starting a mopping routine. Ecovacs says this results in fewer passes required when mopping to remove stubborn stains, increasing the efficiency of the robot.

Unlike some of its mopping rivals that use flat, circular mop pads, the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone comes with the firm’s Ozmo Roller 3.0, a 27cm cylindrical roller mop that can extend from the side of the robot (Ecovacs calls this ‘TruEdge’) to get into corners and up to edges other bots might not be able to reach.

The roller is 50% longer than its predecessor (17.5cm) and can spin quicker at 220rpm (vs 200rpm on the X11) for a deeper clean.

Unlike the Dreame Matrix10, there aren’t dedicated roller mops for different surfaces - the Deebot makes do with the single roller. However, like other premium rivals, the base station here can clean the roller during cycles, and once a cleaning cycle has finished – ensuring your floors get a fresh clean each time.

The base station takes around three minutes to complete a mop washing cycle, and during that time it’s able to recharge the X12’s battery by up to 13%, ensuring the robot can mop larger areas without lengthy recharge breaks.

Another upgrade that arrives on the X12 is the Zero Tangle 4.0 main brush, designed to not get clogged up with hair thanks to an anti-tangle, which paired with 22,000Pa of suction power provides a suitable level of power – even though both the Dreame and Roborock offer greater suction.

This also wouldn’t be a premium robot vacuum in the year 2026 if AI wasn’t present. The Deebot Z12 OmniCyclone packs Yiko, an AI assistant you talk to to control cleans. Instructions can be very specific too, such as "please clean below the sofa in the living room."

The app also sports an AI agent mode, which can learn your habits and automatically adjust cleaning modes and scheduling, with the aim of seamlessly fitting into your household’s needs.

Maintenance

The OmniCyclone base station that comes with the Deebot X12 looks good, and is highly functional in its design. The clean and dirty water reservoirs are easy to remove and refill/empty, sliding out from the top of the station, while a small panel on the front left is easily removed to reveal the cleaning solution reservoirs for the mopping and FocusJet. These too, simply slide out and each have a removable lid to keep the contents secure.

The cyclone bin sits proudly in the centre of the station, and it’s easy to remove with a single latch that doubles as the carry handle, allowing you to remove it from the station. It then has a blue, spring-loaded slider on the side, that you slide down, opening the base of the bin and pushing the contents out.

I like how easy this was to empty, and it kept my hands clean. Plus there are no dust bags to contend with, making things even easier. I also found the bin to be a good size, capable of holding multiple full cleans of my home before I needed to empty it.

Meanwhile, the station also cleans the mop brush, leaving you to just deal with the dirty water it generates from this clean.

The only small downside is I found the robot dropped debris on the base station ramp after every cleaning cycle – which meant I had to manually tidy it up each time. It’s not a huge issue, and it’s not like I had to chase it round the house picking up after it, but it was a little frustrating.

Performance

Day-to-day, the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone is easy to live with. Set it off to vacuum the house and it will diligently do so, trundling through your home collecting debris in its path.

Like many robot vacuums, it’s much quieter than a traditional vacuum (usually 65-85dB), and I measured its vacuuming volume at 51-54dB on hard floor and 55-65dB on carpet. It’s louder on carpet as the X12 automatically detects the floor type and increases suction to ensure the same level of clean through the fibres.

It means you’re still able to have a conversation with someone without shouting at them, or watch TV without having to flick the volume up much, as the X12 moves round the room.

You get four levels of vacuum suction, however for the most part I stuck with ‘standard’ (aka level 2), which managed to collect light debris such as crumbs and cat hair from both hard floor and carpet.

For the times when I went longer between vacuum cycles, or when I’d had multiple guests visit in a short space of time, I’d switch the power to strong. If you really want to get fine debris up, there is a Max (level 4) setting, although this is much louder and uses more battery power.

The X12 did a good job of moving around my home, although there were occasions where it would nudge a cat bowl, wrestle a lightweight mat by the door, and bump into a table leg or two. It never got stuck though, and I was impressed with how it always worked out a way to free itself from a tight spot.

It was also able to handle the 2cm step between my hardfloor hallway and carpeted lounge, applying additional power to the wheels to help it boost over the ledge and continue its clean.

What also impressed me was this robot vacuum’s low profile, and its ability to continue under low-sitting units where there was only a few millimetres of vertical clearance. It even has a light that will automatically turn on if its under a large piece of furniture and the cameras need a better view of what’s around it.

It can take you by surprise, as its relatively quiet operation means I sometimes forgot it was moving round my home, only to be slightly shocked when it tickled my feet. Avoid them, it did not.

It took between 60 and 70 minutes to clean my 40m² home, and it was able to do it all on a single charge, with around 40% battery remaining.

During this time it would return to the dock two or three times to empty the X12’s onboard bin into the larger bin in the OmniCyclone station. It’s this emptying which is the noisiest part of the whole process, so if you’re thinking about running the Deebot X12 overnight, the bin emptying could wake you up.

While the X12 did a good job collecting fine debris (think crumbs, pet hair, dust and dirt) on its regular vacuum cycles, it struggled when I tasked it with more substantial clean-ups.

I dropped 20g of rice on both hard flooring and carpet, and the X12 collected 98% of the grains on the latter. That sounds like a good result, but the remaining 0.5g it left behind were noticeable to the eye and under foot, which isn’t particularly useful if you’re looking for a hassle-free clean up of a spill.

Things got much worse then I repeated the same hard floor and carpet pick-up tests with 20g of Cheerios breakfast cereal. Instead of running over the scattering of multigrain rings, the Deebot X12 actively avoids the denser patches of the ‘spill’ and vacuums around it.

As for the rings it did manage to collect, when it returned to the base station it wasn’t able to remove all of them from the robot’s bin. This meant I had to manually clear it out.

This was disappointing to see, as it reduces the vacuum’s convenience as you can’t reliably call on it to tidy up larger debris you might have dropped on the floor.

The X12’s mopping function works more consistently, with the roller mop providing even coverage across my hard floors, and not leaving them overly wet. That means the clean floors dry quickly.

Deebot’s TruEdge feature sees the roller mop extend from the side of the unit, allowing it to clean up close to skirting boards, corners, and other harder to reach areas.

The X12 did a great job of automatically detecting carpet and lifting the roller mop up and out of the way when traveling over this surface. You’ll find the robot returns to the base station at least once during a mopping cycle to clean the roller, helping to avoid dragging dirt around your floors.

This process takes three minutes, and the X12 fast-charges during this time. I saw it replenish 14% of its battery during its washing cycles, which is a nice feature to ensure it doesn’t run out of charge mid-cycle.

It also performed well with tougher stains, like a dried ketchup spill, with the company’s FocusJet technology detecting the mess and effectively spraying it with cleaning solution before it attempted to mop.

The spill was cleaned up, with the X12 taking a few passes over the mess to ensure it got it all. Once mopping is complete, the X12 returns to the base station for another clean and then a roller mop drying cycle. It’s an impressive solution that I found worked very well.

Verdict

Did my floors look cleaner and feel fresher underfoot after the Deebot X12 OmniCyclone completed each full vacuum and mop cleaning cycle? Absolutely.

With two cats in our home, having feline hair regularly collected, food crumbs swept up, and muddy paw prints scrubbed away near the cat flap, the X12 delivered the service I was expecting for routine cleans. However, its vacuuming performance isn’t flawless.

If you’re after a robot vacuum that can reliably handle larger debris, you’ll want to look at the comparably priced Roborock and Draeme models as they offer better performance here.

The app is excellent though, and I found the automatic mapping of my home very impressive. The quiet operation (bin emptying aside) also meant the X12 could go about its business without interfering with my day – although it might nibble your feet if you’re milling around a room while it’s on its cycle.

Mopping performance was impressive, and the FocusJet tech did appear to help the X12 clear up more stubborn strains. If you’re after a premium robot vacuum and mop that can reliably clean your floors' general dust and dirt on a regular basis, the X12 delivers.

Alternatives to consider

The X12 has tough competition, and there are two other flagship robot vacuums and mops that are just ahead of the Deebot thanks to better vacuuming.

The Roborock Saros 20 is one of the most impressive robot vacuum and mop systems we’ve tested, combining powerful performance with well-executed features and technologies. It’s expensive, but if you’re after a high-performance robot that requires minimal input, this is one of the best options.

Meanwhile, the Dreame Matrix10 Ultra is one of the most advanced and user-friendly robot vacuums around, with cutting-edge tech and effortless automation, all controlled through the excellent Dreamehome app. The only real downsides are the high price and short power cable.

I can still remember a time when the best portable cool boxes were little more than glorified plastic tubs with a bag of melting ice thrown in. Of course, this method of cooling is still extremely popular, as evidenced by the rise of YETI and other cool box manufacturers.

But when it comes to the end of day two and the ice has disappeared, the milk’s turning to yoghurt and your drinks no longer have that refreshing icy-cold punch, you’ll wish you’d bought a proper compressor fridge/freezer instead.

This is where the compact fridge/freezer from premium Swedish outdoor brand Dometic comes into play. While not cheap by a long shot, the 25-litre CFX5 promises improved vacuum-based insulation, a variable-speed compressor for better energy efficiency and a wider-than-average temperature range of -22°C to 20°C. Will all this encouraging tech justify the lofty asking price? Let’s check it out.

Dometic CFX5 25-litre fridge/freezer review

Price and availability

The Dometic CFX5 25 sits firmly at the premium end of the portable fridge/freezer market, with UK prices hovering between £650 and £700 and US pricing landing at roughly $900.

If shopping in the UK, try Dometic direct or Decathlon, AlpineTrek and 4x4 Works. Amazon also sells it, though, at £798.99, the price is even higher. In the USA, your best port of call is Dometic, where the CFX5 25 shifts for $899.99. Alternatively, try Amazon, where it’s selling for $900.

Specifications

• Capacity: 25 litres (26.41 qt)
• Zones: One
• Temperature Range: -22°C to 20°C (-7.6°F - 68°F)
• Capacity: 40 cans (330ml)
• Size: 56.9 x 34.2 x 42cm (22.4 x 13.46 x 16.53in)
• Weight: 13.5kgs / 29.76 lbs
• Power consumption: +/- 45W
• Max operating temp: 43°C (109°F)
• Built-in battery: No
• Connectivity: Bluetooth only
• Warranty: 3 years

Design and features

Best known for its pricey but highly regarded range of caravan and camper van appliances and accessories, Swedish brand Dometic's products combine durable practicality with a clean Scandinavian design aesthetic that signals to other campers that you have extremely discerning taste when it comes to high-end camping gear and that money is no object. In fact, you could say that Dometic is to camping what Miele is to the kitchen and utility room.

One of six different-sized models in the new flagship CFX5 range, this compact 25-litre refrigerator-cum-freezer blends robust engineering with understated Scandi styling that has become synonymous with the brand. Put another way, Dometic gear is instantly recognisable because most of the company's products share a distinctive design ethos and dark grey colour scheme.

With 25 litres of interior space, this single-zone model features a large cavity with a removable easy-load basket for drinks, milk, etc., and a small side area for oft-used perishables like butter, bacon, burgers or sausages, or simply more drinks.

According to Dometic, the CFX5 can accommodate up to 40 x 330ml cans of beverages, and I’d say that’s more than enough liquid refreshment for a family of four, given that the cavity will be replenished over time. The cavity is also equipped with a drainage plug and a bright LED lamp.

At 56.9 x 34.2 x 42cm, the CFX5's compact 25-litre form is perfectly shaped to slot neatly into a hatchback, estate, 4x4 or camper van. In fact, Dometic even provides an optional Quick Fixing Kit that locks the unit firmly in place during transit.

While this model doesn't have wheels like the larger BougeRV CRD2 40L model I recently reviewed, its smaller form and much lighter 13.5-kilo weight, coupled with its two strapping, sprung aluminium handles, make it easy to carry from car to pitch.

However, I’ll admit it's definitely a two-person job if lugging it to a beach picnic or on any trip on foot longer than 30 metres or so. But on the plus side, when you get to the beach and discover that no one brought a bottle opener, you’ll be thanking Dometic’s design bods for attaching one next to one of the handles.

Dometic products rarely disappoint in overall build quality and functionality, and this model is no exception. Aside from being cast mostly from tough ABS plastic, it also boasts vacuum-insulated panels (VIP, to coin yet another acronym) that work like your average insulated drinks bottle.

According to Dometic, this type of vacuum system drastically reduces heat transfer and convective heat loss while being extremely energy-efficient and lightweight. Its hardy textured ABS lid, meanwhile, is easily strong enough to sit on and grippy enough for standing drinks, though it does attract a lot of dust.

However, I must stress that to properly seal the lid, you have to press it down firmly until you hear a click. This is because the Dometic CFX5 – and CFX3 series – incorporate TPE (Thermoplastic Elastomer) gaskets that create a highly effective seal, preventing warm ambient air from seeping in and lowering the temperature.

The CFX5 can be powered in two ways: AC via a mains outlet or DC via the car’s cigarette lighter socket and any portable power station. You’ll find the ports on the rear of the unit under a pair of rubber flaps.

For convenience, the unit ships with cables for both UK and European AC use, plus another one for DC. Oh, and there’s also an 18W USB-A device-charging port next door to the unit’s interface.

One major bonus of this model is that it's equipped with Dometic's latest variable-speed compressor, which automatically adjusts its operating speed to match cooling demands while delivering rapid temperature reduction, efficient off-grid power consumption (around 45W on average) when used with a portable power station, and generally quiet performance.

In fact, I measured the CFX5’s sound at 58 dB up against the ventilation grill and around 44dB from three feet away. Granted, you may hear an occasional faint buzz from the compressor when in the tent at night, but it’s no worse than other refrigerators I’ve used.

Since the CFX5 is a bona fide fridge/freezer, it boasts a commendable temperature range of -22°C to 20°C – that's 2°C lower than an average home freezer – and a maximum ambient operating temperature of 43°C. The hottest I've ever measured in a tent was 40°C during a French heatwave, so a 43°C max is very promising indeed.

I’m a big advocate of models that both refrigerate and freeze. No, you may not use the freezer function when camping, but it’s good to know you can quickly get drinks down to ice-cold by whacking the temp to a minus figure.

Also, having a freezer function may prove very useful at home when your house freezer is full and you can’t squeeze in those three tubs of Häagen-Dazs ice cream you just brought home.

While this model works with the Dometic Mobile Cooling app, the app itself is so basic as to be almost surplus to requirements, but more on this below.

Your best bet for changing any of the unit’s parameters is to use the onboard interface, which comprises a one-inch black-and-white display with soft-touch rubber buttons for On/Off, arrows for up and down, and another button for confirming temperature settings.

The main menu is divided as follows: Set Temp, Battery Protection, Bluetooth, WiFi, Display brightness, and Temp Units (°C/°F). Most of these functions are self-evident, so I’ll discuss just two of them: Battery Protection and WiFi.

Battery Protection is essentially a built-in low-voltage cut-off system designed to stop the fridge from draining your vehicle’s battery. When the fridge is connected to a 12V DC source, such as a car’s cigarette lighter socket, a 12V or 24V leisure battery, or a portable power pack, the CFX5 constantly monitors the incoming voltage.

If the voltage drops below a preset threshold, the fridge automatically switches itself off before the battery becomes dangerously depleted. Once the battery voltage rises again, the fridge restarts automatically. I should add that most cars built since 2015 automatically shut off their 12V ports when the ignition is completely off.

Since this model is compatible with the Dometic Mobile Cooling app and there’s a WiFi icon and setting on the fridge’s interface, you might reasonably assume that it will connect to your phone via WiFi as well as Bluetooth.

Well, I had no issues setting it up using Bluetooth, but it simply refused to connect to my WiFi. So I looked it up and, according to a news-bite, Dometic has removed the WiFi setting feature as ‘a measure reflecting global policy standards in accordance with new cybersecurity laws recently implemented in Europe’.

I thought I’d point this out because these new laws clearly came into effect after the CFX5 series was produced. Mind, this doesn’t make much difference to how the app works, because it only performs two simple functions: temperature setting and temperature units.

But, hey, at least you can adjust the cooler’s internal temperature via Bluetooth without getting off your butt, so the app does have at least one redeeming feature.

Performance

I haven’t had the chance to test this sterling fridge/freezer while camping, but I have tried it at home and I’m very impressed by its performance and its ability to display accurate internal temperatures when checked against my two fridge thermometers.

Where, for instance, the much cheaper BougeRV CRD2 I recently reviewed displayed some fluctuations in temperature, this one has been mostly rock-solidly accurate, at least inside the larger cavity. My first test was to see how quickly it went from 22°C ambient to -10°C, and it took a solid 25 minutes.

However, when I checked my own thermometers (which might not be especially accurate for all I know), the large cavity read -6.6°C and the smaller section 0.2°C. I think they simply took longer to catch up because after one hour, the thermometer in the large cavity showed -9.4°C, and -7°C in the smaller cavity. That's good enough for me.

I then performed another test to see how quickly the temperature dropped from -10°C to -20°C. It took just over 15 minutes, with my thermometer reading -20°C and the smaller compartment at -14°C.

My final test was to see how quickly or slowly the internal temperature dropped from -20°C when I turned the whole unit off. Considering there was no ice on board to maintain low temperatures, it was still -4°C after 55 minutes, and that seemed decent enough.

I look forward to taking this model on my next camping trip and using it with one of my portable power stations and a 200W solar panel, enough power on tap to run this thing for several days if the sun’s out to play. However, I would most definitely load it up the evening before and set it to around 2°C so it’s perfectly chilled for the next morning.

One of the main reasons I’m smitten by this model is that it’s the perfect size for a couple on a three-night stint in the great outdoors. It’s also an easier fit for the car, and I alone can carry it when full from the boot to the pitch without my spine snapping.

And when I get back home, it takes up far less storage space, which means more room for any future camping gear. It’s a win, win, win for me.

Verdict

The Dometic CFX5 25 is undeniably one of the best-built portable compressor fridge/freezers I’ve had the pleasure of reviewing.

I love the minimalist design of its rugged shell, its neatly integrated aluminium handles and clever vacuum-insulated panels to help maximise internal space while reducing energy consumption. Its temperature accuracy is also exemplary, holding settings with impressive precision whether chilling drinks or freezing food.

However, it isn’t flawless. The companion app feels oddly dated, and then there’s the price. By comparison to other fridge/freezers I’ve tested, including the 35-litre EcoFlow Glacier Classic, which ships with a 40-hour battery for £609, the CFX5 25’s £699.99 asking price is pretty lofty, even by premium camping standards.

Nevertheless, its superb cooling performance and efficiency go a long way towards justifying the outlay.

If you're looking for one of the best soundbars to upgrade your TV's audio, then it's no secret that you're not short on choice – which can make choosing one all the more complex.

Bose's 2026 flagship, the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar, leans firmly into sophisticated design – as its very name suggests – so if you're looking for a style option, then its combination of glass top, material cladding, and physical controls makes for a strong pick.

But this soundbar is just as qualified in the audio department, delivering Dolby Atmos decoding straight out of the box – with two upfiring speakers in its 5.0.2 channel arrangement to treat such audio properly – for a sensationally wide-and-tall soundstage.

With competition from Sonos to Samsung and beyond, however, this Bose soundbar has its work cut out in the price wars. I've been living with one at home – paired with Lifestyle Ultra Subwoofer and Lifestyle Ultra Speaker pair for full 7.1.4 surround – and here's why I can thoroughly recommend it.

Price & Availability

The Bose Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar is on sale right now, priced at £999 / $1099 / AU$1799. It's the upgrade to 2023's Smart Ultra Soundbar, which has since decreased in price.

Around this price point there's a lot else to consider, of course, as even the Sonos Arc Ultra is £/$999 – but has seen recent price drops make it even lower, per the shopping widget embedded below.

To really flesh out the Bose pick, however, you can add the Lifestyle Ultra Subwoofer (£899 / $999 / AU$1299) with a Lifestyle Ultra Speaker pair used as rears (£299 / $299 / AU$549 each). Discount bundles also exist, again per the shopping widget below.

Features & What's New?

The move from Smart Ultra Soundbar to Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar wasn't just a nip-and-tuck process. The new flagship represents the "biggest acoustic overhaul in a decade," Bose spokespeople told me at the product's reveal back in April.

The new soundbar features a nine-element array, two of which are Bose's PhaseGuide technology – utilised to control sound directionality, essentially allowing output anywhere within a room without the need for speakers to distinctly point there. This is very good news for immersive audio and Dolby Atmos, of course.

Bass is handled using Bose's QuietPort system, which funnels sound through elongated tubes to magnify the low-end output without a distinct woofer being present. You can add a separate wireless subwoofer, of course, to up the low-end output even further.

Straight out of the box the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar is a 5.0.2 system, the '2' representing the two upfiring speakers at the ends of the soundbar. These aren't visually highlighted as open ports, per the previous product release, instead are 'invisible' beneath the fabric finish that covers the majority of the 'bar – save for the stylised glass top-plate.

Within this glass plate there's a distinctive new sunken control 'wheel' – which I mused was reminiscent of a classic iPod control – while touch-sensitive Bluetooth, mic mute and 'action' buttons sit to the side. Volume up/down and play/pause buttons are within that wheel, but you can use Bose's updated app to handle everything (as there's no physical remote included – and you can't buy an official one).

Design & Setup

As said up top: the Bose is really pushing the style factor with great success, delivering one of the nicest-looking soundbars I've had in front of my TV for some time. And I test a lot of soundbars in tandem with the best TVs.

The soundbar is 110cm long, so in excess of a metre, meaning it's best matched with larger TVs – nothing under 55-inches, I'd suggest, as those will measure approximately the same length. This 'bar the same length as the Sonos Arc Ultra, therefore, meaning it's in direct competition with that product.

It's also head-on equipped with similar specification, as around the back you'll find an HDMI eARC socket, but no further HDMI passthrough. Much as I will criticise that, it's not uncommon – and you'd need to spend more on, say, a Samsung HW-Q990F to gain such an extra (plus a sub and extra surround speakers in the box).

Not that once you're plugged in – with the included HDMI cable ported to your TV to automatically take over sound controls – you'll be paying attention to what's around the back. As the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar is all about how it looks.

I like how Bose has managed to balance elegance and functionality in a discreet way – there's nothing riotous about the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar's design, per se, but little touches such as that top-plate really elevate it above and beyond much of what else is out there.

There's a slight blip in this design, however, as the glass is of course reflective – so you'll see what's on screen mirrored in the surface below, without being able to do much about it. Bose ought to figure out a way to adjust refraction within the material to minimise this; especially as many of the best OLED TVs are now baking in anti-reflective panels.

Aside from the super-simple physical setup process, the Bose is best handled from the Bose app (iOS/Android free download), which has been updated and simplified to make for a really easy end-to-end process. It's within these screens where you can make adjustments and personalisations, too, which only further this soundbar's delivery.

Sound Quality

But it's not all just about looks. Bose has done a brilliant job is getting this metre-or-so-long system to output well beyond its proportions. Its sound width is room-filling – to the point that TVs of 75- or 85-inches or more would be capably catered for by it.

And that's just the soundbar alone. As I noted on my very first listen, any additional products excluded, there's a decent amount of bass drive here from the 'bar alone. That'll be great for those wanting to enhance low-end without paying for a subwoofer – or irking their neighbours, perhaps.

I don't feel like the bass is quite as major as you'll get from Sonos' Arc Ultra, mind, but that's not necessarily a bad thing. If you want to go full system, then the Bose's Lifestyle Ultra Subwoofer does a grand job in delivering bold, shaped bass – but it does cost a packet more to buy, unavoidably (much like Sonos' equivalent, in that regard).

Width isn't the only benefit of this Bose's design, though, as the upfiring speakers do a very good job of projecting sound upwards. At its most basic this generates height, which is totally essential in matching believable sound in relation to what's going on on the screen – which Bose totally nails.

No, you're never going to get an 'umbrella' of hemispherical sound from a standalone soundbar like you will with a full surround system. But even when handling object-based audio decoding from a Dolby Atmos soundtrack, the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar brings great exaggeration to sound motion – with sounds seemingly flying to the edge of a room and right up to the ceiling.

The clarity of that sound is wonderful, too, with great balance that a number of other soundbars can't present in quite such a cohesive way. This feels like the full, considered package – from highs to mid to low – with carefully judged separation and ample channels to define the best movie soundtracks' multi-positional output.

Expandability

As I've already alluded to, you can take the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar from a 5.0.2 system to a 5.1.2 system with the addition of a Lifestyle Ultra Subwoofer. From there it can be a 7.1.4 setup when adding a pair of Bose Lifestyle Ultra Speaker units – adding rear channels, with built-in upward-firing height output.

I've tested this full package and, while it can't go all-out with four speaker separates like the LG Sound Suite, for example, most people aren't going to need that. As a full package, the Bose is a dream for movies and even music – and that you can step by step upgrade, just as you can with Sonos' equivalent, adds accessibility.

Unlike Sonos' recent app debacle, however, Bose's app update is a gem. It brings so much control to the base soundbar alone, but with everything added there's a full suite of tools added to adjust equalisation (EQ) with simple treble/mid/bass +/- sliders. The subwoofer level can be adjusted individually, or switched off. You can also turn off the rear speakers when not desired.

But the biggest point of interest in the app is the 'Adjustments' section, where you can increase of decrease output from centre, adjust the height mix, and the surround level – enhancing its separation. So many companies – such as Sony in its 360 Audio options for The Collexion headphones, for example – get this so very wrong. But Bose has it spot on.

Indeed, I can't name a company that delivers better spatial upmixes than Bose. It does so in its headphones – such as the QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds (2nd Gen) – and while it's not porting exactly the same movement-based delivery here, the subtlety in adding rear speakers when listening to music is a wonder for percussion, as one example. It never sounds fake or metallic or off-kilter. That's a rare yet wonderful thing.

Bose Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar review: Verdict

With the very same recommended price as the Sonos Arc Ultra, the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar might seem easy to dismiss – but as a stylish alternative with arguably better app integration, Bose's soundbar is a 5-star slammer.

As a standalone soundbar, the sheer sonic width and height impresses, as does the degree of bass – without the need to add any extras. It's great for movies, just as it's great for music – with ample yet simple adjustability options present within the app.

If you chose to upgrade later, however, then the Lifestyle Ultra Subwoofer and a pair of Lifestyle Ultra Speaker units totally transforms this 'bar into a successful surround option – albeit at quite the cost – for an impressive cinematic experience.

Bose has really gone nose-to-nose with Sonos in its flagship soundbar fight this year. And while the Arc Ultra might give more bass oomph as a standalone solution, not everyone's going to want that – marking the Lifestyle Ultra Soundbar out as a sound and stylish alternative.

Also Consider

Time is as much a benefit as it is curse, however, as the Arc Ultra is currently so well discounted that it's a more obvious purchase – for the cost-savings alone. It also sounds brilliant, is ideal for anyone in the Sonos ecosystem already, and doesn't have a reflective top-plate design.

If surround sound is your ultimate goal, then it's also worth considering Samsung's previous-gen flagship, the HW-Q990F (as the newer 'H' version is negligibly different – and much pricier right now). This includes a sub and rear speakers in the box, plus the 'bar has an HDMI passthrough port (4K/120Hz) too.

All of this too pricey for your needs, or your TV too small for it to be necessary? Then Sonos' Beam 2 is always a sensible suggestion – especially when it's on offer. It's got much more sonic bite than the company's Ray product, too.

Danner footwear is the brainchild of Charles Danner, who began making rugged boots for loggers in Wisconsin nearly 100 years ago before relocating to Portland, Oregon, where the company is still headquartered. These days, Danner boots and shoes are a popular choice on Pacific Northwest Trails and are increasingly finding their way onto feet in the UK.

I’ve tested a lot of pairs of Danners over the past few years, and though they’re nearly always the classiest shoes on the trail, I feel that there’s always something holding them back from their potential, whether that’s a long breaking-in period required or a substandard grip. The Trail 2650, however, are easily the best walking shoes from the brand I’ve hiked in.

Named for the 2,650 miles of the famous Pacific Crest Trail, these shoes are built for mileage, combining comfort and lightweight construction with good protection and traction.

As has been the case with many Danner shoes, I instantly loved their aesthetic, which is quite modern by the brand’s standards – it’s known for full-grain leather (see also: Danner Mountain Light II review) and colourful laces – but thanks to materials like suede uppers, they’re not too sporty for my liking.

But any time a shoe is pretty, I’m instantly sceptical. Can it really hold up to the demands of hiking in the Scottish Highlands, where I usually romp? I’ve worn them up Ben Lui, a grand Munro in Scotland, and across the Isle of Mull this spring to put them through their paces.

Danner Trail 2650 review

Price and availability

Available in men’s and women’s sizing in a wide array of tasteful colours (I tested them in Oil Green, which is a nice shade of olive), the Danner Trail 2650 is available directly from the brand’s website with an MSRP of £190.

That is pricey compared to most other hiking shoes on test – £65 more than the Keen Hightrail EXP, which we rated as Best Overall in our guide to the best hiking shoes.

But it’s on par with Danner’s pricing, which does reflect the use of premium materials (it used to also reflect that the shoes and boots were made in the USA, but these shoes are made in Vietnam, sadly).

Design and materials

These shoes fit like a trainer with a traditional lace-up closure, and they look quite at home on city streets – I’ve been wearing them around Glasgow ever since I got my hands on them.

But don’t worry, there are plenty of technical details that make these stand out on the trail, starting with the choice of Vibram 460 rubber outsoles instead of an own-brand version, which ensures traction in muddy and wet conditions.

Above that sits a plush Danner PlyoGo Midsole made with ultralight EVA foam for all-day comfort, with a Trailguard TPU shank to provide stability on rough ground. Then there’s a removable OrthoLite Footbed to improve comfort and breathability.

To top it all off, the upper is made from a blend of suede and textile fabric with holes to let heat and water escape, a breathable liner for hot days, and reinforcements at the toes and heels, which I was thankful for when tripping over rocks and roots on Ben Lui.

Performance and comfort

My feet aren’t wide or narrow, but I have quite high arches, and this has historically been an issue for me with some Danner shoes (I couldn’t even get the Trail 2650 Campo on without a shoehorn).

The first time I tried to put these on, my heart sank as I thought it was going to be the same old story, but I persevered, and the very next time I wore them, they had stretched out nicely, and I’ve had no problems since.

Once on, I was impressed by how secure they are and how easy it is to get a lockdown fit with the lacing system, which features nice, long laces that by and large stay tied, which frankly is an underrated feature in a hiking shoe.

Straight away, I knew they were going to be comfortable. The midsole just feels absolutely fantastic underfoot, with loads of cushioning that translates into zero foot fatigue after hours on the trail, and a really stable ride even when I’m moving quickly on quite challenging terrain.

You might think that suede uppers translate into heavier shoes, but the size 4 I tested weighs only 249g per shoe, which is lighter than my Merrell Moab 3s. The toe box doesn’t look especially wide compared to my Moabs, which usually sets off an alarm bell for me, but they feel surprisingly roomy on.

I’ve been testing them in mild and warm weather, which is what they’re built for, and I’m loving their breathability. They feel positively airy, and the suede uppers have holes that let sweat escape, which also means they drain quickly when I have to cross a river or encounter boggy terrain.

The downside, I suppose, is that they’re not waterproof (though a GTX version is available), and honestly, that does somewhat curtail their usefulness here in the UK, but I’ll definitely be bringing them along on trekking holidays and reaching for them first for straightforward walking.

I’ve actually spent the whole day wearing them wet – I fell into a river on Monday, then had to wear them wet on Tuesday while hiking in boggy conditions for four hours – and honestly, it didn’t pose any real issues. They didn’t rub, they weren’t uncomfortable, and when they do fill up with water, they drain quickly even if they don’t dry particularly quickly.

Mine got really muddy walking up Ben Lui, which is one of the sloppier Munros I’ve encountered, and I was a bit unsure I’d be able to wear them around town again. Much to my surprise (and pleasure), a quick dip in the river on the walk back to the car left them looking clean again.

Now, for the feature that’s absolutely essential for sloppy UK trails: traction. I’ve been less than impressed with Danner’s own-brand outsoles in the past, but a Vibram sole all but guarantees good grip.

The Vibram 460 is popular as a trail-running shoe and features 4mm angled multi-directional lugs that adapt to changing conditions such as sand, mud, and hard-packed trails. I’ve tested these out in slick muddy conditions, dry trails and bog, all on very steep slopes, and I’ve yet to lose my footing.

Verdict

The Danner Trail 2650 hiking shoes are a best-in-class design for anyone seeking a lightweight hiker that can cover a lot of miles while still standing up to the demands of technical trails.

Danner isn’t shying away from the fact that, if you choose the non-waterproof version, they’re intended for fairer conditions than we often experience in the UK, and you’ll sacrifice breathability if you opt for the GORE-TEX liner.

But if you have any trekking holidays planned this summer in bog-free countries, these should be a serious contender.

Also consider

The Keen Hightrail EXP Waterproof is surprisingly lightweight for a waterproof shoe and offers a more accommodating fit. Compared to the Danner, you sacrifice some of that premium styling and plush underfoot feel, but you gain all-weather versatility and save some money. It's the option I'd recommend for UK walkers who want one shoe to do everything.

If you need a shoe for British conditions, the Salomon X Ultra 5 GTX is a strong alternative. Its Gore-Tex membrane, supportive chassis and excellent grip make it better suited to wet hillsides and muddy paths than the Trail 2650. It isn't quite as airy or casual-looking as the Danner, but it's a more capable year-round hiking companion.

If you're a die-hard Americano or cold brew fan, you might want to look away now, because for me, nothing beats a frothy coffee. Sure, a trip to your local café is a great way to satisfy that craving, but there's something especially satisfying about recreating that same experience at home.

That's exactly where the Smeg Mini Milk Frother comes in. Designed as a smaller and more affordable alternative to Smeg's larger Multi Milk Frother, it promises three kinds of foam in a compact package that looks every bit as stylish as you'd expect from the Italian brand.

After several weeks of putting it to the test, here's how it performed.

Price and availability

The Smeg Mini Milk Frother is priced at £99.99/$199.95 and comes in a wide range of colours, including black, white, cream, red, pastel blue and pastel green. There are also matte black and matte white versions available.

It joins the previously launched Smeg Multi Milk Frother (£179.99/$299.95), which sits higher up the range and offers six preset programmes alongside a manual mode for greater control.

Design and features

As the name suggests, the Smeg Mini Milk Frother has been designed as a smaller, more affordable alternative to its larger sibling. Measuring just 200 x 93 x 93mm, it has a slim cylindrical design that pairs particularly nicely with Smeg coffee machines, kettles and toasters.

The frother itself consists of a ceramic-coated non-stick carafe, transparent lid, removable magnetic whisk and induction-powered base. In terms of how it works, it's actually quite similar to the Hotel Chocolat The All-New Velvetiser, which many people will already be familiar with.

There's a single button on the front that controls everything – one press selects hot milk foam, two presses heats milk without frothing, and three presses activates cold foam mode. Once you've made your selection, the Mini Milk Frother gets straight to work without needing any further input.

It can heat up to 180ml of milk or froth up to 120ml, making it ideal for one person and perhaps enough for two smaller drinks. The 500W motor heats milk to around 60°C, which is generally considered the sweet spot for coffee drinks.

Inside the jug you'll find handy fill indicators for both heating and frothing, whilst the ceramic-coated interior helps prevent milk from sticking. The whisk and lid are also removable for easier cleaning, although I'll come back to that shortly.

The motor operates at around 40dB, making it noticeably quieter than most coffee machine steam wands. Once your milk is ready, the frother lets you know with a simple audible beep.

Performance

I've had a really positive experience with the Smeg Mini Milk Frother. Aside from looking perfectly at home next to my Smeg kettle and toaster, it's also performed exceptionally well. In fact, I've found myself using it alongside several bean-to-cup coffee machines I've been testing recently rather than relying on their built-in milk systems, which probably says a lot.

The first thing that stood out to me was just how thick and delicious the foam is. It's actually quite difficult to fully convey in writing, so I'll include my TikTok video below because it does a far better job of showing the results.

However, if you're someone who loves a frothy cappuccino or latte, you're going to be very happy here. I was also pleased to discover that the foam actually holds its structure once poured. Unlike many milk frothers where the foam disappears after a few sips, I found it remained thick right to the bottom of the cup.

The hot milk setting also worked well. Whilst I didn't use it as frequently as the hot foam mode, it came in handy when guests wanted a white Americano or a coffee without froth.

The cold foam setting was equally impressive and became particularly useful during the recent heatwave when iced coffees were about the only thing I could face drinking.

If I had one performance-related criticism, it's that I occasionally wished there was some level of temperature adjustment. That said, the default temperature is perfectly fine if you're planning to drink your coffee immediately. Just be aware that it won't stay piping hot for as long as milk heated directly via a steam wand.

Cleaning is probably the area where opinions will vary the most. As I mentioned earlier, if you've used the Hotel Chocolat The All-New Velvetiser before, you'll already know what to expect. Whilst the ceramic coating certainly helps, this isn't the kind of appliance you can simply rinse under the tap and forget about. I often found a thin layer of milk residue left behind on the bottom after use, so I quickly learned that giving it a proper wash with warm soapy water and a sponge immediately afterwards was the best approach.

I also discovered a useful shortcut for more stubborn residue. Filling the jug with a little warm water and washing-up liquid before running one of the programmes effectively cleans the interior for you. Thankfully I didn't need to do this very often, but it's a handy trick to know.

The one thing I did miss was dishwasher compatibility. Unlike the larger Smeg Multi Milk Frother, which has a removable dishwasher-safe stainless steel jug, the Mini Milk Frother requires manual cleaning. That's one of the trade-offs for its smaller size and lower price, and whilst I didn't find it overly frustrating, but it does require a little more maintenance than some rivals.

Verdict

The Smeg Mini Milk Frother creates impressively thick, café-quality foam, looks fantastic on the kitchen counter and is remarkably simple to use. Whilst the lack of temperature controls and dishwasher-safe components may frustrate some users, the excellent frothing performance makes it easy to forgive. If you're the only coffee drinker in your household or simply want a stylish way to elevate your daily coffee, the Smeg Mini Milk Frother is a charming little appliance that's hard not to love.

Alternatives to consider

When it comes to alternatives, the Hotel Chocolat The All-New Velvetiser is probably the closest comparison. Whilst it's marketed primarily as a hot chocolate maker, the internal design and milk-frothing results are remarkably similar.

However, if you want something more versatile, I'd point you towards Smeg's own Multi Milk Frother. As mentioned, its multifunction dial gives access to six automatic programmes and a manual mode, whilst the removable dishwasher-safe jug makes cleaning considerably easier. It's more expensive, but if you regularly make different milk-based drinks, the extra functionality may well be worth it.

Peloton says it now has around six million members across its connected fitness ecosystem and, while its exercise bikes still grab most of the attention, the company’s treadmill platform has quietly become one of the most polished home workout experiences available.

The latest Peloton Cross Training Tread doesn’t radically reinvent the original Peloton Tread, launched in 2018 and updated in 2020, nor is it as nimble as some folding treadmill options on the market today, but it does introduce several upgrades that dramatically broaden its appeal.

Most notably, there’s now a 360-degree swivelling 21.5-inch touchscreen display that makes it easier to transition from running workouts to floor-based sessions, including strength, yoga, Pilates and recovery classes.

Alongside the hardware tweaks comes the debut of Peloton IQ, the brand’s new AI-powered coaching platform that analyses training habits, recovery, fitness goals and wearable data to offer more personalised workout recommendations.

The result is a treadmill that feels less like a standalone cardio machine and more like an all-in-one digital personal trainer.

Peloton Cross Training Tread review

Price and availability

Peloton announced its latest slate of hardware in October 2025, and its Cross Training Tread is available now at Peloton US, Peloton UK and Peloton AU, with prices from $3,295 / £3,500 / AU$5,000. The brand doesn't sell the machine directly through its German site.

However, the hardware cost is only part of the equation. To unlock the full experience, users will also need Peloton’s All-Access Membership, which costs $50 / £45 / AU$65 / €45 per month.

Without it, the treadmill effectively becomes a very expensive manual running machine with access to little more than the ‘Just Run’ mode and a handful of teaser workouts.

The membership at least provides access to Peloton’s enormous library of live and on-demand classes, supports up to 20 user profiles, and unlocks Peloton IQ’s personalised coaching tools.

Design and features

Physically, very little has changed from the previous Peloton Tread — and that’s no bad thing.

The 150 x 50cm running deck still feels stable, supportive and reassuringly premium underfoot, while the motor comfortably powers the belt up to 20km/h with a maximum incline of 12.5%.

The speed and incline dials remain among the best in the business, allowing for rapid adjustments during interval sessions without fumbling around with buttons mid-run.

Noise levels are also impressively controlled. During testing, average running noise hovered around 60dB (admittedly measured via a free iPhone app), which is roughly equivalent to normal conversation volume.

The biggest visual change is undoubtedly the new swivelling touchscreen. It transforms the treadmill from a dedicated running machine into a much more versatile workout hub, making it practical and easy to move between cardio, strength, and recovery sessions without shoehorning yourself into a corner.

I had to position the test unit in the corner of a home office, but the new display meant I could angle the screen so it faced the only remaining floor area around the tread.

As always, you will have to provide the dumbbells or other free weights. Unless, of course, you opt to spend even more money on a few sets that Peloton is more than willing to sell you.

A broader fitness approach is increasingly central to Peloton’s new strategy. Alongside marathon plans and HIIT workouts, the platform now includes rehabilitation sessions, injury-prevention programmes, mobility classes, breathwork, and even menopause-focused sessions developed in partnership with Halle Berry’s Respin Health.

Peloton IQ

The headline new feature is Peloton IQ, and, unlike many AI fitness tools currently flooding the market, this one actually feels useful.

It can be used as a standalone system, taking workout data feed from the Peloton itself. But once synced with Garmin or Apple Watch data, Peloton IQ builds a broader picture of training load, recovery, sleep quality and recent activity levels.

Over time, it starts recommending workouts that genuinely align with how fatigued (or fresh) you actually feel.

However, it doesn't go quite as deep as the tech found on the latest Peloton Cross Training Bike+, which uses a front-facing camera to track movements, count reps, and even step in to correct form.

During testing, I followed one of Peloton’s surprisingly hardcore Hyrox training programmes over several weeks, while also balancing gym sessions and team sports outside the platform.

Here, the AI system adapted its recommendations based on workload and recovery (with data from my Garmin watch), often suggesting lower-impact recovery sessions when training strain had clearly increased elsewhere, and even going so far as to suggest some injury prevention for creaking knees.

Crucially, the ecosystem works both ways. Peloton sessions are automatically synced back to Garmin Connect, helping maintain a complete overview of training data rather than fragmenting everything across separate platforms.

This also helps if you're like me and track things like sleep, hydration, and nutrition (sometimes, when I'm being good) to gain the most valuable Garmin insights.

That said, I couldn't help thinking that some rep-tracking and form cues courtesy of Peloton IQ wouldn't have gone amiss during the tough strength portions of each workout.

Alas, Peloton says it still has no plans to bring this tech to the Tread in the UK, which sort of makes sense, as it's difficult to set it up so the front-facing camera always gets a good look at you.

The Cross Training Tread is large, and even in my relatively big office space at home, I could only really set the screen up in one position that left enough floor space for press-ups, thrusters and squats.

Peloton workouts

Peloton’s instructors remain among the best out there, blending motivation, entertainment and coaching in a way that keeps workouts engaging even during longer sessions.

There’s also now an enormous amount of variety. Whether you want structured marathon training, brutal Hyrox conditioning, yoga recovery or quick lunchtime strength sessions, there’s almost certainly a class that fits your busy schedule.

And that’s what I love about it. You can fit a session into even the most demanding calendars and know it will have a positive impact on overall fitness levels.

Granted, the strength-training element is fairly limited to whatever weights you have lying around, and the high-intensity nature of most workouts runs counter to traditional bodybuilding schools of thought. But I’d argue that Peloton could easily slot into any regime as an additional cardio or strength top-up.

The platform’s gamified elements continue to work brilliantly too. Live leaderboards, achievements and competitive metrics all add enough dopamine to keep you coming back regularly.

Plus, there are actual games in the form of Peloton Lanebreak, which breaks with tradition by replacing the instructor with an arcade-style virtual world that encourages runners to match rhythms, run faster, and sprint harder, all with the aim of hitting high scores. It makes a nice change from typical Peloton proceedings and is surprisingly addictive.

Importantly, the Cross Training Tread doesn’t feel intimidating either. Peloton has done a good job of creating content for complete beginners through to experienced endurance athletes.

Drawbacks

The biggest obstacle remains price. Even with occasional discounts, this is still an extremely expensive treadmill once the £45 monthly subscription is factored in.

Unlike some rivals, Peloton’s hardware only really makes sense if you commit fully to the ecosystem, while accessories, such as an add-on fan, can really make the final bill mount up.

The machine itself is also huge. At 130kg and with a sizeable footprint, it demands a dedicated workout space and isn’t remotely practical for smaller homes or apartments.

There are also a few missing premium features that feel increasingly noticeable at this price point. There’s no decline functionality, the treadmill doesn’t fold, and the operating system remains frustratingly closed-off.

Entertainment apps are limited to Peloton-approved services like YouTube and Disney+, meaning there’s still no Spotify support or broader app downloads like you’ll find on some competing smart treadmills.

(This might change soon, though, now that Peloton workouts are available on Spotify.)

I also encountered a frustrating delivery experience during testing, with damaged units, incorrect addresses, and confusion about installation requirements from the third party Peloton now uses.

While this may not be universal, it undermines the otherwise polished, premium image the brand works so hard to maintain.

But I have been told the company still uses its own engineers for after-sales support, although a quick scan of disgruntled Reddit users paints a very varied picture of that service depending on where you live.

Verdict

The Peloton Cross Training Tread is still one of the most complete connected fitness experiences available today.

While the treadmill hardware itself remains very good rather than revolutionary, Peloton’s software ecosystem continues to set the benchmark for home fitness engagement.

The addition of Peloton IQ only strengthens that position, bringing genuinely helpful AI-powered coaching into an already excellent platform.

Yes, it’s expensive. Yes, it takes up a lot of space. And yes, the monthly subscription is basically mandatory.

But if you’re serious about building a long-term home fitness setup that goes far beyond simple treadmill running, the Peloton Cross Training Tread remains incredibly difficult to beat.

It’s also very hard not to get very addicted, which can only be seen as a good thing when trying to get fit, right?

Action camera innovation has plateaued slightly in the last couple of years, at least when it comes to traditional GoPro-style models. There is a physical limit to how small optics and components can be without compromising the minimum focusing distance, and higher resolutions and frame rates will only get people so excited.

The new battleground among compact camera brands, seemingly, is vlogging gimbals. DJI had immense success with its Osmo Pocket series, so much so that it became the number one action camera brand in Japan in 2025. The DJI Osmo Pocket 4 added 107GB of internal storage and 4K/240fps slow motion to the already excellent camera.

It was only a matter of time before other brands decided to get in on the action, and while there are quite a few companies trying to launch their own take on the concept, the one rival everyone's been waiting for is Insta360. The 360º camera expert has teased its upcoming Osmo Pocket rival for quite a while, but now, it's finally here.

I’ve been testing the flagship Luna Ultra for almost a month, and I’m thoroughly impressed with it. The camera borrows a fair amount of its design from the big rival; as with action cams, there are ergonomic limitations to vlogging gimbals. However, it offers a ton of exciting new features, not to mention the excellent specs and camera performance.

Insta360 Luna Ultra review

Price and availability

The Luna Ultra was officially announced on 10 June 2026 and is available to buy now in Cosmic Black and Stellar White at Insta360, Amazon, Best Buy, and select retailers worldwide for $769.99 (~£575 / €667 / AU$1,098). The company says availability in Germany will follow at a later date.

At the time of writing, it's unclear how much the unit will cost in markets other than the US. The DJI Osmo Pocket 4 retails for £445 / €499 / AU$769, but it lacks the second camera, unlike the Osmo Pocket 4P, which is yet to be released and therefore isn't officially priced yet.

(Of course, DJI's vlogging camera isn't available in the US, so Insta360 has a big advantage over its imaging rival with the Luna Ultra.)

Design and build quality

One thing I noticed immediately as I lifted the gimbal out of its box is just how substantial it feels. At 233g, it's hardly heavy, but it's more than 20% heavier than the Osmo Pocket 4 and taller and wider, with a robust camera unit.

The latter is understandable, considering there are two lenses on the Luna Ultra. The dual Leica Summicron lenses offer up to 12x zoom and 6x lossless zoom. There are also 2x and 3x zoom options, which I assume are cropped versions of the second, 6x zoom lens.

The Luna Ultra uses a 1-inch sensor, which is quite large for such a small camera, allowing more detail to be captured and better low-light performance. For comparison, the GoPro Mission 1 Pro, DJI Osmo Action 6, and the Osmo Pocket 4 all have the same sensor size. Of course, physical sensor size is one thing, but it certainly doesn’t mean all of these cameras perform the same way.

In the case of the Luna Ultra, the unit adds a "triple AI chip" setup, which includes a 4nm chip and dual imaging chips, for better low-light performance. Historically, Insta360 cameras have been criticised for being too noisy in low-light scenarios, sacrificing colour accuracy for brightness. The Luna Ultra’s 1-inch sensor definitely helps with this.

The Insta360 X5 already has a triple-chip architecture, but it’s different from the Luna Ultra’s. For one, the 360-degree camera uses a 5nm AI processor, while the vlogging camera swaps it for a newer 4nm AI chip alongside dual imaging processors. To take low-light performance even further, the Luna Ultra also has the 4K60fps PureVideo mode, a dedicated setting to enhance clarity in low-light situations.

Back to the physical specs of the camera, the Luna Ultra has an “industry-first” detachable controller that lets you use the panel as a remote control. I’m not 100% sure it’s necessary to have on a camera with gesture control; how often would you need to control the gadget remotely?

I found myself not really using the controller off-camera, only when I shot 360 panos, but that’s such a niche use case that it doesn’t really justify the structural danger a detachable control panel poses.

It’s a moving part and, by default, more prone to damage. The gimbal head is already a liability, so it makes little sense to add even more risky components to the mix. The spring or plastic buttons that hold the controller in place can break, and it’s also more likely that you’ll lose the panel somewhere, rendering your Luna Ultra unusable.

The controls are also more laggy when the panel is detached (not terribly, but still), especially if you’re playing around with the zoom. This could be down to my using an early software version, but if you think about it, the remote is a sliver of a device, so it will have limited space for transmission components. There will be compromises.

On that note, Insta360 came up with a solution, not just to protect the remote but the gadget as a whole. The case is quite basic and makes the Luna Ultra bulkier, but it certainly does a decent job of easing your concerns about chucking the gimbal in your bag. Plus, it has accessory slots, such as for the wide-angle lens, that attach magnetically. Sweet.

The button layout on the Luna Ultra is slightly different from that of the Osmo Pocket 4. In addition to the joystick and record button, Insta360 included a zoom slider at the lower end of the handle. The two customisable buttons are located at the bottom of the rotating display, a better solution than DJI’s, which hides them under the display in vertical mode.

Performance

The Luna Ultra can shoot 8K video at up to 30 fps and 4K slow-motion video at up to 120 fps, while the low-light PureVideo mode is 4K@60fps. In addition to high-resolution videos, the Luna Ultra handles colours well and can shoot in Dolby Vision.

Dolby Vision is a high-dynamic-range (HDR) imaging technology that is said to enable “dynamic optimisation for every scene, or even every individual frame.” One of the main benefits of the technology is that it’s used by other companies and apps, enabling a more seamless post-production process.

One very cool thing about the Luna Ultra’s zoom capabilities is that it can do macro photos. The minimum focusing distance is 15 cm (~5.9 inches), but with the 12x zoom (equivalent of a 240mm telephoto lens!), you’ll get plenty close to your subject. 12x zoom isn’t lossless, but the camera retains a significant amount of detail.

There is only one issue with macro photography. As of now, there is no focus peaking on the Luna Ultra, so it’s pretty much impossible to tell where the focus is on the tiny display in broad daylight, or even in a decently lit room. I hope this will be added soon via a software update!

(The above video was shot on the Luna Ultra.)

On the question of 8K footage, there are very few platforms where you can showcase videos with such high resolution, so it’s best to treat the feature as what it is: a tool that enables you to crop into footage without sacrificing 4K resolution. Plus, it’s useful for things such as 12x zoom, which, again, looks pretty crisp considering it’s only digital magnification.

I was very pleased with the Luna Ultra's photographic performance. The images aren’t as sharp as a DSLR or a mirrorless, but the camera unit is a lot smaller, so what do you expect? The camera can shoot in RAW, with the maximum resolution in UltraPhoto mode being 37MP.

One of the many benefits of the Luna Ultra’s 3-axis mechanical stabilisation (it also has Electronic Image Stabilisation) is that even when you’re zoomed in, the footage isn’t shaky and photos aren’t blurry, either. Try holding a mirrorless with a 240 mm equivalent telephoto lens attached with one hand, and tell me the Luna Ultra compact form factor isn’t impressive.

Videos look balanced, and the camera provides plenty of settings to tailor the footage to your liking. In Basic mode, you can adjust exposure (I’d recommend going down to -0.3 or even -0.7 EV as default) and choose between the many colour profiles provided by the Luna Ultra.

You’ll find three Leica-branded options, as well as film-style filters I enjoyed using on the GO 3S Retro Bundle. Positive and negative film, CC (Colour Chrome or Colour Color-Positive) film, and vintage film look are just some of the options. You can also shoot in Dolby Vision and I-Log if you prefer to adjust colour in post.

I’ll be 100 per cent honest: I haven’t been playing around with the professional colour modes, purely because the footage coming out of the Luna looks good as it is, especially in good lighting conditions.

As for low-light performance, I couldn’t spot a significant difference between standard video and PureVideo modes in dimly lit scenarios (not full-on night). As long as there is some light, the triple AI chip and large sensor will do their magic without triggering any special modes. I’ll report back once I've tried the Luna Ultra in an after-dark setting.

Battery and charging

Battery life is one of the Luna Ultra's stronger points. The camera uses a 1,550mAh battery, with Insta360 claiming up to four hours of runtime. While I didn't manage to completely drain it in a single session, my testing suggests that figure isn't unrealistic under lighter workloads.

Using a USB-C PD charger, the Luna Ultra jumped from 18% to 60% in just nine minutes and reached 77% after 16 minutes. The camera hit full charge in roughly 20 minutes, closely matching Insta360's claim of reaching 80% in 23 minutes.

During charging, power draw initially hovered around 42W before gradually tapering off as the battery filled. The body became slightly warm but never uncomfortably hot, with charging speeds occasionally dropping to protect the battery from overheating.

One interesting quirk is that the detachable control panel isn't prioritised during charging. The main camera unit is replenished first, before power is redirected to the controller.

For battery testing, I recorded 4K/60fps video continuously for 22 minutes, followed by a short cooldown period and then 44 minutes of 8K/30fps footage. After a combined 66 minutes of recording, the battery still had 59% remaining.

The camera became warm during extended recording sessions but never excessively so, and there were no overheating warnings or unexpected shutdowns.

Based on these results, the Luna Ultra appears capable of comfortably handling a full day of casual shooting, while the rapid charging speeds make topping up between filming sessions refreshingly painless.

Verdict

The Luna Ultra is a compelling first entry into the vlogging camera category from Insta360. Rather than producing a straightforward Osmo Pocket clone, the company has added enough genuinely useful features to make the camera feel distinct. The dual Leica lens setup, up to 12x zoom, strong macro capabilities and surprisingly photography-focused feature set give it a character of its own.

Video quality is excellent, with crisp 8K footage, Dolby Vision support, effective low-light performance and stabilisation that remains impressively smooth even when shooting at longer focal lengths. Add in fast charging, strong battery life and expandable storage, and the Luna Ultra feels like a mature product rather than a first attempt.

Not everything is perfect. The detachable controller feels more like a solution looking for a problem, and its removability introduces another potential point of failure on a device that already carries a delicate gimbal mechanism. The lack of focus peaking is also frustrating, particularly given how much emphasis Insta360 places on macro photography and zoom shooting.

Those shortcomings feel more like software and design niggles than fundamental flaws. What impressed me most during testing was how versatile the Luna Ultra proved to be. It's an excellent video camera, a surprisingly capable stills camera and a genuinely creative tool that encourages experimentation. If Insta360 can continue refining the software experience, DJI's dominance of the pocket gimbal market might not look quite so secure anymore.

It’s been more than 20 years since Keen launched its iconic Newport hiking sandal, which fast-tracked the New Hampshire company into the hiking footwear spotlight.

That was followed up a few years later by the burlier Targhee hiking boot, which took the best aspects of the Newport (a wide toe box and webbing design) and added more coverage. Though the leather Targhee has enjoyed decades of success, the last year has shown that the brand is ready to reach a more agile customer.

The first sign that the brand was interested in a more nimble approach for moving through the mountains came with the release of its first trail running shoe, the Keen Seek, in the summer of 2025.

Now, Keen has reimagined the Targhee boot as a fast-and-light hiker. It joins the ranks of the Adidas Terrex Free Hiker 2.0 and Hoka Kaha and embraces many of the qualities that make trail running shoes so popular for hiking: out-of-the-box comfort, a responsive foam midsole and a rocker sole.

Gone is the Nubuck leather upper and sturdy Luftcell midsole of days gone by, and in their place you’ll find a mesh upper and a high stack of lightweight foam.

This design isn’t a replacement for the more traditional Targhee; instead, it’s intended to sit alongside that design as an option for fastpacking, more casual trails and those who want to move from town to trail and back in a single day.

Does it have the goods for tracking the trails, or has it sacrificed durability and protection in pursuit of shedding grams? I’ve put in the miles in the Scottish Highlands wearing these boots this spring to find out.

Keen Targhee Apex review

Price and availability

The Keen Targhee Apex is available in both mid and shoe versions in a wide range of sizes (6 - 14 in men’s and 2.5 - 9.5 in women’s UK) directly from Keen.

It has an MSRP of £150 for the mid version, which I tested in the rather demure Abbey Stone/Birch colourway, though more exciting options are available. The shoe version retails for £140.

The recommended retail price is cheaper than similar alternatives from competing brands. The high-stack Hoka Kaha retails for £190, and the Adidas Terrex Free Hiker 2.0 hits the market at £180.

Design and materials

The profile of the Apex will look familiar if you’ve been paying attention to hiking boot trends over the last five years. A huge stack of KEEN.ReGENX foam adds 38mm to your heel height, hinting at both comfort and a propulsive ride on the trails, aided by the slight rocker design to the sole.

The sole geometry isn’t as exaggerated as Hoka’s Hubble Heel, but it does extend about 1cm from the back of the heel to act as a suspension system and help reduce strain on your knees and ankles.

Keen’s own-brand rubber outsole is arranged in a multi-directional lug pattern that looks more similar to that of a trail running shoe, and a diamond cutout in the centre helps to shed weight.

The streamlined ripstop mesh upper is reinforced with welded overlays that protect your feet. This is lined with Keen.Dry Aero, the brand’s in-house breathable waterproof liner.

In true Targhee style, there’s tons of room in the toe box, and the overall design leans towards those with wider feet, while there’s no arch support in the removable liner.

The lacing system extends to the base of your toes for more adjustability, and the mid-height cuff has just one eyelet, though this provides a fairly secure fit.

The whole package tips the scales at only 296g for the women’s size 4, which I tested. That lies somewhere in between my Adidas Terrex Free Hiker 2 and Helly Hansen Traverse boots. Basically, the only thing noticeably lighter would be a pair of trail running shoes like the Hoka Speedgoat 7s.

Comfort and performance

My first outing in these boots was a hike up Ben Lomond, which entails about 7.5 miles and 3,000ft of elevation gain. Clearly, the smart thing to do would have been to break them in first, but I took a gamble and wore them out of the box, and it paid off.

The cushioned midsole and roomy fit really make themselves known as the miles go by, and like a trainer, this is a boot that I can wear for hours on end without feeling miserable. The 14 mm drop is huge, but it doesn't result in toe-bashing the way it does on other steep shoes like the Terrex Freehiker.

The upper is flexible and really well-reinforced, with overlays creating a sort of bumper all the way around the edges of my feet.

With just one eyelet, I can still get a secure fit around the ankle, and even though my feet have lots of room, the fit around my midfoot feels pretty secure. There is no arch support, and I do have very high arches, so my feet move around just a little, but this could be fixed with an orthopaedic insert.

I can’t say I think about responsiveness in hiking footwear – it’s more of a quality I seek in running shoes – but the foam does make for more pleasurable walking and reduces foot fatigue.

The only real problem I have with the midsole is that the heel protrudes quite a bit, and several times, as I made my way down a rocky set of steps, it actually got stuck under the rock.

The rubber outsole is adequate for the type of walking this shoe is clearly designed for, meaning fairly straightforward paths, but I did notice the grip failed me on steeper sections that were slick and muddy.

I’ve worn these for several hikes, which isn’t enough to note any durability issues, but I am a little concerned that some of the midsole is exposed. On top of that, the diamond cutout tends to pick up stones and dirt, which is annoying.

I haven’t had these out in very rainy weather, but my treks usually include a few stream crossings. The membrane is watertight, but take care if you’re wading deeper, as it doesn’t extend to the ankle.

As a result of the membrane, on milder days, I’d say this shoe runs a little warm. It’s not enough to keep me from wearing it, but on a hot day, I’d be more likely to just go for my Speedgoats.

Verdict

The Keen Targhee Apex might not be perfect, but it’s among the best trainer-style hiking boots I’ve tried. It’s undeniably comfortable if you’re spending long days out there on the trail, and it’s got those technical details that you might miss if you wear trail running shoes, such as robust protection, waterproofing and some ankle support.

I think boots like these are the way much of the hiking public is going, and frankly, it’s smart of Keen to cater to those who want something between burly leather affairs and sandals. It can go the distance, as long as you’re not looking at too much technical terrain.

Also consider

The Targhee Apex is built for speed, comfort and day-long wear straight out of the box. The Danner Mountain Light II takes the opposite approach. It's significantly heavier and requires more commitment, but rewards that with exceptional durability, greater stability on uneven ground and a construction designed to last for years. If you regularly tackle rugged trails or carry heavier loads, the Danner is the more robust option.

The Moab Speed 2 Mid is probably the closest rival in spirit to the Targhee Apex. Both blend trail-running comfort with hiking-boot protection, but the Merrell feels slightly more refined underfoot and offers a similarly lightweight, cushioned ride. The Keen counters with a roomier toe box and more substantial toe protection, making it a strong choice for hikers who prioritise comfort above all else.

2026 is the year of the portable fan! As T3’s Home Editor, I’ve tested my fair share of tower, desktop and pedestal fans, but this year, I’ve been inundated with portable, handheld fans, like the new Dyson HushJet Mini Cool.

Dyson announced its first-ever portable, handheld fan in April 2026, and it quickly caught a lot of people’s attention. The main reason is the design is quite unusual – something Dyson is well known for – with the star-shaped fan top looking like the sandworm from Dune.

But after spending a few weeks with the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool, it’s quickly become my go-to fan for quick, powerful cooling – here’s why.

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool review: price and availability

The Dyson HushJet Mini Cool fan is available to buy for £99.99 / $99.99 at Dyson and select retailers, like Amazon, Currys, Argos and John Lewis. It comes in Carnelian/Sky, Ink/Cobalt and Stone/Blush colours – I tried the latter. The Dyson HushJet Mini Cool also has a two year warranty.

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool review: design and features

Described as a multi-functional fan, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool can be used absolutely anywhere. Measuring 38mm and weighing just 212g, it can stand on your desk, be held in your hand, fit in your bag and even worn around your neck.

Powered by Dyson’s HushJet projection, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool delivers up to 65,000 rpm of cooling air without turbulence. It comes with five speed settings and a boost mode which can ‘turbo-charge’ the airflow up to 25m/s. The Dyson HushJet Mini Cool also features an acoustically engineered motor and anti-vibration rubber mount that work to reduce the noise it makes.

Another bladeless model from Dyson, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool has a honeycomb mesh over the fan for extra protection and to keep everything clean. The tip of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool has a star shape, and it can be twisted around by 360 degrees so you can have the cool air pointing at or away from you.

Aside from the strange-looking tip of the fan, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool has a simple ‘body’ with an on/off switch and + and - button to increase or decrease the fan speed. When turned on, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool has an LED indicator atop the speed button which lights up to show you the setting. It also lights up when charging.

The Dyson HushJet Mini Cool comes with a USB-C cable for charging and a charging stand, a travel pouch and a neck dock. It takes three hours to charge and its 5000 mAh battery capacity gives the fan up to six hours of runtime on its lowest setting.

The ‘neck dock’ slips onto the fan and acts as a necklace so you can wear the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool round your neck for on-the-go use. Dyson also offers other accessories like the grip clip or universal mount but these are sold separately.

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool review: performance

I mainly tested the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool during a UK heatwave, so it came in more than handy. It easily fit into my work backpack and handbags for on-the-go use, and its easy controls meant it was up and running in seconds for quick cooling relief.

I liked the amount of settings that the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool had. With five speed settings available, I found all of them to be extremely powerful, even at the lowest speed. Compared to other portable fans I’ve tried, like the Shark ChillPill, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool felt a bit simple and limited – but basic is best sometimes.

The battery life was good, although the higher the speed, the quicker the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool will run out – boost mode will only give you about an hour of use. However, as the other settings on the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool were powerful already, I didn’t find myself needing to use the higher, more intense speeds. The projection of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool was also extremely impressive, and it has the strongest output of any recent fans I’ve tried.

The design of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool won’t be for everyone, but in general, I liked the way it looked. Its lightweight, slim dimensions made it easy to hold, and the base of the fan was flat so it was easy for it to stand up on my desk for hands-free cooling. I personally didn’t feel the need for the neck dock accessory but it could appeal to some people, and it’s nice to have as an option.

Although Dyson engineered its motor to have better acoustics, I did find the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool to be very loud when in action. Increasing from speed one to speed two saw a huge step up in noise, and the fifth setting is just as loud as a regular fan. It’s definitely not a fan that will blend into the background, that’s for sure.

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool review: verdict

In terms of power, projection and ease of use, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool is hard to beat. The design might be unusual but it’s comfortable to hold and travel with, and has a good 360-degree swivel head to offer more personalised cooling controls.

The five speed settings of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool offer impressive cooling, although the sound is pretty deafening. It might be too simple to some, especially as more fans are offering misting and night modes, but sometimes simplicity is key which is the case with the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool.

Compared to other Dyson fans, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool is the cheapest fan – and product – that the brand has introduced. It’s also pretty affordable when put against other portable fans, so you’ll like the price, too.

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool review: alternatives to consider

An amazing portable fan that also came out in 2026 is the Shark ChillPill. Another handheld option, the Shark ChillPill has three attachments which turns it into a 3-in-1 fan – high-speed, mister and cooling plate. It’s more expensive than the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool at £129.99 / $129.99, but it offers a lot more features.

If you’re a diehard Dyson fan, our guide to the best Dyson fans will show you the greatest options you can get, from hybrid fan-purifiers to smaller, desktop fans.

When people think about the best smart lights, it's usually the big names that come to mind. Brands like Philips Hue and Govee tend to dominate the conversation, offering feature-packed products that can completely transform a room. The downside, of course, is that they often come with equally eye-watering price tags.

That said, you're simply looking for an affordable smart lamp that can add a splash of colour and atmosphere to your home without costing a fortune, Meross' latest offering could be one worth paying attention to.

Having already reviewed a wide range of smart lights, I was keen to see whether the Meross Smart Table Lamp could actually compete with more established rivals. After several days of testing it as part of my daily smart home setup, here's how it performed.

Price and availability

The Meross Smart Table Lamp is priced at £35.99/$46.99 and is available in four regional variants, each supplied with the appropriate power adaptor for the UK, US, EU or Australia.

You can buy it directly from Meross or via Amazon, making it widely available and one of the more affordable smart lamps on the market.

Unboxing and set up

When it comes to setting up the Meross Smart Table Lamp, you can use it entirely through the touch controls on top of the unit, but to unlock its full potential you'll want to connect it to the Meross app. In truth, most of the core functions can be controlled directly on the lamp itself, but the app gives you far more precision over colours, brightness levels and automation settings.

After plugging the lamp in, setup involved downloading the Meross app, selecting the Smart Table Lamp from the Ambient Lamp category and following the on-screen instructions. I connected it to my Wi-Fi network through Apple's Home app integration, and the whole process took less than a minute. Once connected, the lamp appeared instantly within the Meross app and was ready to use.

I also linked it to my Amazon Alexa setup, which, as readers of my Echo Show 8 review will know, sits at the heart of my smart home. This was equally simple, with the Meross app prompting me to connect Alexa almost immediately after setup.

Once linked, I gained access to an even wider range of colour controls and automation options through the Alexa app. One of the first routines I created was having the lamp automatically switch on at sunset using a warm orange glow that mimics the colours of the evening sun, and it's quickly become one of my favourite automations.

Design and features

Unlike many smart lights that lean heavily into futuristic aesthetics, Meross has opted for a much cleaner and more understated design. The Smart Table Lamp features a simple cylindrical shape with a frosted white diffuser that softens the light and creates an even glow throughout the room.

The lamp is made primarily from plastic and feels very lightweight, but importantly doesn't feel cheap. In fact, the diffuser does a surprisingly good job of making the light feel more premium than the price would suggest.

Rather than cluttering the design with multiple buttons, Meross has included a single touch-sensitive control on the top of the lamp. A short tap turns the lamp on and off, another tap cycles through colours, and a long press adjusts brightness. It's intuitive and easy to use, particularly if you just want to make quick adjustments without reaching for your phone.

As mentioned, the lamp works with major smart home platforms including Apple Home, Google Home and Amazon Alexa, making it easy to slot into an existing smart home setup. Once connected, voice control works exactly as you'd expect, and the lamp can be incorporated into wider smart home automations alongside other devices.

Performance

For the money, I've been very impressed by the Meross Smart Table Lamp. Whilst the physical controls are fairly basic, its smart home integration is excellent. Once connected to the Meross app or your smart home platform of choice, you gain precise control over colours, brightness and schedules, which is where the lamp really stands out.

Throughout testing, I found the app responsive and reliable. Changes happen almost instantly, with virtually no delay between selecting a setting and seeing the lamp respond. The range of colours is impressive at this price point, and the diffused lighting creates a high-quality glow that feels much more premium than you'd expect.

The automations I set up also worked flawlessly, consistently triggering at the correct times without missing a beat. If anything, my only real wish was that the lamp was portable and included a battery, but that's a fairly minor complaint given the price. The power cable is discreet, the plug is compact, and neither really detracts from the overall experience.

Verdict

The Meross Smart Table Lamp proves you don't need to spend a fortune to get an impressive smart lighting experience. Its simple design and reliable smart home connectivity make it incredibly easy to live with, and its responsive controls, huge choice of colours and dependable automations mean it quickly starts to feel like a much more expensive product than its price tag suggests.

That said, the physical controls are fairly basic, and those looking for advanced lighting effects or a portable design may find themselves wanting more. However, for anyone after an affordable smart lamp that's a pleasure to use day-to-day, the Meross Smart Table Lamp punches well above its weight.

Alternative to consider

The closest competitor is probably the Govee Table Lamp 2 Pro x Sound by JBL. It's significantly more expensive, but that extra cost brings an integrated speaker, more advanced lighting effects and access to Govee's larger ecosystem.

However, if you're simply looking for an affordable smart lamp with excellent app controls, smart home compatibility and great lighting quality, I'd still recommend the Meross Smart Table Lamp over a lot of other choices.

Electric city bikes have come a pretty long way in the past few years. What used to be chunky, heavy bits of kit have slimmed down into something you'd actually want to be seen on (and can manoeuvre around without giving yourself a hernia).

The best electric bikes now blend seamlessly into the urban cycling world, offering motor assistance without added bulk.

Canyon, the German brand best known for its road and mountain bikes, recently threw its hat into this ring with the Citylite:ON, a city-focused e-bike with a distinctly Dutch-inspired design.

It’s built around a Bosch Performance Line motor and boasts a low-maintenance Gates belt drive and a long list of commuter-friendly features, including integrated lights, a frame lock, mudguards, and a MIK HD rear rack.

I've been riding it around Manchester for the past few months to see whether it delivers on that promise. Here’s how I got on.

Canyon Citylite:ON review

Price and availability

The Canyon Citylite:ON is available to buy now, direct from Canyon's website, priced at £2,799 in the UK and €2,999 in the EU. Canyon sells directly to consumers only, so you won't find it in bike shops, though the brand now has a network of over 500 European service partners who can build and maintain bikes bought directly online.

At the time of writing, the Citylite:ON doesn't appear to be available in the US or Australia. If you're based elsewhere, £2,799 converts to roughly $3,600 / AU$5,400, but without official availability in those areas, you'd likely be looking at import costs on top.

For context, this puts it in a competitive space alongside commuter e-bike rivals such as Cube, Riese & Muller and VanMoof, though Canyon's direct-to-consumer model means you're generally getting more bike for the money than you would from a traditional retailer.

In terms of accessories, there's also an optional front rack (around £50), a wireless charging adapter for the SP Connect phone mount (also around £50), and a Bosch Range Extender (250Wh, around £470) if you need more juice for longer rides.

Design and build

On first impression, the Citylite:ON looks super smart. It sports a clean, modern design with a distinctly Dutch-bike feel, thanks to its high stem, swept-back handlebars and relaxed, upright riding position.

It seems Canyon took inspiration from the Amsterdam cycling scene for this one, which is a nice touch and gives it an element of class. Meanwhile, the aluminium frame and carbon fork keep things light (around 22kg with accessories, which is impressive for a fully kitted city e-bike), and the whole thing looks nice and tidy thanks to internally routed cables and neatly integrated components.

The accessories list is pretty generous for the price. You get full-length mudguards, a rear kickstand, integrated front and rear lights (the rear includes a brake light function), an Abus frame lock, a Selle Royal comfort saddle, a suspension seatpost, and a 27kg-rated MIK HD rear rack that's compatible with panniers, baskets and even child seats.

There's also an SP Connect phone mount on the stem, which is helpful for thoise needing something to snap their phone or GPS to with ease. The Gates belt drive is another feature worth highlighting, as it means no greasy chain, no occasional oiling and therefore way less maintenance. After years of getting oil on my trousers or legs from traditional bike chains, this is a very welcome upgrade.

The Bosch Purion 200 display and controller are among the biggest smart features here. It sits neatly on the handlebars and is intuitive to use, while the companion Bosch Flow app connects effortlessly and adds a premium layer of control that’s actually useful.

You can customise power modes, check ride data, monitor battery levels from your phone, map your routes and even control security features. It all feels very polished and well thought through.

Now, here comes the negative stuff. Firstly, my review unit arrived with a bent front axle. While annoying, it wasn’t a huge deal. Canyon's PR team were prompt in sending a replacement, which was appreciated, but it wasn't a great start.

Then I discovered the plastic battery cover panel on the underside of the frame wouldn't clip back into place properly. I was sent a replacement for that, too, which also wouldn’t stay in place. After closer inspection, it turned out that the connector on the bike frame above the battery that holds the panel in place seemed compromised.

By this point, I didn't have the energy to go back to Canyon for a third time, so I strapped the cover on with a cable tie. It works, but it's hardly the premium experience you'd expect from a supposedly premium e-bike.

I'm confident Canyon would replace the bike outright if a paying customer had the same experience, and this could absolutely be a one-off issue with a review unit.

But I can only go on my own experience, and for me, it raised real questions about the build quality of certain components, particularly the plastic parts around the battery housing.

One other design niggle I had isn't specific to my unit. In theory, the integrated rear wheel lock is a brilliant feature. But in practice, the key can only be removed when the lock is engaged, which means it stays in the lock while you're riding.

If you've got other keys on a keyring, they dangle against your leg as you pedal. It's a small thing, but it's an annoying detail that shouldn’t be there for an almost-£3k bike.

Performance and features

When it comes to the actual ride, the Citylite:ON is impressive. The Bosch Performance Line motor delivers 75Nm of torque and provides smooth, responsive assistance that feels natural rather than jerky.

It matches your pedalling effort well, and the four power modes (Eco, Tour, Auto and Turbo) are easy to cycle through via the Purion 200 controller. Auto mode is the standout for city riding, adjusting assistance based on conditions so you barely have to think about it.

The bike is noticeably light for an e-bike, and you can really feel that during a ride. It's nimble, easy to steer through traffic, and manageable to carry up a few steps or lift onto a bike rack, which makes a huge difference. The upright riding position gives you excellent visibility in urban traffic, and the wide Maxxis DTR-1 tyres provide decent grip and stability.

While the belt drive paired with the Shimano Nexus 5-speed hub gear is mostly smooth and hassle-free, I did experience a few clunky downshifts under load, which is a known trait of these hubs. It's nothing major, but worth mentioning if you're coming from a derailleur setup.

Another thing that you’ll notice while riding is the lack of proper suspension. The suspension seatpost does take the edge off minor bumps, but on rougher roads and Manchester's less-than-perfect tarmac, you do feel a lot of the vibration coming through.

It's not uncomfortable on short rides, but on longer stretches over poorly maintained roads, it becomes noticeable. On the other hand, this lack of full suspension helps keep the weight down, so it's a trade-off that makes sense for a city bike.

When it comes to battery performance, the 400Wh Bosch CompactTube option shipped with this Citylite:ON is the lightest in Bosch's range at around 2kg, but the modest capacity does feel somewhat limiting.

Canyon claims up to 90km of range, but in real-world use with a mix of power modes and hilly Manchester terrain, you can expect significantly less. If longer rides are your thing, the optional Bosch Range Extender adds another 250Wh but will set you back close to £500.

Nevertheless, the integrated lighting system is a nice touch. The Supernova Starstream Mini headlight sits flush with the handlebars and is bright for its size, while the rear strip light on the rack, with brake-light function, I found, is all you need for great visibility.

Verdict

The Canyon Citylite:ON is a bike I really wanted to love. On its best days, it's a brilliant city e-bike, touting a light, smooth, well-equipped ride, with superb Bosch motor and app integration. The overall design is attractive and modern, and the belt drive is another very welcome feature.

But I can't pretend my experience was without issues. A bent front axle on arrival and a compromised battery cover connector that I ended up cable-tying in place are not the kind of things you expect from a £2,799 bike.

Add in the baffling decision to leave the key dangling in the wheel lock while riding, and the overall impression is of a bike with great ideas that doesn't always execute them as well as it should.

If Canyon can nail the build quality on these finer details, the Citylite:ON would be a no-brainer. But based on my own experience, it's a bike with a lot of potential that doesn't quite deliver the polish its price tag suggests.

The Oral-B iO range has quickly become one of the most recognisable names among the best electric toothbrushes, offering everything from affordable entry-level models to premium brushes packed with smart features.

Over the years, we've tested the Oral-B iO2, iO3 and iO7, giving us a good understanding of where each model sits within the lineup. Now, the iO6 has arrived for review, positioning itself as a premium mid-range option that still commands a significant price tag.

This raises the question of whether the iO6 offers enough over its cheaper siblings to justify the extra cost, or are you better off saving your money and avoiding it altogether. After several weeks of testing, here's how the Oral-B iO6 performed.

Price and availability

The Oral-B iO6 carries an RRP of £300, but like many Oral-B toothbrushes, it's frequently and generously discounted. At the time of writing, it's available for around £105 at both Currys and AO, making it a far more tempting proposition than its original price suggests.

It's available in Black, Pink or Silver Grey, and comes bundled with an iO brush head, travel case, magnetic charger and a hygienic brush head holder.

Design and features

The Oral-B iO6 sits firmly towards the premium end of Oral-B's lineup. The handle is slim, smooth and comfortable to hold, with a matte finish that feels premium in the hand whilst providing extra grip when wet.

At the centre of the handle is a small interactive black-and-white display that shows brushing modes, battery information, brush head replacement reminders and post-brushing feedback.

Whilst it's not as advanced as the colour display found on the more expensive iO8 and iO10 models, it still adds a premium touch and makes navigating settings far easier than relying on a collection of flashing LEDs. The toothbrush itself is controlled via two simple buttons – one for power and one for cycling through brushing modes.

The headline feature of the iO6 is Oral-B's magnetic iO drive system. Rather than relying solely on the oscillating movement found on older Oral-B brushes, the iO6 combines oscillation and rotation with gentle micro-vibrations. The result is a brushing experience that feels noticeably smoother and quieter whilst still delivering a deep clean.

The iO6 offers five cleaning modes, including Gum Care, Intense, Daily Clean, Sensitive and Whiten. There's also a 360-degree pressure sensor, with the illuminated ring around the neck of the brush changing colour depending on how hard you're brushing. Red indicates too much pressure, green confirms you're brushing correctly and white suggests you're not applying enough.

The iO6 also includes Bluetooth connectivity and works alongside the Oral-B app. Once connected, the app can provide real-time coaching, track brushing coverage and help ensure you're spending enough time on all areas of your mouth. For users who enjoy data-driven health tracking, it can even integrate with Apple Health.

Other premium features include a built-in two-minute timer, quadrant pacing to ensure even brushing, brush head replacement reminders and personalised brushing feedback.

Performance

For me, the cleaning performance is where the Oral-B iO6 really stands out, and throughout testing, my teeth consistently felt exceptionally clean after every brush. I found myself using the Daily Clean mode most often, and it struck a great balance between power and comfort.

One of my favourite features during testing was the built-in display. It might sound like a small addition, but being able to see exactly how long I'd been brushing for and how much time I had left made a strong difference to my routine. The feedback screen at the end of each session also made the whole experience feel more interactive and engaging.

I also really liked the illuminated pressure-sensing ring, which provides instant feedback if you're brushing too hard. Combined with Oral-B's clever iO brush heads, which gradually fade in colour as they wear out and need replacing, it's a very easy toothbrush to use and maintain.

The included travel case is also great, particularly for frequent travellers. It keeps everything protected in a suitcase, making the iO6 easy enough to throw into a bag for weekends away. I'm not entirely sure why there's space for two brush heads, but having a back up is always a good thing I suppose?

That said, there are a few frustrations. My biggest gripe is the lack of a proper stand or dock. Instead, the toothbrush sits directly on your bathroom surface, which can quickly become messy after brushing. Having recently used the magnetic pebble included with the SURI 2.0, it's something I noticed immediately and missed throughout testing.

Battery performance was another disappointment. A full recharge from empty took around 24-30 hours, which feels incredibly slow by modern standards, and once fully charged, I was only getting around one and a half to two weeks of use. Compared to rivals like the SURI 2.0 and Quip Lite, which can often last between 30 and 50 days between charges, that's a significant difference.

Factor in the relatively high price tag and the fact there are cheaper toothbrushes elsewhere in the iO range that deliver a very similar clean, and it becomes harder to fully justify the premium.

Verdict

The Oral-B iO6 delivers an excellent clean, feels premium in the hand and includes useful additions such as the interactive display, pressure-sensing ring and intelligent brush head reminders. Throughout testing, it consistently left my teeth feeling polished and fresh, whilst making the whole brushing experience more engaging than most electric toothbrushes manage.

However, the lengthy charging time, relatively average battery life and lack of a dedicated stand feel difficult to overlook at this price point. Add in the fact that cheaper models elsewhere in the iO lineup deliver a very similar cleaning experience, and the iO6 becomes harder to recommend at full retail price.

That said, if you can find it on one of Oral-B's frequent discounts, the iO6 becomes a much stronger proposition. For those who want a premium electric toothbrush packed with useful smart features, but don't feel the need to stretch to the flagship models, it's one of the strongest options in the range.

Alternatives to consider

If you like the idea of the Oral-B iO6 but don't think you'll use all of its extra features, I'd strongly recommend looking at the Oral-B iO2 instead. It's a much simpler toothbrush, but still offers three brushing modes, a quadrant timer, pressure sensor and travel case, whilst costing significantly less.

Another strong alternative is the Philips Sonicare 7100. It's also on the pricier side, but offers more advanced customisation options and delivers a different style of clean thanks to its sonic brushing technology rather than Oral-B's oscillating approach.

If you’re newer to camping and backpacking, you might not know that sleeping outdoors used to be an exercise in extreme suffering. Until two former Boeing engineers and backpackers invented the self-inflating camping mat, that is.

Patented in the early 1970s as the first Therm-a-Rest pad, the self-inflating mattress added air to the traditional foam pads and comfort in camp was born.

In reality, it took a few decades for Therm-a-Rest to perfect these pads, but these days there are tons of options that are ideal for a night under the stars. From my first Therm-a-Rest, acquired 20 years ago, which was a rather slender and rough affair, to my deep-dish Therm-a-Rest Neoloft, I’ve really appreciated the Seattle brand’s commitment to honing its craft.

I love camping, and I love sleeping well, so when I was offered the chance to test the updated Therm-a-Rest Trail Pro, I immediately said yes.

Straight away, I could tell that the Trail Pro emphasises comfort and durability. I can feel that it’s packed with lots of foam for plushness and has a really high-quality face fabric, plus a robust construction.

That said, it’s not especially light or packable, but its mummy-shaped design does reduce space and weight. And it has the word “Trail” in the name. So is it meant for backpacking, or car camping?

I took the Trail Pro on a hiking trip to the Isle of Mull to get to the bottom of this puzzling pad. I was travelling around the island by car, so I didn’t need to worry about lugging it on my back. I did pack it in my backpack, along with my tent and clothing, for organisational purposes, and used it for wild camping in my tiny backpacking tent.

Therm-a-Rest Trail Pro Sleeping Pad review

Price and availability

The Therm-a-Rest Trail Pro is available in Regular size, which I tested, with an MSRP of £135 at third-party retailers such as Ultralight Outdoor Gear in the UK and $160 at REI in the US. It sells for €150 in the EU and around AU$350 in Australia.

For an extra £10 / $10, you can grab an extra 15cm of width in the Wide version, and for reasons I’ll discuss below, that’s what I would recommend.

That pricing is on par with the truly excellent Big Agnes Rapide SL, which is about the best pad I’ve tested, and more than the Rab Exosphere 3.5, which I recently tested and is very comfortable, less bulky and lighter than this one.

Compared with other Therm-a-Rest pads in the non-ultralight range, the Neoloft is smaller when packed, wider and thicker when inflated, but costs considerably more at £250 / $250 / €300 / AU$390.

Design and materials

Pads built for comfort often come in rectangular designs that provide more sleeping surface, but the Trail Pro comes in a mummy shape, which cuts down on weight and bulk while still leaving room in my tiny backpacking tent.

This design also helps trap heat more effectively. This pad has a 4.4 R-value, which makes it a viable option for year-round use (here in the UK, anyway).

Insulation is largely provided by a very healthy dose of foam. There is a thin, continuous layer of foam with ridges of thicker foam that I can feel even when the pad is deflated. These layers are nestled between air ridges in a design that Therm-a-Rest calls Stratacore because it mimics parallel layers of rock stacked on top of one another.

While the thick foam core keeps you well suspended off the ground, the 50D polyester stretch-knit fabric is noticeably more comfortable and higher quality than most pads I’ve tested. It feels positively lovely against my skin and doesn’t make a sound when I roll over.

All of this means that the Regular size I tested weighs a hefty 774g on the scale and packs down to only 28 x 22 cm. Will it fit in a 65L backpack like my Cascade Design Flex Capacitor for a multi-day trek? Sure, but it will take up a lot more valuable space than my Big Agnes Rapide SL.

One brownie point I wanted to mention is that this pad is made in Ireland, so while it doesn’t list any recycled materials, for UK campers it does cut down on transportation-related emissions enormously compared to pads manufactured in Asia.

Inflation process

I’ve loved the WingLock valve on other Therm-a-Rest pads, and on this one, as soon as I open it, I hear the air whooshing in and see the pad inflate within seconds.

After that, it takes about 8-10 puffs to fully inflate it, which is more than on pads like the Rab Eoxsphere 3.5, but it is a larger pad. As it gets fuller, the air tends to want to leak out between puffs, but it’s easy enough to manage.

I usually really like the deflation process with the WingLock too, which means most of the air whooshes out with a twist of the valve, but I think the ridge design of this pad traps more air than some, so it takes a little extra squeezing while rolling to get it out.

Performance and comfort

Once I got this pad blown up, there was no denying how plush it felt. It’s one of those pads I can kneel on without any part of me touching the ground, which usually bodes really well for side sleeping. However, I really didn’t sleep well on this pad.

At 183cm long, there’s no danger of my feet hanging off the end, but it feels really narrow, and at 5’4”, I am not a big human. On paper, it’s as wide as my Rab Exosphere, but it’s not as stable. It’s not exactly like sleeping on a boat, but every time I changed position, I felt like I was going to tumble off it.

I couldn’t quite put my finger on why this was happening, but after a little research, it seems that horizontal baffles tend to reduce stability compared to air-sprung cells like those in my Sea to Summit Ultralight XR. Perhaps this combined with the lack of sidewalls is what made me feel like I was going to topple off it all night? I definitely wasn’t as impressed as I thought I’d be.

In the morning, I was worried it would be one of those pads that never go back in their stuff sacks when I saw how big it was, rolled up. Fortunately, Therm-a-Rest designs its stuff sacks with compression straps these days, so I could quite painlessly slide it back in and then secure it.

It fits in my Helly Hansen Relay pack, which is 42L, alongside my tent and spare clothes, so I believe I could technically bring it backpacking, but with so many smaller pads like the Big Agnes Rapide SL available, I’m not sure why I would.

Verdict

The Therm-a-Rest Trail Pro isn’t a bad sleeping pad by any stretch of the imagination, but it does suffer somewhat from an identity crisis.

It’s at once a bit too bulky and heavy to be a realistic option for backpacking, but it doesn’t quite offer the real estate I want for a car-camping pad. It’s also not as stable as other designs, so if you tend to change position a lot when you sleep, you might want to consider an air-sprung pad.

When there are other plush pads on the market that are more backpacking-friendly (like the Big Agnes Rapide SL) and car camping pads like the Therm-a-Rest Neoloft that give you more sleeping room, it’s tricky to make a good case for this one, even with its perks.

If you like the idea of a comfortable pad in a mummy-shaped design and you only plan to go car camping, I’d recommend the Wide option to improve your sleep.

Also consider

The Big Agnes Rapide SL is the obvious choice for anyone who likes the Trail Pro's comfort but wants something genuinely suited to carrying on their back. The Regular version weighs just 597g and packs down to be dramatically smaller than the Trail Pro, yet still offers excellent comfort, impressive stability, and a generous 3.5-inch thickness.

If weight and pack size aren't priorities, the Therm-a-rest NeoLoft is the sleeping pad the Trail Pro wishes it could be. It has a huge sleeping surface, 4.6-inch thickness, quiet construction and exceptional comfort. Unlike the Trail Pro, it fully commits to the comfort-first approach, offering a wider, more stable platform that feels much closer to a real mattress.

I've been reviewing the best ANC headphones for many years now – and it's rare that a pair of in-ears stands out enough for me to jump up and pay attention. I'm usually too much of an over-ears guy, ultimately.

But then Bose's 2nd Gen version of its QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds are no standard 'buds by any means. These offer the pinnacle of active noise-cancelling (ANC) in an in-ear format – which I've found very comfortable to wear for long periods, too.

However, that "2nd Gen" badge might not mean quite as much as you'd hope, for these earbuds aren't dramatically different from the original QC Ultra Earbuds model, as I'll get into below.

However, a March 2026 firmware update further enhanced the ANC controls. And, having used the QC Ultra Earbuds 2 for a week for this review, my initial state of 'nothing but impressed' has only been further reinforced. Here's why Bose still reigns supreme.

Price & Availability

The Bose QC Ultra Earbuds 2 launched in the summer of 2025, with some markets only receiving them towards the later part of that year. With a key 2026 firmware update having rolled out in March, these are still Bose's most flagship earbuds – and just as relevant now as at launch.

Price-wise, things have also improved over time. The £299 / $299 / AU$450 launch price has dropped, with some pretty strong discounts at the time of writing – as you can see in the shopping widget above. That closes the gap somewhat between the original model and this 2nd Gen release.

What's New?

• New colour options: Deep Plum, Desert Gold, Midnight Violet
• Adds wireless charging to case
• New 'Cinema Mode' preset
• Adjusted ANC profile

To look at there's no difference between the QC Earbuds Ultra 2 and the original version – unless you purchased one of the more standout new colourways, as listed above, which join the staple of Black and White Smoke.

The same design is matched with the same weight as previous. No surprise, as the battery capacity within these 'buds and the included charging case also sees no change. There is, however, wireless charging for the latter, which for the original product was an add-on accessory option only.

Aside from improved earwax guards, it's otherwise largely software-based changes, with a new Cinema Mode preset added, and an adjusted ANC profile and Aware Mode improvements now part of the package.

While I found that in the equivalent over-ear Headphones Ultra 2 this made for a weaker ANC experience overall, in the Earbuds Ultra 2 it's actually an improvement. The new adjustable Noise Control slider can be manually set as you please in custom settings, giving you full control if you wish.

Design & Usability

As the idiom goes: "if it ain't broke, don't fix it". Bose had really hit the nail on the head with the original QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds, so the 2nd Gen model treads the very same path – with at least equal success.

While initially I thought the 'buds looked rather large, this scale doesn't affect the comfort or fit. I've found even long periods of wear over many hours very comfortable indeed, while a trio of eartips included in the box ensures you can find the correct seal for your ears.

Each protruding silicone eartip is soft and comfortable, complemented by a stability band edging that's made of the same material. That means when these buds are in your ear, they're well and truly there to stay.

Even with motion I've found these earbuds to stay in firmly, contrary to what the visual appearance may suggest. They can be easily controlled via touch directly from the ear-mounted position, too, with the app educating you on those actions.

The app is a key part of the usability, as this is the gateway to accessing the Modes, adjusting Noise Cancellation (ANC), equalisation (EQ), Immersive Audio processing, and selecting your Source, while also being able to see the battery charge level of each earbud and the charging case.

By default you're presented with Quiet, Aware, Immersion and Cinema. Those cater for: full ANC; auto-adjusted passthrough using Bose's ActiveSense tech; spatial enhanced output; and three-dimensional audio when paired with a TV viewing experience.

But as you can create custom extras, this general overview can be manipulated as you please. Personally, I don't use the Aware option, as I'm not a big fan of passthrough in ANC modes.

That said, the 2nd Gen product has gone at lengths to ensure its ActiveSense is more subtly responsive than in the original product, rather than making any abrupt changes based on ambient noise spikes.

Sound Quality & ANC

The real treat with the QC Ultra Earbuds 2 is the overall sound quality. That's important, too, as many competitors continue to up their game – including the likes of Technics' AZ100.

Just as said of the original Ultra Earbuds, the 2nd Gen model continues to deliver "astounding audio" with great fidelity. Bass is abundant, which is a Bose signature trademark, hitting those low notes to such dizzying degree that you might not expect it from a pair of in-ears.

Bose is also a dab hand when it comes to processing, too, which isn't something that many audio-makers have got quite as correct. Here it's Bose's Immersive Audio tech that I really enjoy, subtly enhancing the soundstage to feel more three-dimensional – even 'moving' as you physically move your head throughout the space (a setting that you can turn off as you please).

That excellent audio signature is one part of the Bose puzzle, but it's the ANC that really ramps these 'buds up a notch. The brand has been very, very good at delivering cancellation that's so considerable that ambient sounds you'd be sure you'd hear when wearing them can all but disappear.

I've used these earbuds on trains and planes, at my desk or when walking at lunchtimes, and regardless of the scenario they just consistently deliver. Some may prefer the ActiveSense tech takeover in Aware mode, which has been nicely smoothed out – and I can see the worth in that for, say, those park walks.

The final part to mention is, but of course, battery life. It's rated at 6 hours per charge, but that dips to 4 hours when you've got Immersion active. Which, given how much I enjoy using that feature, is how I use these headphones. I'd like longer innings, really, but it's still a fair showing overall.

The case will deliver a further three full charges, which will help you along, and the case can then be recharged too – although its 2-hour top-up time from dead to full seems a bit slow, given its approximate 700mAh capacity (around one sixth of your mobile phone's battery).

Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds (2nd Gen) review: Verdict

While the 2nd Gen version of Bose's QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds don't add a huge amount over the original model, that doesn't detract from what are the best active noise-cancelling (ANC) earbuds on the market.

The marginal improvements – namely wireless charging and software tweaks to the ANC's operation – only further the user experience for the better. If you're an avid wireless charging fan, then the former feature makes a strong case to spend a little extra over the still-on-sale original.

With stellar sound, an abundance of bass, ANC that almost defies belief in its ability to blot out ambient sound, and improved customisation options within the app, the Bose QC Ultra Earbuds 2 are untouchable. Don't let the large size fool you either, as these are as comfortable as they are great-sounding.

Also Consider

If you don't care for wireless charging and can find a good deal on the original QC Ultra Earbuds, then you'll get a similar audio and ANC experience – with those savings perhaps an even better case for you.

Otherwise, it's Sony's WF-1000XM6 that arguably deliver an even more refined audio experience, along with very good ANC. They might cost you a little more at the moment, though, giving Bose the edge.

If having super-strong ANC isn't the absolute in your wants, however, then Technics' AZ100 are our go-to pick for audio quality to take on the best of them. Design-wise they might appeal to those who baulk at the Bose's larger scale, too.

If you’re trying to build a minimal home gym without filling your living room or spare room with heaps of equipment, adjustable dumbbells can be a smart place to start.

Models such as the Braingain 24kg Adjustable Dumbbells, which I'll be reviewing here, promise to replace an entire rack of weights with a single, compact, convenient design.

Braingain's dumbbell, in particular, comes in under £200 for a pair, making them significantly cheaper than more established rivals like the Bowflex SelectTech 552i adjustable dumbbell.

The question is whether that saving comes at the cost of compromises, or whether these budget-adjustable dumbbells can genuinely compete. After all, you usually get what you pay for… right?

Braingain 24kg Adjustable Dumbbells review

Price and availability

The Braingain 24kg Adjustable Dumbbells are available now directly from Braingain, priced from £169.99 / $229 / €196 / AU$321 per pair, positioning them firmly in the mid-range adjustable dumbbell category. Considering they replace 15 individual fixed-weight pairs, they’re a great value for anyone building a compact home gym setup - or looking for an accessible selection of weights at home.

What are they?

Braingain's adjustable model offers 15 weight settings ranging from 2.5kg to 24kg per dumbbell, adjustable via a simple twist-dial mechanism on the handle.

That means one pair replaces an entire rack of traditional dumbbells while occupying little more space than a single heavy set. The included trays keep unused plates aligned for quick switching between exercises and tidy storage when not in use.

Lifting the handles out of the tray and returning them is also straightforward - and most importantly, they slot back into place easily. There’s nothing worse than finishing a heavy set and struggling to line the plates back up to relieve a tired body, but that wasn’t an issue here.

Weight increments include 2.5kg, 3.5kg, 4.5kg, 5.5kg, 6.5kg, 8kg, 9kg, 10kg, 11.5kg, 13.5kg, 16kg, 18kg, 20.5kg, 22.5kg and 24kg.

This variety makes them suitable for progressive overload training if you’re looking to build muscle and power, while still offering lighter options for accessory work, beginners or rehab-focused sessions.

Design and build quality

Adjustment is fast and intuitive - and they’re aesthetically pleasing, too. The handle turns smoothly to select the desired weight and can be easily adjusted with one hand. Simply twist the handle, lift the dumbbell, and the excess plates remain in the tray - a system similar to premium selector dumbbells but at a more accessible price point.

Compared to old-school spinlock-style adjustable dumbbells, the difference is immediate. There’s no unscrewing collars or swapping plates mid-session, which makes supersets and drop sets far easier to manage. Being able to switch quickly between 2.5kg and 24kg also helps keep workouts flowing without unnecessary interruptions between sets.

At 39cm in length, they’re slightly bulkier than fixed dumbbells and can take a little getting used to, particularly for smaller frames. That said, this is typical of adjustable weights and something most people adapt to quickly.

Workout performance

With a top weight of 24kg per dumbbell, the Braingain set feels reassuringly close to using traditional fixed weights and is suitable for a full-body dumbbell workout, including presses, deadlifts and rows. That said, during testing, a few limitations came up. For stronger lifters, 24kg may not be enough for heavier chest-based or leg-focused work. For me, however, the range was more than sufficient for most upper- and lower-body exercises.

Where these dumbbells really stand out is how quickly you can change weights without interrupting the flow of a session. Adjustments are easy, and throughout testing, the mechanism felt smooth and precise without sticking or jumping.

The handles also feature an embossed grip pattern, which provides a secure hold even with heavier loads or sweaty hands - something that makes a noticeable difference during warmer and more intense workouts - think dumbbell complexes, where you don’t put the bells down - or a weighted HIIT circuit.

Like most dial-adjustable systems, the Braingain are not designed to be dropped after failure reps, so controlled lifting and releasing is recommended to protect the mechanism and plates. Dropping them can cause the plates to rattle and shift, so they’re best suited to more controlled strength work rather than maximal-effort lifting and dropping to the floor in complete exhaustion.

Accessories

Each pair of Braingain adjustable dumbbells comes with dedicated storage trays that keep the plates organised and aligned, making it easier to switch weights between sets.

Optional stands(links to Braingain) are also available, raising the dumbbells to waist height - a worthwhile upgrade if they’re going to live in a permanent training space. The company also sells adjustable kettlebells if you decide to invest and expand your adjustable-weight home setup.

Verdict

For anyone setting up a home gym without the space for multiple fixed dumbbells, the Braingain 24kg Adjustable Dumbbells strike an excellent balance between usability, versatility and price. One pair replaces an entire rack of weights, and the design feels far sleeker than some chunkier brands on the market.

Finished in all black, with the adjustment mechanism neatly built into the handle, they’re compact, tidy and easy to store between sessions.

The quick-adjust dial system makes them far more practical than traditional plate-loaded alternatives, while the 15-step weight range supports everything from rehab-style light work to serious upper-body strength training.

Unless you need loads over 24kg per hand, they’re a smart, space-efficient strength investment for most home gym users.

Also consider

If the Braingain set fits your budget but you’re weighing up alternatives, there are a few strong adjustable dumbbell systems worth considering, depending on whether you want a heavier load, a different adjustment mechanism, or something from a more established brand.

If you like the dial-adjust system used by the Braingain pair but want something heavier-duty, the Bowflex SelectTech 1090i Adjustable Dumbbell adjusts from 4kg up to 41kg, replacing up to 17 pairs of fixed weights and making it suitable for stronger lifters who will quickly outgrow the 24kg offering from Braingain.

The trade-off is price - they cost significantly more - but they remain one of the best-known adjustable dumbbell systems on the market.

The PowerBlock Sport 24 Adjustable Dumbbells offer a maximum weight similar to the Braingain pair but use a stacked pin-adjustment system rather than a twist dial. The chunky box-style design isn’t for everyone aesthetically; they look nothing like dumbbells, but they’re extremely solid and durable and priced similarly.

I’ve also been lucky enough to test the Primal Personal Adjustable Dumbbells, which go up to a hefty 34kg and use a sliding pin selector system that’s quick to adjust and easy to handle. Unlike spin-collar designs, they don’t add bulk at the ends, which makes them more comfortable to rest on your legs when setting up for heavier lifts.

Overall, if your priority is value and ease of use, the Braingain pair remains one of the strongest sub-£200 options. If you need heavier loads or something a bit more substantial long-term, Bowflex or Primal make more sense.

The Therm-a-Rest Vesper is an industry leader in camping quilts, but for reasons I can’t fully understand, the market for camping quilts is very, very small.

Camping quilts take the basic premise of a sleeping bag and refine it for weight and packability. The zip is removed, but it still has an enclosed footbox, a snap closure around the neck, and removable straps to attach it to your sleeping pad. The result is that you can eliminate drafts and stay toasty but feel less restricted at night, and move fast and light between camps.

It’s a no-brainer for fastpacking, but the concept hasn’t exactly been snapped up by many big outdoor brands. Versions like Rab’s Neutrino 200 and Big Agnes’ Kings Canyon UK are largely out of stock, and only Sea to Summit and Therm-a-Rest seem to be pressing ahead, the former with the Ember Down quilt and the latter with the Vesper.

I got my hands on both of those quilts back in 2022 and, with the exception of some very cold camping at high altitude on the trek to Everest Base Camp, I’ve never gone back to using a sleeping bag.

The only issue I had with the Vesper at the time was that the footbox was a little too tight for comfort, but the updated design has eliminated that issue and added a substantial amount of down, all while keeping the weight at an industry-leading low.

I’ve been camping with the 2026 version of this quilt for the past three months here in Scotland, from the Isle of Mull to a two-day hike of the Berwickshire Coastal Path to test its newfound capabilities.

Therm-a-Rest Vesper 20°F / 6°C Down Quilt (2026) review

Price and availability

According to Therm-a-Rest, the Vesper 20°F / 6°C is available in Regular (201cm) and Long (211cm) options, but only the regular size seems to be available right now, with prices starting at £455 from online retailers like Ellis Brigham.

That’s quite a leap up from the Vesper 32°F / 0°, which retails for £380 and even leapfrogs the pricey Sea to Summit Ember Down quilt, putting it at a premium price.

It’s only available in the Vapor colourway (silvery grey), and it comes with both a storage and a stuff sack.

Design and materials

The Vesper is packed with 360g of 900-fill, PFAS-free hydrophobic goose down, which is just about as high-quality as you can find.

It’s collected into box baffles that the brand says have mesh walls to optimise loft and reduce cold spots. Extra baffles around the edge create a wall of insulation where you might expect a draft to snake in.

When I hold it up to the light, I can see that the down is really well distributed, with more in the foot box, and it’s easy to redistribute with a quick shake if it ends up bunched in the corner of a baffle after packing.

A deep footbox and snap-neck closer mean I can cinch it tightly around me in frigid conditions. Where the original design had only one strap to attach it to a sleeping pad, the updated version has two, and they work with both my Therm-a-Rest NeoLoft and Sea to Summit Ultralight XR pads.

The shell material is gloriously soft, and it’s almost a shame to wear pyjamas with this quilt as it feels so nice against my skin.

Performance and comfort

I’m only 162cm tall, and the regular size I’ve been testing gives me plenty of coverage, thanks to a generous width of 125cm across my shoulders. We’ve tested it out on my boyfriend, who is 180cm tall, and it’s long and wide enough for him too.

The foot box is still snug enough for warmth, but I no longer find it restricting when I’m lying on my back, and the width means I can sleep on my side without a draft.

This quilt has a comfort rating of 0°C and a limit of -6°C. I’m not a cold sleeper (in fact, I run like a furnace at night), so I should be able to sleep normally at temperatures down to 0°C and battle through the night even when it drops below freezing.

I haven’t pushed this quilt to its limits because I’ve been testing it in the spring, but we have had an unusually cold season so far, and I’ve been completely unbothered by the chill at night while using the Vesper.

I haven’t got too warm the way I might in a similarly rated sleeping bag, because it’s so easy to stick a leg out and cool off, but I’ve never struggled with the cold or even needed to use the snap neck closure. For me, using the straps to attach it to my pad and snuggling my feet into the footbox has been enough.

The use of Hydrophobic down isn’t surprising anymore, but it is a boon to a bag that’s going to be used primarily in British weather, as I can trust it to keep insulating even if it gets a little damp.

Though it weighs more than the Vesper 32 (because it contains more down), it’s still lighter than my Sea to Summit Ember, and at just 555g, I didn’t notice it in my pack at all during my recent thru-hike.

It’s pretty easy to pack into the stuff sack, and though I’d say the packed size is a bit bigger than the advertised 14 cm x 20 cm, it’s not a whole lot bigger than my water bottle and even fits in my 20L daypack.

The only slight gripe I have is that because the straps are detachable, they’re quite easy to lose, but for the summer months I’m quite happy to just pack them away safely.

Verdict

For the past four years, the only reason my Sea to Summit quilt kept winning out over my Vesper is that the footbox in the latter was a little tight. Now that the problem has been resolved, I can’t see any reason not to make this my camping staple. It’s light, packable, warm, and versatile, and it gives me the freedom to sleep in all positions.

If you think a camping quilt is the right choice for you, there are a few points to consider. With a comfort rating of 0°C, this quilt could certainly see you through a lot of weather, but whether or not it’s winter-ready all depends on where you’re likely to want to camp this winter and at what altitude.

The premium price is another consideration, but this quilt doesn’t have much competition (yet, anyway).

You can still find Sea to Summit’s Ember Down quilt at a lower price at retailers like Alpine Trek, which has similar specs but isn’t quite as luxurious feeling, and if you decide a more traditional sleeping bag is the way to go, we rate the Rab Neutrino 200, which is heavier but cheaper.

Drone pilots have been crying out for a drone that can be safely used on water without a chance of it sinking, and here it is, the new HoverAir Aqua in all its Day-Glo orange glory.

HoverAir has spent the past few years carving out a niche for itself with a small raft of compact, self-flying camera drones that prioritise simplicity, safety and automatic subject tracking over traditional piloting.

With the Aqua, however, the Chinese company has taken a leap and created the world's first consumer-priced waterproof flying camera designed to operate where most drones fear to tread – over lakes, seas, rivers, ponds, swamps, and swimming pools.

It's a concept that makes perfect sense given how many outdoor adventures take place on and around water, but the catch may be the price, which is higher than you might expect for a small personal follow-me drone.

Do the Aqua’s unique capabilities justify the significant investment of £1,129? In this day and age, not really, but it's still a darn fine opening salvo that works an absolute treat for those who can afford it. Let's get it on.

HoverAir Aqua review

Price and availability

The HoverAir Aqua is available now in the UK, where it can be purchased directly from HoverAir and other online stores like Amazon and Jessops.

Prices start at £1,129 for the Standard bundle, which includes the drone, Lighthouse tracking device and essential accessories. It is also widely available throughout Europe, where the Standard bundle retails at €1,299.

While this waterproof drone has officially launched globally, HoverAir has reportedly paused accepting US orders due to regulatory complexities and the FCC's ban on certain foreign drone brands.

Specifications

• Weight: 249g
• Dimensions: 20.19 × 20.59 × 6.25 cm (L×W×H)
• Max speed: Normal 34mph (55kmh)
• Max flight time: 23 mins
• Max flight distance: On water: 100-300m; On land: 500m (with phone); 1km with beacon
• Wind resistance: Level 7 (33 knots/38mph)
• Camera sensors: 1/1.28-Inch square CMOS
• Lens format equivalent: 24mm
• Max aperture: f/2.55
• FOV: 85˚
• Max video resolution: Horizontal: 4K + 1080p up to 100fps; Vertical: 4K up to 30fps
• Video modes: Standard, 10-bit H-Log, Slow-Mo, Vertical
• Max image resolution: 12MP (JPEG)
• Image stabilisation: Single axis mechanical + digital with horizon levelling
• Onboard Storage: 128GB
• MicroSD card slot: No
• Battery charging time: 52 mins
• Waterproof: IP67

Available combinations

The HoverAir Aqua is available in three main package configurations, allowing buyers to choose a bundle that matches their budget and intended use.

The Standard Bundle retails at £1,129 and includes the drone, waterproof Lighthouse controller, a single battery, a USB-C cable, a repair kit and a waterproof battery bag.

Stepping up a notch, the Fly More Bundle (£1,299) is designed for longer adventures and adds two extra smart batteries, extra waterproof battery bags and a charging hub.

Finally, at the top of the range sits the Land and Sea Bundle. This comprehensive package includes all of the Fly More accessories plus the Beacon and Joysticks control system, magnetic mounting accessories and a take-off/landing pad.

Design and build quality

I've been harping on for ages about the lack of drones that are able to survive a fall into water without sinking to the bottom like a stone. To my knowledge, only two drones have thus far been capable of flotation in an emergency: the extraordinarily expensive pro-spec SplashDrone and the now-defunct PowerVision Power Egg X.

There have also been many DIY attempts over the years, with users zip-tying polystyrene landing gear to conventional drones, but these have consistently compromised the craft's aerodynamics, especially in windy conditions.

Well, it seems that HoverAir has beaten DJI to the punch once again by closely observing the market and producing the Aqua, a one-of-a-kind drone that can take off and land on water. This is long overdue, since water – specifically salt water – is the number one enemy of any drone and the sole reason so many pilots are reluctant to fly over seas, lakes, and rivers.

The HoverAir Aqua is unlike any other consumer drone currently on the market – an autonomous flying camera with a fully waterproof design that makes it unsinkable. The fact that it's decked out in bright orange is not only a welcome change from the grey norm, but it genuinely makes it much, much easier to see in the air and on the water.

Purpose-built for watersports and other watery outdoor adventures, the Aqua carries an IP67 waterproof rating, which means it's watertight enough to survive submersion to a depth of up to one metre for up to 30 minutes. It also weighs just 249g, so it doesn't require anything beyond the easy-to-attain Flyer and Operator IDs to fly it.

Unlike the company’s land-based HoverAir X1 Pro, the Aqua has been designed as a one-piece fuselage for structural integrity so it cannot be folded.

At 20cm in length, 20.59cm in width and 6.25cm in height, it is far too big for any pocket and for some reason, none of the package configurations includes the official bag for the drone, so you'll have to purchase it separately or transport it as best you can without damaging the camera lens.

The HoverAir Aqua's build quality is excellent throughout with solid assembly and no creaks, flexing panels or obvious weak points. Its main means of flotation is a buoyant outer tube that feels like spongy memory foam under its tough nylon-like wrap. This tube also serves as a collision bumper, so there's very little chance of being injured even if it accidentally flies into you at speed.

The four mini props, meanwhile, are encased in the surrounding flotation tube, with soft plastic guards on top to protect your fingers when you hand-catch the drone from above. Oh, and you'll be very pleased to learn that even the Standard package includes a repair kit comprising a flotation tube, props and prop guards.

Amazingly, the Aqua can hit a top speed of 34 mph (55 km/h), which is easily fast enough to film the most rapid watersports like kiteboarding, sailboarding, and even skiing without leaving the drone behind.

Moreover, the Aqua's wind speed rating is an astonishing Level 7 (33 knots/38mph), one level up from the big DJI Mavic 4 Pro. You also get up to 23 minutes of flight time with this drone, and that's only a few minutes shy of the similarly sized but foldable DJI Flip.

While other follow-me drones use their cameras to track the user without requiring an app or controller, this one is more specialised and aimed at waterborne activities where signals can be easily interrupted.

Hence, the user is required to wear an arm-mounted bright orange transmitter called a Lighthouse so the drone can lock onto its subject and avoid being confused by water reflections, sea spray, or large waves.

One of the HoverAir Aqua's most impressive features is its integrated one-inch colour screen interface, which transforms what could be a complicated setup process into something a lot more straightforward.

The ultra-crisp, high-resolution display is really easy to read in a variety of lighting conditions while providing clear menus, large icons and a logical layout that makes everything easy to navigate.

Aside from essential information like battery status, camera settings, connection status and instant access to its wide range of follow-me flight modes (including their individual flight parameters), the screen interface also lets you watch the videos you've shot on the spot so you can instantly check whether you got something in the can or whether you need to do another take.

A series of very loud and clear voice alerts, meanwhile, keeps the pilot informed every step of the way.

Ways to use the HoverAir Aqua

The HoverAir Aqua has been designed essentially for use on water, though it's just as happy on land. Unlike the HoverAir X1 Pro I reviewed in 2024, which follows the user on land using advanced AI-powered vision-tracking algorithms combined with built-in cameras and sensors, the Aqua predominantly tracks the user by locking onto a wearable, waterproof tracker and control hub called the Lighthouse, which straps around the upper arm.

Instead of relying on camera vision alone, the Aqua uses centimetre-accuracy RTK GPS (Real-Time Kinematic) technology to create a virtual tether between the drone and the Lighthouse, ensuring it stays locked onto the individual even when its line of sight is temporarily blocked by waves or the user is obscured in a crowd.

Given that both the drone and Lighthouse beacon are fully waterproof, any water sport fan can now indulge in their favourite pastime and film themselves while doing it.

In fact, this drone is suitable for a wide range of water sports, whether it's shooting slower activities like paddleboarding and swimming or nippy sports like surfing, kitesurfing, sailboarding, and hydrofoiling. Even skiing is doable if the speed is less than the drone's maximum velocity of 34mph.

The Aqua can be flown in several ways. Obviously, the Lighthouse is far and away the best method when used on water, but you can also fly it using the HoverAir app's virtual joysticks or the optional Beacon controller with physical joysticks.

And if you select the tracking option in the app and draw a box on the screen around a subject, the drone will perform any number of pre-set tracking shots without the need for the Lighthouse beacon. You can read more about this drone's multitude of preset flight modes in the chapter below.

The HoverAir can take off and land from the hand, the ground or water. To use the hand method, hold the drone from above, tap the 'take off' icon on the Lighthouse, the main power button on the drone, or, more awkwardly, the take-off button in the app, and let go once the props start spinning.

To land it, either grab the top of the drone after you've initialised a return to home and flip it over quickly to shut the motors off or simply land it on water or solid land. If using the Lighthouse on water, tapping the landing button will have it return to you and hover nearby for 15 seconds, giving you time to grab it before it initiates an automatic landing sequence.

As an extra rescue bonus, if the drone hits an overhanging tree, sail or other obstacle and crashes into the water upside down, a simple tap of the 'take off' button on the Lighthouse will initiate a turtle flip before the drone lifts off. Very clever.

Another very cool feature when wearing the Lighthouse is the ability to adjust the drone's height, distance, and angle from the subject by tapping the Lighthouse's black directional buttons. This saves having to bring the drone back to you or reach for the app to make these changes.

Camera features

The HoverAir Aqua camera is equipped with a 1/1.28-inch CMOS sensor that supports various resolutions, including 4K and 1080p at up to 100 fps, and vertical 4K at up to 30 fps. Its photo resolution is 12MP.

The lens, meanwhile, boasts a format-equivalent focal length of 24mm, a maximum aperture of f/2.55, and an 85˚ field of view. The user also has a choice of several video modes: Standard, 10-bit H-Log, Slow-Mo and Vertical.

The camera itself is mounted on a single-axis mechanical gimbal with digital image stabilisation and horizon levelling, while a hydrophobic, anti-fog lens coating helps keep the lens clear in wet and humid environments.

For waterproofing, there is no MicroSD card slot on this drone, so it comes with a commendable 128GB of onboard storage, which is more than enough space for any all-day shoot.

Finally, you can copy Aqua’s raw video and photo files in two ways: wirelessly from the drone to a phone or tablet, or directly to a computer via its water-sealed USB-C port.

Unless you're editing footage on your phone or tablet, I would go for the USB desktop route every time. Simply turn the drone on, plug in the supplied USB-C cable, and look for its drive icon on the desktop.

Flight modes

The HoverAir Aqua comes with a banquette of 14 autonomous flight modes, tailored in some instances to specific water sport disciplines. Here's a handy breakdown:

Basic Modes

Follow: Automatically tracks and keeps you in the frame from the front, back or side.

Orbit: Rotates a full 360° around the subject with adjustable radius and speed.

Hover: Stays locked in a stationary position while swivelling to track the user.

Zoom Out: Flies backwards and upward to reveal the surrounding panorama.

Bird's Eye: Flies straight upwards with the camera facing directly down.

Water Modes

Kayak Mode: Optimised for low-profile tracking on rivers and open water.

Paddleboard (SUP) Mode: Tracks your full body and allows for one-handed angle adjustments via the wearable Lighthouse controller.

Surf Mode: Uses high-speed AI tracking (up to 34 mph) to follow and capture fast wave-riding.

Foil Mode: Tuned for wind surfing, sail boarding, hydro-foiling and other fast-moving watersports.

Cinematic Modes

Spiral: Flies upward in a spiral pattern to capture an evolving, dramatic scene.

Dolly Track: Maintains a fixed distance in front of you as you move toward the camera.

Angle Track: Tracks alongside to capture a side-profile view.

360 Spin: The drone spins 360˚ with the camera facing outwards for panoramic captures.

Orbit Follow: Combines circular movements with customisable speed and radius.

Flight and camera performance

I tested the Aqua in a field and also let it loose on a canal, and it flew like a trouper, even when the wind was strong enough to pitch it at a very acute angle. I’m not sure how HoverAir managed to make this light, not-especially-aerodynamic drone so wind-resistant, but hat’s off to them.

I've also been extremely impressed with this drone's ability to track a subject as if following a breadcrumb trail, especially during my land tests.

However, because it is locked to the Lighthouse beacon, which is worn on the upper arm, it does sometimes tend to favour one side more than the other, and you can see this in some of the videos I took at Cropredy’s canal-based kayak racing club.

In general, the Aqua mostly chose a central position when using the Kayak mode, but when the canal narrowed, it twice chose the side the beacon was on – the kayaker's right arm.

Since it doesn’t feature obstacle avoidance, the drone crashed into a canal boat on one occasion – remarkably surviving unscathed – and almost came a cropper on the return trip when it flew perilously close to a wall, brushing some overhanging leaves in the process.

It never truly recovered from this last event because it spent the next few seconds desperately trying to keep up with the kayak at racing speed. Its camera, too, seemed to bob up and down as if it were having trouble locking onto its target. But, hey, it missed the canal bridge and produced some fabulous footage in the process.

To be fair, this drone is designed for use in open water where it has space to breathe, but I have to say that I was pretty chuffed it performed as well as it did in a confined area, too.

No camera drone is worth its salt if the resulting footage is below par. From my experience, sharpness and definition tend to fall away the higher a drone flies, and this is most notable when flying over woodland, when everything becomes a wee bit smudgy.

However, when a drone gets much closer to its subject, everything in the frame pops with vastly improved sharpness and definition.

While the Aqua's imagery doesn't quite match the DJI Mini 4 Pro or Mini 5 Pro for overall video quality, I think it's spot-on perfect for close-quarters work from several metres away, which is what it was designed for.

Yes, you may notice some minor visual anomalies here and there on a desktop, but I believe it's more than good enough for tablet and phone use and for social media.

I've also been impressed with the camera's quick focusing, exceptional smoothness from the gimbal and its ability to keep the subject in frame, though I did make sure I had set the drone's distance to either medium or far (if set too close, there's a chance your head may be cut off in the frame). I was also pleased to see that none of the footage was affected by water droplets on the lens.

I guess the only annoying things about the whole experience were the insane noise it makes – especially when flipping it over to turn it off – and the propensity for disconnections and reconnections with the Lighthouse, sometimes within seconds of each other.

Mind, this mostly happened at the beginning of a session and seemed to have no bearing on the safety of the craft. Just as well, because I was getting quite irritated by the loud vocal alerts of 'Lighthouse disconnected, Lighthouse connected'. Perhaps a future firmware update will solve this issue.

Verdict

The new HoverAir Aqua stands apart from every other consumer drone I’ve tested thanks to its waterproof design and ability to operate effortlessly over water, even in a very stiff sea breeze.

Its intelligent armband-tracking technology reliably follows the user while capturing unique waterborne footage that traditional drones would struggle to achieve without falling in and sinking like a brick.

Compact, easy to use and packed with innovative features, this amazing drone offers plenty of appeal for water sport fans and even landlubbers. However, all this innovation comes at a high cost, placing it firmly in the territory of enthusiasts and wealthy boat owners.